pdf_content.txt

Software manual
TruTops CAD 
TruTops from Version 8 

Software manual  
TruTops CAD 
TruTops from Version 8 
Edition 2015-12-04
Order Information Please specify when ordering this document:
Software manual
TruTops CAD
Edition 2015-12-04
Document number S523EN
Address for orders TRUMPF GmbH + Co. KG
Technische Redaktion
Johann-Maus-Straße 2
D-71254 Ditzingen
Fon: +49 7156 303 - 0
Internet: http://www.trumpf.com
E-Mail: docu.tw@de.trumpf.com
© TRUMPF GmbH + Co. KG
Table of contents
Basics
1 Starting and exiting TruTops 1‐7
1.1 Starting TruTops 1‐7
1.2 Exiting TruTops 1‐7
2 Online help, software version, tips and
tricks from the Internet
1‐8
2.1 To call up the online help 1‐8
2.2 Obtaining tips and tricks directly from the
Internet
1‐8
2.3 Showing software version 1‐8
3 Applications in TruTops 1‐9
3.1 Applications, closing and reopening individu-
ally
1‐9
3.2 Applications, opening several times ("copy") 1‐10
3.3 Application, closing permanently ("deleting") 1‐10
3.4 Application, renaming 1‐10
3.5 Switching language for all applications 1‐11
3.6 Closing open files 1‐11
4 User-defined settings 1‐12
4.1 Copying and transferring user-defined set-
tings
1‐12
5 Menus, function browsers and toolbars 1‐14
5.1 Displaying and hiding the function browser 1‐16
5.2 Displaying and hiding button texts in the
function browser
1‐17
5.3 Displaying and hiding quick navigation bar 1‐17
5.4 Displaying and hiding toolbars 1‐17
5.5 Moving or downsizing toolbars 1‐18
5.6 Modifying existing toolbars, creating own tool-
bars
1‐18
5.7 Renaming a toolbar 1‐19
5.8 Deleting a toolbar 1‐19
 
S523EN 2015-12-04 Table of contents 0‐1
Chapter 1 
5.9 Resetting toolbars to their original status 1‐19
5.10 Modifying the size of the symbols 1‐19
5.11 Displaying overlapping contours 1‐20
5.12 Reactivating disabled optional message
boxes
1‐20
6 TruTops with PDM (Product Data Manage-
ment)
1‐21
6.1 What is PDM? 1‐21
6.2 TruTops with PDM, TruTops without PDM – a
comparison
1‐22
7 PDM functions, calling up via prompt/
scripts (pdmCLI.exe)
1‐23
7.1 Calling up help for pdmCLI.exe 1‐23
7.2 Examples of PDM functions which can be
performed with pdmCLI.exe
1‐24
8 TruTops file browser 1‐27
8.1 Opening TruTops file browser 1‐28
8.2 Creating a new folder 1‐29
8.3 Deleting folders 1‐29
8.4 Renaming files or folders 1‐29
8.5 Deleting and restoring files, emptying the
recycle bin (PDM)
1‐30
8.6 Searching for files 1‐31
8.7 Adding other details to the list field of the
files
1‐32
8.8 Opening files with the Geo Viewer 1‐33
8.9 Sending files through e-mail 1‐33
8.10 Zipping files 1‐33
8.11 Sending files from PDM to "My Documents"
in the file system
1‐34
9 Creating and restoring file versions (PDM) 1‐35
9.1 Displaying and hiding the version window 1‐35
9.2 Creating a file version 1‐35
9.3 Restoring a file version 1‐36
9.4 Deleting a file version 1‐37
9.5 Tips & Tricks 1‐37
Archiving the copies of a file 1‐37
 
0‐2 Table of contents 2015-12-04 S523EN
10 File Properties 1‐39
10.1 Viewing file properties 1‐39
10.2 Selecting the unprocessed material ID and
raw material from the drawing data
1‐39
11 Files and folders, importing/exporting
(PDM)
1‐41
11.1 Files, importing/exporting via Windows
Explorer (PDM)
1‐41
11.2 Importing files and single folders using the
file browser (PDM)
1‐41
11.3 Folders, importing several folders in a single
job step (PDM)
1‐42
11.4 Files, exporting via the TruTops file browser
(PDM)
1‐43
11.5 Importing/exporting files using the prompt/
script (PDM)
1‐44
12 Dependencies Between Files 1‐45
12.1 Checking dependencies between files (PDM) 1‐45
12.2 Deleting, exporting dependent files, display-
ing properties
1‐46
13 Updated status of the files 1‐48
13.1 Checking the updated status of the files auto-
matically when loading and saving in TruTops
(PDM)
1‐48
14 Characteristics: a property of elements
and contours
1‐49
14.1 Switching "Characteristic fixed" on or off -
TruTops behavior
1‐49
14.2 Notches: Advanced options through the
"Characteristic" property
1‐51
15 Screen display 1‐52
15.1 Adapting window size 1‐52
15.2 Increasing or reducing the work surface 1‐52
15.3 Modifying color scheme 1‐52
15.4 Moving masks and messages on the inter-
face
1‐53
 
S523EN 2015-12-04 Table of contents 0‐3
16 Display of drawings 1‐54
16.1 Restructuring display of drawings 1‐54
16.2 Displaying drawing completely 1‐54
16.3 Displaying sheet completely 1‐54
16.4 Displaying detail view 1‐54
16.5 Moving screen section 1‐55
16.6 Zooming drawing 1‐55
16.7 Getting last view 1‐56
16.8 Memorizing and recalling view 1‐56
16.9 Displaying and hiding outline points 1‐56
17 Selection preview, selecting components 1‐57
17.1 Working with selection preview 1‐57
Activating selection preview 1‐58
17.2 Selecting components 1‐58
Multiple selection 1‐58
Fixed multiple selection 1‐59
Switching between multiple selection and
fixed multiple selection
1‐59
Switching back to individual selection 1‐59
Marking all components 1‐59
18 Operating TruTops with the mouse 1‐61
18.1 Automatically placing the mouse pointer in
masks
1‐61
19 Operating TruTops using keyboard 1‐62
19.1 Using Windows keyboard commands and
shortcuts
1‐62
19.2 Entering numerical values and coordinates 1‐62
19.3 Entering texts in input fields 1‐62
19.4 Using key functions of TruTops 1‐63
19.5 Using "Copy" – "Paste" 1‐64
19.6 Using keyboard buffer of the command line
(repeating entries)
1‐64
20 Calculator 1‐65
20.1 Deactivating calculator permanently 1‐65
20.2 Entering numerical values in input fields 1‐66
20.3 Entering X and Y coordinates of points 1‐66
 
0‐4 Table of contents 2015-12-04 S523EN
21 Searching with the help of place holders
(wildcards)
1‐67
22 Message and confirmation masks 1‐68
22.1 Reactivating hidden message and confirma-
tion masks
1‐68
23 Print 1‐69
23.1 Printing screen content 1‐69
23.2 Configuring line thickness when printing
screen contents
1‐69
23.3 Printing GEO files as *.HPGL files 1‐69
24 Using auxiliary tools 1‐71
24.1 Drawing auxiliary lines 1‐71
Drawing auxiliary line through 2 points 1‐71
Drawing an auxiliary line parallel to the
existing auxiliary line
1‐71
Drawing horizontal or vertical auxiliary
lines
1‐71
Drawing an auxiliary line as a tangent at
the arc element and point
1‐72
Drawing an auxiliary line at right angles to
an element
1‐72
Drawing an auxiliary line through point
and angle of inclination
1‐73
Drawing an auxiliary line through point
and angle to the base line
1‐73
Drawing an auxiliary line through tangent
at 2 arc elements
1‐74
Dividing an element with an auxiliary line 1‐74
24.2 Drawing auxiliary circle 1‐75
Drawing an auxiliary circle through three
points
1‐75
Drawing auxiliary circle through center
and radius
1‐75
Drawing auxiliary circle through diameter 1‐75
Drawing auxiliary circle through center
and diameter
1‐76
Drawing concentric auxiliary circles 1‐76
Drawing auxiliary circle tangential to two
elements
1‐77
Drawing auxiliary circle tangential to an
element and two points
1‐77
 
S523EN 2015-12-04 Table of contents 0‐5
Drawing auxiliary circle tangential to three
elements
1‐78
Drawing auxiliary circle tangential to an
element
1‐78
24.3 Auxiliary geometry 1‐78
Auxiliary geometry, deleting 1‐79
24.4 Measuring 1‐79
Measuring the distance between 2 points 1‐79
Measuring coordinates of a point 1‐79
Measuring horizontal or vertical distance
between 2 points
1‐79
Measuring coordinates, radius and diame-
ter of a circle
1‐79
Measuring angle 1‐80
Measuring length 1‐80
24.5 Zero point of the coordinate system 1‐80
Displacing zero point 1‐80
25 Help in the case of problems 1‐81
25.1 Diagnostics for program crash 1‐81
Setting basic data
1 The database as a knowledge-base 2‐3
1.1 Backup of data 2‐3
1.2 To import data into the database 2‐4
1.3 To modify the database 2‐4
1.4 To send a database via email 2‐4
2 TRUMPF function 2‐6
3 Data management 2‐7
3.1 To open the data management 2‐7
4 Machine data 2‐8
4.1 To copy or delete a machine 2‐8
Copying machine 2‐8
Deleting machine 2‐9
 
0‐6 Table of contents 2015-12-04 S523EN
Chapter 2 
5 Material data 2‐10
5.1 To modify material data 2‐12
5.2 To delete material data 2‐13
6 System rules 2‐14
6.1 To change the value of a variable 2‐14
6.2 To create a variable 2‐15
6.3 To copy a variable 2‐15
6.4 To display the details for a variable 2‐16
6.5 To delete a variable 2‐17
6.6 To assign the values to colors and line types 2‐18
6.7 Description of variables in the system rules 2‐18
7 NC post-processing programs, external
programs
2‐26
7.1 To enter programs 2‐26
7.2 To execute programs 2‐28
7.3 Creating a collection call up for several NC
post-processing programs
2‐28
7.4 To modify programs 2‐31
7.5 To delete programs 2‐31
8 User-defined programs 2‐32
8.1 To enter programs 2‐32
8.2 To change programs 2‐32
8.3 To run programs 2‐32
Opening and saving files
1 Saving TruTops CAD files 3‐3
1.1 Saving drawings as a workfile 3‐3
1.2 Saving drawing as GEO 3‐4
1.3 Entering drawing data 3‐4
1.4 Saving drawings as DXF 3‐6
1.5 Saving geometry templates as VLG for single
holes, rows of holes and circles of holes
3‐7
1.6 Saving punching or bending tools as WZG 3‐8
 
S523EN 2015-12-04 Table of contents 0‐7
Chapter 3 
2 Opening TruTops CAD files 3‐9
2.1 Opening workfile 3‐9
2.2 Opening TruTops files 3‐9
2.3 Opening and vectorizing image files
(optional)
3‐9
3 Opening foreign formats from CAD sys-
tems
3‐14
3.1 Loading 2D drawings in format DXF, DWG,
IGS or MI
3‐14
3.2 Defining loading options for 2D drawings in
DXF/DWG format
3‐15
3.3 Defining loading options for 2D drawings in
IGS format
3‐19
3.4 Defining loading options for 2D drawings in
MI format
3‐21
4 Extracting parts and sheets from foreign
formats (assistant for layout
3‐27
4.1 Extracting parts from drawings in foreign for-
mat and saving as GEO
3‐27
4.2 Extracting parts from drawings in foreign for-
mat and saving as sheet
3‐28
4.3 Filled-in selected parts 3‐31
Geometries
1 Drawing geometries 4‐7
1.1 Points 4‐7
Drawing points 4‐7
1.2 Lines 4‐7
Drawing a line via 2 points 4‐7
Drawing parallel line to the available line 4‐8
Drawing horizontal or vertical lines 4‐8
Drawing a line as a tangent at an arc ele-
ment and point
4‐9
Drawing a line at a right angle to another
element
4‐9
Drawing a line with point, angle of inclina-
tion and length
4‐9
 
0‐8 Table of contents 2015-12-04 S523EN
Chapter 4 
Drawing a line via tangent at 2 arc ele-
ments
4‐10
1.3 Circles 4‐10
Drawing a circle via 3 points 4‐10
Drawing a circle via center and radius 4‐10
Drawing a circle via diameter 4‐11
Drawing a circle via center and radius 4‐11
Drawing a circle tangential to 2 elements 4‐11
Drawing concentric circles 4‐12
1.4 Polygons 4‐12
Polygons, drawing 4‐12
1.5 Rectangle 4‐13
Drawing rectangles 4‐13
1.6 Arcs 4‐13
Drawing an arc via 3 points 4‐13
Drawing an arc via center, start and end
point
4‐13
Drawing an arc via diameter 4‐14
Drawing a concentric arc 4‐14
Drawing an arc via center, radius, start
and final angle
4‐15
Drawing a multicurve contour 4‐15
Converting arcs into roundings 4‐16
1.7 Notches 4‐16
Creating corner notches with different dis-
tances
4‐17
Creating corner notches with the same
distances
4‐18
Creating rectangular notches 4‐18
Creating triangular notches 4‐19
Creating the bend relief later 4‐20
1.8 Bevels 4‐20
Drawing a bevel with the distance to the
vertex
4‐20
Drawing a bevel via a corner point 4‐21
1.9 Rounding corners 4‐21
Corner round 4‐21
Restoring corners 4‐21
1.10 Drawing an equidistant to the contour 4‐22
1.11 Redrawing construction geometry 4‐22
 
S523EN 2015-12-04 Table of contents 0‐9
2 Generating single holes, circles of holes
and rows of holes (macros)
4‐24
2.1 Defining circle, ellipse or dot marked point as
base element
4‐24
2.2 Defining rectangle or oblong hole as base
element
4‐26
2.3 Defining your own geometry templates as
base element
4‐27
2.4 Defining the drawing of a forming tool as
base element
4‐28
2.5 Defining a tool drawing as base element 4‐30
2.6 Generating single hole via macro 4‐31
2.7 Generating a circle of holes via macro 4‐32
2.8 Generating a row of holes via macro 4‐33
2.9 Generating hole grid via macro 4‐34
2.10 Generating bend relief via macro 4‐35
2.11 Delete duplicate single holes 4‐35
3 Modifying drawn geometries 4‐37
3.1 Shifting geometries 4‐37
Moving geometries horizontally or verti-
cally
4‐37
Moving geometries via 2 points 4‐38
3.2 Rotating geometries 4‐38
Rotating geometries around a center point 4‐38
Rotate geometries around 2 points 4‐39
3.3 Modifying the scale of geometries 4‐40
Modifying the scale of geometries around
a center
4‐40
Modifying the scale of geometries via 2
points
4‐41
3.4 Mirroring geometries 4‐42
Mirroring geometries in a horizontal or
vertical mirror line
4‐42
Mirroring geometries around a symmetry
point
4‐42
Mirroring geometries around any axis 4‐43
3.5 Stretching geometries 4‐44
Stretching geometry horizontal or vertical 4‐44
Stretching the geometry based on two
points
4‐44
3.6 Modifying line attributes (color and line type) 4‐45
Preset line color and line type. 4‐45
 
0‐10 Table of contents 2015-12-04 S523EN
Modify the line color/line type of single
(available) elements.
4‐45
Globally modifying lines of one color
and/or line type
4‐45
3.7 Modifying radiuses and diameters of round-
ings or circles
4‐46
Modify rounding radius 4‐46
Modifying diameters of circles 4‐46
4 Correcting geometries 4‐47
4.1 Separating or combining elements 4‐47
Separate an element 4‐47
Separating two elements at their point of
intersection
4‐48
Combining elements together 4‐48
4.2 Shortening or extending elements 4‐49
Shortening or extending an element 4‐49
Shortening or extending two elements 4‐50
4.3 Converting narrow contours into lines 4‐52
Converting rectangles or oblong holes into
lines
4‐52
4.4 Converting lines 4‐53
Converting lines into bevels 4‐53
5 Editing multiple outer contours 4‐54
5.1 Displaying outer contours 4‐54
5.2 Displaying the first outer contour 4‐54
5.3 Going to the next outer contour 4‐55
5.4 Highlighting the outer contour 4‐55
5.5 Marking outer contour 4‐55
5.6 Deleting contour 4‐55
5.7 Selecting outer contour 4‐55
5.8 Zooming outer contour 4‐56
6 Deleting geometries 4‐57
6.1 Deleteing single elements or contours 4‐57
6.2 Deleting elements with particular line proper-
ties
4‐57
6.3 Delete small contours 4‐57
6.4 Deleting short elements 4‐58
6.5 Deleting attributes 4‐58
6.6 Delete dimensioning 4‐58
 
S523EN 2015-12-04 Table of contents 0‐11
6.7 Delete duplicate single holes 4‐58
6.8 Deleting construction geometries 4‐59
7 Dimensioning geometries (option) 4‐60
7.1 Showing and hiding dimensionings 4‐60
7.2 Lines 4‐60
7.3 Circles, radiuses, arc lengths 4‐62
7.4 Angle 4‐62
7.5 Moving dimensioning 4‐63
7.6 Adapting dimensioning text 4‐63
7.7 Setting the dimensioning format 4‐65
7.8 Deleting dimensioning 4‐65
7.9 Setting standard text size 4‐65
8 Element groups 4‐66
8.1 Forming element groups 4‐66
8.2 Dissolving element groups 4‐66
9 Marking and hatching 4‐67
9.1 Setting marking 4‐67
9.2 Deleteing marking 4‐67
9.3 Hatching closed contours 4‐67
9.4 Hatching contours with closed inner contours 4‐68
9.5 Changing the hatching 4‐69
9.6 Deleting the hatching 4‐69
10 Inserting or modifying text in geometries 4‐70
10.1 Entering text and defining parameters 4‐70
10.2 Modifying text parameters 4‐72
10.3 Mirroring FNT texts 4‐72
10.4 Changing FNT text to TTF text (and vice
versa)
4‐73
10.5 Loading DXF, DWG and MI files with TTF
texts
4‐73
10.6 Creating texts with curvature 4‐73
10.7 Modifying TTF texts in Variants 4‐74
10.8 Creating your own text font 4‐75
11 Embossed texts 4‐78
11.1 Creating embossed text 4‐78
11.2 Using special characters 4‐79
 
0‐12 Table of contents 2015-12-04 S523EN
12 Comparing geometries with one another
(geometry comparator)
4‐80
12.1 Opening and closing geometry comparator 4‐80
12.2 Comparing a reference drawing and a com-
parison drawing with one another
4‐80
12.3 Merging a reference drawing with a compari-
son drawing
4‐82
12.4 Deleting a reference drawing or a compari-
son drawing
4‐82
13 Prepare geometries for editing 4‐83
13.1 Loading and preparing geometries 4‐83
13.2 Modifying the processing sequence of pre-
pared geometries
4‐83
13.3 Modifying the start point for the machining 4‐85
13.4 Selecting preferred direction 4‐85
13.5 Determining the contour start 4‐86
13.6 Prefer contours 4‐86
13.7 Recalculating the preparation 4‐87
13.8 Saving prepared geometries 4‐87
14 Processing films 4‐88
14.1 Film separation 4‐88
14.2 Film peeling assistant 4‐88
Variants
1 Variants 5‐3
1.1 Generating geometries in different variants
(optional)
5‐3
Starting/ending the variant module 5‐4
Generating variants 5‐4
Undoing variants 5‐6
Executing variants 5‐6
Selecting an overview of the variants 5‐7
Allocating a variant to an element or a
bending
5‐7
Adopting element selection of an existing
variant
5‐7
 
S523EN 2015-12-04 Table of contents 0‐13
Chapter 5 
Example 5‐8
1.2 Working with variables and reference ele-
ments
5‐9
Creating and editing variables 5‐9
Importing variables 5‐11
Exporting variables 5‐11
Delete variables 5‐12
Set reference element 5‐12
Remove reference element 5‐13
Show reference element 5‐13
1.3 Manage variants 5‐13
Positioning variants 5‐13
Creating new variants 5‐14
Copying variants 5‐14
Modifying variants 5‐14
Deleting variants 5‐14
Renumbering variants 5‐14
Executing variants several times 5‐15
Saving geometry with variant as *.GMV 5‐15
Exporting variant as *.GEO 5‐16
Exporting variants to Excel 5‐16
Importing variants from Excel 5‐17
Bending
1 Bending lines 6‐3
1.1 Generating bending lines 6‐3
1.2 Assigning bending information 6‐4
1.3 Modifying bending lines 6‐4
1.4 Inverting bending lines 6‐4
1.5 Marking bending lines 6‐5
1.6 Removing the bending line marking 6‐5
1.7 Modify unfolding 6‐5
1.8 Generating bending notches 6‐6
2 Bending tools 6‐7
2.1 Transferring bending tools 6‐7
2.2 Restricting the selection of bending tools 6‐7
 
0‐14 Table of contents 2015-12-04 S523EN
Chapter 6 
2.3 Drawing bending tool 6‐7
Modifying the bending tool 6‐8
Drawing an upper tool 6‐8
Drawing a lower tool 6‐9
Drawing holder 6‐11
Drawing Z tool 6‐11
Drawing an adapter 6‐12
Drawing front view of a horn tool 6‐12
3 Bending profiles 6‐13
3.1 Unfolding a bending profile 6‐13
3.2 Creating a bending profile 6‐13
3.3 Creating a profile as auxiliary geometry 6‐14
3.4 Generating bumping (round bends) 6‐14
3.5 Showing material 6‐15
4 Creating profiles in the profile editor 6‐16
4.1 Working in the profile editor 6‐16
Opening the profile editor 6‐16
4.2 Opening and saving profiles 6‐17
Opening a profile 6‐17
Saving a profile 6‐17
4.3 Creating a profile 6‐17
Sketch 6‐18
Profile table - entering angle and segment
length
6‐18
Profile table - entering angle and delta X
or delta Y
6‐19
Profile table - entering delta X and delta Y 6‐20
4.4 Modifying profiles 6‐21
4.5 Deleting profiles 6‐22
4.6 Deleting an element 6‐22
4.7 Displaying the dimensioning 6‐22
4.8 Profile table 6‐23
Normal bending 6‐24
Round bending 6‐25
Folding 6‐26
Index
 
S523EN 2015-12-04 Table of contents 0‐15
Chapter 7 
 
0‐16 Table of contents 2015-12-04 S523EN
Chapter 1
Basics
1 Starting and exiting TruTops 1‐7
1.1 Starting TruTops 1‐7
1.2 Exiting TruTops 1‐7
2 Online help, software version, tips and
tricks from the Internet
1‐8
2.1 To call up the online help 1‐8
2.2 Obtaining tips and tricks directly from the
Internet
1‐8
2.3 Showing software version 1‐8
3 Applications in TruTops 1‐9
3.1 Applications, closing and reopening individu-
ally
1‐9
3.2 Applications, opening several times ("copy") 1‐10
3.3 Application, closing permanently ("deleting") 1‐10
3.4 Application, renaming 1‐10
3.5 Switching language for all applications 1‐11
 
S523EN 2015-12-04 Basics 1‐1
3.6 Closing open files 1‐11
4 User-defined settings 1‐12
4.1 Copying and transferring user-defined set-
tings
1‐12
5 Menus, function browsers and toolbars 1‐14
5.1 Displaying and hiding the function browser 1‐16
5.2 Displaying and hiding button texts in the
function browser
1‐17
5.3 Displaying and hiding quick navigation bar 1‐17
5.4 Displaying and hiding toolbars 1‐17
5.5 Moving or downsizing toolbars 1‐18
5.6 Modifying existing toolbars, creating own tool-
bars
1‐18
5.7 Renaming a toolbar 1‐19
5.8 Deleting a toolbar 1‐19
5.9 Resetting toolbars to their original status 1‐19
5.10 Modifying the size of the symbols 1‐19
5.11 Displaying overlapping contours 1‐20
5.12 Reactivating disabled optional message
boxes
1‐20
6 TruTops with PDM (Product Data Manage-
ment)
1‐21
6.1 What is PDM? 1‐21
6.2 TruTops with PDM, TruTops without PDM – a
comparison
1‐22
7 PDM functions, calling up via prompt/
scripts (pdmCLI.exe)
1‐23
7.1 Calling up help for pdmCLI.exe 1‐23
7.2 Examples of PDM functions which can be
performed with pdmCLI.exe
1‐24
8 TruTops file browser 1‐27
8.1 Opening TruTops file browser 1‐28
8.2 Creating a new folder 1‐29
8.3 Deleting folders 1‐29
8.4 Renaming files or folders 1‐29
8.5 Deleting and restoring files, emptying the
recycle bin (PDM)
1‐30
8.6 Searching for files 1‐31
 
1‐2 Basics 2015-12-04 S523EN
8.7 Adding other details to the list field of the
files
1‐32
8.8 Opening files with the Geo Viewer 1‐33
8.9 Sending files through e-mail 1‐33
8.10 Zipping files 1‐33
8.11 Sending files from PDM to "My Documents"
in the file system
1‐34
9 Creating and restoring file versions (PDM) 1‐35
9.1 Displaying and hiding the version window 1‐35
9.2 Creating a file version 1‐35
9.3 Restoring a file version 1‐36
9.4 Deleting a file version 1‐37
9.5 Tips & Tricks 1‐37
Archiving the copies of a file 1‐37
10 File Properties 1‐39
10.1 Viewing file properties 1‐39
10.2 Selecting the unprocessed material ID and
raw material from the drawing data
1‐39
11 Files and folders, importing/exporting
(PDM)
1‐41
11.1 Files, importing/exporting via Windows
Explorer (PDM)
1‐41
11.2 Importing files and single folders using the
file browser (PDM)
1‐41
11.3 Folders, importing several folders in a single
job step (PDM)
1‐42
11.4 Files, exporting via the TruTops file browser
(PDM)
1‐43
11.5 Importing/exporting files using the prompt/
script (PDM)
1‐44
12 Dependencies Between Files 1‐45
12.1 Checking dependencies between files (PDM) 1‐45
12.2 Deleting, exporting dependent files, display-
ing properties
1‐46
13 Updated status of the files 1‐48
13.1 Checking the updated status of the files auto-
matically when loading and saving in TruTops
(PDM)
1‐48
 
S523EN 2015-12-04 Basics 1‐3
14 Characteristics: a property of elements
and contours
1‐49
14.1 Switching "Characteristic fixed" on or off -
TruTops behavior
1‐49
14.2 Notches: Advanced options through the
"Characteristic" property
1‐51
15 Screen display 1‐52
15.1 Adapting window size 1‐52
15.2 Increasing or reducing the work surface 1‐52
15.3 Modifying color scheme 1‐52
15.4 Moving masks and messages on the inter-
face
1‐53
16 Display of drawings 1‐54
16.1 Restructuring display of drawings 1‐54
16.2 Displaying drawing completely 1‐54
16.3 Displaying sheet completely 1‐54
16.4 Displaying detail view 1‐54
16.5 Moving screen section 1‐55
16.6 Zooming drawing 1‐55
16.7 Getting last view 1‐56
16.8 Memorizing and recalling view 1‐56
16.9 Displaying and hiding outline points 1‐56
17 Selection preview, selecting components 1‐57
17.1 Working with selection preview 1‐57
Activating selection preview 1‐58
17.2 Selecting components 1‐58
Multiple selection 1‐58
Fixed multiple selection 1‐59
Switching between multiple selection and
fixed multiple selection
1‐59
Switching back to individual selection 1‐59
Marking all components 1‐59
18 Operating TruTops with the mouse 1‐61
18.1 Automatically placing the mouse pointer in
masks
1‐61
 
1‐4 Basics 2015-12-04 S523EN
19 Operating TruTops using keyboard 1‐62
19.1 Using Windows keyboard commands and
shortcuts
1‐62
19.2 Entering numerical values and coordinates 1‐62
19.3 Entering texts in input fields 1‐62
19.4 Using key functions of TruTops 1‐63
19.5 Using "Copy" – "Paste" 1‐64
19.6 Using keyboard buffer of the command line
(repeating entries)
1‐64
20 Calculator 1‐65
20.1 Deactivating calculator permanently 1‐65
20.2 Entering numerical values in input fields 1‐66
20.3 Entering X and Y coordinates of points 1‐66
21 Searching with the help of place holders
(wildcards)
1‐67
22 Message and confirmation masks 1‐68
22.1 Reactivating hidden message and confirma-
tion masks
1‐68
23 Print 1‐69
23.1 Printing screen content 1‐69
23.2 Configuring line thickness when printing
screen contents
1‐69
23.3 Printing GEO files as *.HPGL files 1‐69
24 Using auxiliary tools 1‐71
24.1 Drawing auxiliary lines 1‐71
Drawing auxiliary line through 2 points 1‐71
Drawing an auxiliary line parallel to the
existing auxiliary line
1‐71
Drawing horizontal or vertical auxiliary
lines
1‐71
Drawing an auxiliary line as a tangent at
the arc element and point
1‐72
Drawing an auxiliary line at right angles to
an element
1‐72
Drawing an auxiliary line through point
and angle of inclination
1‐73
Drawing an auxiliary line through point
and angle to the base line
1‐73
 
S523EN 2015-12-04 Basics 1‐5
Drawing an auxiliary line through tangent
at 2 arc elements
1‐74
Dividing an element with an auxiliary line 1‐74
24.2 Drawing auxiliary circle 1‐75
Drawing an auxiliary circle through three
points
1‐75
Drawing auxiliary circle through center
and radius
1‐75
Drawing auxiliary circle through diameter 1‐75
Drawing auxiliary circle through center
and diameter
1‐76
Drawing concentric auxiliary circles 1‐76
Drawing auxiliary circle tangential to two
elements
1‐77
Drawing auxiliary circle tangential to an
element and two points
1‐77
Drawing auxiliary circle tangential to three
elements
1‐78
Drawing auxiliary circle tangential to an
element
1‐78
24.3 Auxiliary geometry 1‐78
Auxiliary geometry, deleting 1‐79
24.4 Measuring 1‐79
Measuring the distance between 2 points 1‐79
Measuring coordinates of a point 1‐79
Measuring horizontal or vertical distance
between 2 points
1‐79
Measuring coordinates, radius and diame-
ter of a circle
1‐79
Measuring angle 1‐80
Measuring length 1‐80
24.5 Zero point of the coordinate system 1‐80
Displacing zero point 1‐80
25 Help in the case of problems 1‐81
25.1 Diagnostics for program crash 1‐81
 
1‐6 Basics 2015-12-04 S523EN
1. Starting and exiting TruTops
1.1 Starting TruTops
Ø Select >Start >Programs >TRUMPF.NET >TruTops.
1.2 Exiting TruTops
Ø Select Exit TruTops 
 .
 
S523EN 2015-12-04 Starting and exiting TruTops 1‐7
2. Online help, software version, tips
and tricks from the Internet
2.1 To call up the online help
1. Select > Help >Help or press the <F1> key.
The software manual of the relevant application (CAD, Nest,
Laser, Punch...) opens (.pdf-file with bookmarks).
2. Select > Help >Readme.
2.2 Obtaining tips and tricks directly
from the Internet
TruTops offers the option of accessing the Internet and thus the
TRUMPF homepage directly. The homepage among other things
has tips and tricks for programming and useful information about
the product.
Ø Select >Help >TruTops on the Internet .
2.3 Showing software version
1. Select the ? symbol on the blue bar.
The "Version information" mask appears.
2. Select OK to close.
3. Select > Help >Info....
The "Version" mask is displayed.
4. Select "Version" tab.
 
1‐8 Online help, software version, tips and tricks from
the Internet
2015-12-04 S523EN
Displaying the software
manual
Displaying the Read me file
Displaying all software
versions
Displaying the software
version of individual
applications
3. Applications in TruTops
After the installation of TruTops, every application is separately
available as a separate "tab".
Every application can be opened several times, closed and reop-
ened individually, closed permanently ("delete"), renamed or
moved individually.
All individual modifications (including modifications to the inter-
face, such as background color, adapted toolbars ...) are saved
user-specifically and are loaded automatically when TruTops is
opened.
Applications currently available in TruTops:
■ TruTops CAD: drawing parts or loading them from other CAD
systems, setting basic data (e.g. material).
■ TruTops Tube CAD: drawing parts for tube processing or
loading parts from other CAD systems, setting basic data
(e. g. material).
■ Nest: nesting parts, setting basic data (e.g. material).
■ TruTops Laser: defining laser processing, setting basic data
for the laser processing (e.g. slat layout, Cateye ...).
■ TruTops Punch: defining punching or multi-purpose process-
ing, setting basis data for the punching or multi-purpose
processing (e.g. clamp data, repositioning cylinders ...).
■ TruTops Tube: defining tube processing, setting basic data
for the tube processing (e.g. clamping technique, measuring
programs ...).
■ TruTops Bend: defining bend processing, setting basic data
for the bending program.
3.1 Applications, closing and reopening
individually
Note
If an application has been closed, the individual user settings of
the application are retained.
1. Right click on the tab of the application that is to be closed.
The context menu is displayed.
2. Select > Close.
3. Right click on the tab of any open application.
The context menu is displayed.
4. Click > Open.
5. Select the application to be opened.
 
S523EN 2015-12-04 Applications in TruTops 1‐9
Closing an application
Reopen application?
3.2 Applications, opening several times
("copy")
1. Right click on the tab of any application.
The context menu is displayed.
2. Select > New.
All available applications are displayed in another submenu.
3. Mark the application that is to be opened (i.e. copied) once
more.
The copied application is opened. The name is extended by
an additive.
3.3 Application, closing permanently
("deleting") 
Notes
■ If an application is closed permanently, it is no longer opened
automatically when TruTops is started. The individual user
settings are lost.
■ The application can be reopened using the context menu
(right click on the tab of any open application, select > New).
1. Right click on the tab of the application that is to be closed
permanently.
The context menu is displayed.
2. Select > Delete.
3.4 Application, renaming
1. Right click on the tab of the desired application.
The context menu is displayed.
2. Select > Rename.
3. Enter the new name of the application.
4. Press OK.
 
1‐10 Applications in TruTops 2015-12-04 S523EN
3.5 Switching language for all
applications
1. Select languages
 .
The "Language selection" mask is displayed.
2. Select the desired language.
3. Press OK.
The new language becomes effective the next time TruTops is
started.
3.6 Closing open files
Files currently open in the applications (e.g. drawings, nesting
jobs, processed tubes) can be closed without having to close
and reopen the application itself.
Ø Select >File >Close.
The working range of the application is empty.
The application status is the same as directly after starting it up.
 
S523EN 2015-12-04 Applications in TruTops 1‐11
4. User-defined settings
TruTops can be set individually depending on the user (e.g. type
and number of applications that are opened, individually created
toolbars, size of the symbols...).
User-defined settings within an application are retained during
an update as well as during a new installation of TruTops.
The type and number of applications that are opened when start-
ing TruTops remain unchanged after updating TruTops. Each
application is started once after being installed or whenever a
new user logs on.
4.1 Copying and transferring user-
defined settings
User-defined settings (e.g. type and number of applications that
are opened, personal interface settings in the individual applica-
tions) can be copied and transferred as follows:
■ Copy settings of a user and provide them to another user.
■ Transfer the settings of a user from one work station (com-
puter) to another work station (computer).
■ Copy interface settings of an application (e.g. of "CAD 1" )
and transfer them to the "CAD 2" application (on the same
computer).
Conditions
■ Administrator rights and copyrights are required in all user
folders in order to copy the user-defined settings.
■ User-defined settings of TruTops can be copied and transfer-
red to another computer only for the same user.
1. Select > Start >Programs >TRUMPF.NET >TruTops Adminis-
tration >TruTops Config.
The Microsoft Windows Explorer is started. The folder in
which the user settings are saved is displayed automatically.
Example: English operating system with "millerha" as user
→ path 'C:\Documents and Settings\millerha\Application Data
\TRUMPF'" is opened.
The 'TRUMPF' folder has a subfolder for TruTops and further
subfolders for every application. In addition, the data is
stored as per the product versions.
2. Either
Ø To transfer the settings to another computer: copy the
entire 'TRUMPF' folder and paste it in the appropriate
folder on another computer.
 
1‐12 User-defined settings 2015-12-04 S523EN
or
Ø To provide the settings to another user on the same com-
puter: copy the entire 'TRUMPF' folder and store it in the
intermediate storage at a suitable location.
Ø Log in another user on to the computer.
Ø Paste the entire 'TRUMPF' folder in the appropriate folder
of another user.
or
Ø To copy (e.g.) the settings of the "CAD 1" application and
transfer them to "CAD 2" application: copy the 'x.usr' file
in the folder of the "CAD 1" application and paste it in
the folder of the "CAD 2" application.
 
S523EN 2015-12-04 User-defined settings 1‐13
5. Menus, function browsers and
toolbars
1 Language switchover
2 Application
3 Toolbars (can be customized,
can be moved to the desired
position using the sizing tool)
4 Main menu bar with main menu
and submenus
5 Function browser
6 Exiting TruTops
7 Status bar and message line
8 Command and input line (can
be moved to the desired posi-
tion using the sizing tool)
9 Command block
TruTops user interface (here: CAD application is open) Fig. 50209
The main menus and submenus contain all functions available in
the relevant application (CAD, Nest, Laser, Punch ...).
 
1‐14 Menus, function browsers and toolbars 2015-12-04 S523EN
Main menus and submenus
1 Function category (correspond-
ing to an entry in the main
menu)
2 Function group (corresponding
to a submenu)
3 Multi-function button
4 Quick navigation bar (can be
displayed and hidden)
5 Pin, pressed (function group is
permanently open)
6 Pin, open (function group is
closed as soon as another one
is opened)
7 Button text (can be displayed
and hidden)
8 Scroll with the mouse wheel
Function navigator Fig. 50208
The function browser contains the most important (TruTops-spe-
cific) functions. The function browser is subdivided into separate
function categories (e.g. "Modify"). The function categories are
further divided into function groups (e.g. "Move").
The function browser can be dragged to the desired width. Fre-
quently used function groups within a function category can be
"pinned", i.e. can be opened permanently.
Some of the buttons in the function browser function as multi-
function buttons or options buttons.
Multi-function buttons are marked with a triangle in the bottom
right. They display their current function in the function browser.
The current function can be changed with a right click (sub-
menu).
 
S523EN 2015-12-04 Menus, function browsers and toolbars 1‐15
Function browser
Multi-function buttons
Options buttons switch functions on or off.
1 Multi-function button
2 Displays the current function
(here: create 1 copy and move
by 2 points)
3 Options button
4 Green: Function is activated.
Gray: Function is deactivated
Multi-function buttons, options buttons Fig. 50212
Toolbars allow quick access to the most important functions.
Depending on the user, they can be created individually, can be
added to commands, can be moved and downsized. The tool-
bars can thus be adapted to typical programming tasks at any
time.
■ The current X and Y position of the mouse pointer is dis-
played in the status bar (including the measuring unit).
■ The message line displays the ongoing action. Examples:
− Reading of file.... finished
− Drawing deleted!
■ The command line gives instructions about what is to be
done. Examples:
− Enter first point
− Identify object to be rearranged
− Mark element or click on "OK"
■ The required data can be entered in the input line. Each
entry must be confirmed with the enter key ( ↲) on the key-
board. Examples of entries:
− X and Y coordinates of points.
− Angle.
5.1 Displaying and hiding the function
browser
Note
In the Bend application, the function browser cannot be hidden.
Ø Activate or deactivate > View >Toolbars >Function browser.
 
1‐16 Menus, function browsers and toolbars 2015-12-04 S523EN
Toolbars
Status bar and message line
Command line and input line
5.2 Displaying and hiding button texts in
the function browser
The button texts in the function browser can be hidden and dis-
played again.
If the button texts are hidden, one can only work with icons and
tool tips.
1. Either
Ø Select >Tools >Options....
or
Ø Select >View >Toolbars >Adapt....
Ø Select the "Options" tab.
2. Activate or deactivate "Show icon and text".
3. Select Close.
5.3 Displaying and hiding quick
navigation bar
Function groups can be opened very quickly with the quick navi-
gation bar (4) (see "Fig. 50208", pg. 1 ‐15).
1. Either
Ø Select >Tools >Options....
or
Ø Select >View >Toolbars >Adapt....
Ø Select the "Options" tab.
2. Activate or deactivate "Show Quick navigation bar".
3. Select Close.
5.4 Displaying and hiding toolbars
1 Sizing tool 2 Button
"File" icon bar Fig. 50210
1. Select > View >Toolbars.
2. Activate or deactivate the desired toolbars.
 
S523EN 2015-12-04 Menus, function browsers and toolbars 1‐17
5.5 Moving or downsizing toolbars
1. Using the mouse, move the toolbar to the desired position
with the sizing tool (= vertical lines on the left side).
2. To downsize the toolbar on the left: use the mouse to move
the toolbar with the sizing tool (= vertical lines on the left
side) to the left until the toolbar on the left is downsized.
or
Ø Using the mouse, move the toolbar with the sizing tool
(= vertical lines on the left side) to the right until the tool-
bar is downsized.
Two arrows are displayed on the right side of the downsized
toolbar (>>).
1 Arrows to select the hidden functions
Minimized "File" icon bar Fig. 50211
3. To select the functions that are (now) hidden: click >> and
select the desired function.
5.6 Modifying existing toolbars, creating
own toolbars
In addition to the already existing toolbars, the user can create
his own toolbars and equip them with the required buttons.
Alternatively, unnecessary buttons can be deleted and missing
buttons can be added to the existing toolbars.
1. Select > View >Toolbars >Adapt....
2. Select New in the "Toolbars" tab.
3. Enter the name of the user-defined toolbar and select OK.
The toolbar that is (still) empty is displayed automatically
under the main menu bar.
4. Select the "Commands" tab.
5. In the "Categories" field, click on the desired category.
6. Drag the desired command from the "Commands" field into
the new toolbar.
7. After creating all the desired toolbars, select Close.
 
1‐18 Menus, function browsers and toolbars 2015-12-04 S523EN
Moving toolbars
Downsizing toolbars
Creating a toolbar
Adding a button to the
toolbar
8. If the "Adapt" mask is no longer open: select > View >Tool-
bars >Adapt... again.
9. Drag the buttons to be removed out of the toolbar using the
mouse and drop them.
5.7 Renaming a toolbar
1. Select > View >Toolbars >Adapt....
2. Mark the icon bar that is to be renamed in the "Toolbars" tab.
3. Select Rename.
4. Enter the new name of the toolbar and select OK.
5. Select Close.
5.8 Deleting a toolbar
1. Select > View >Toolbars >Adapt....
2. Mark the icon bar that is to be deleted in the "Toolbars" tab.
3. Select Delete.
4. Select Close.
5.9 Resetting toolbars to their original
status
All individual modifications (e.g. user-defined toolbars, moved
toolbars) are cancelled when resetting the toolbars. The originally
installed status is restored. (Exception: size of the symbols.)
1. Select > View >Toolbars >Adapt....
2. In the "Toolbars" tab, select Reset....
5.10 Modifying the size of the symbols
The size of the symbols in the toolbars and the function browser
can be modified. (However, the size of the symbols in the menus
and the quick navigation bar cannot be modified.)
1. Either
Ø Select >Tools >Options....
 
S523EN 2015-12-04 Menus, function browsers and toolbars 1‐19
Removing a button again?
or
Ø Select >View >Toolbars >Adapt....
Ø Select "Options" tab.
2. Activate or deactivate "Large symbols".
3. Select Close.
5.11 Displaying overlapping contours
Ø Select >View, >Highlight overlapping contours .
The overlapping contours are displayed in cyan and all intersect-
ing points as yellow squares. The contours are separated at the
intersecting points.
5.12 Reactivating disabled optional
message boxes
1. Select > Extras >Modify data....
2. Select > User >Configuration.
The "Configuration" mask is displayed.
3. Select "Show optional message boxes again".
4. Press Modify.
 
1‐20 Menus, function browsers and toolbars 2015-12-04 S523EN
6. TruTops with PDM (Product Data
Management)
6.1 What is PDM?
With the PDM Data Management, files can be saved and man-
aged centrally for all products.
Data Management with PDM Fig. 56726
■ PDM is a central storage location for any number of TruTops
work stations and various TruTops products.
■ All TruTops products work using PDM.
■ The dependencies between files are displayed for all prod-
ucts.
■ You can delete and export files, recognize dependencies and
view file properties with a mouse click.
 
S523EN 2015-12-04 TruTops with PDM (Product Data Management) 1‐21
The advantages of PDM
■ You can use the new TruTops file browser to search for parts
quickly and specifically using the advanced search criteria in
PDM.
■ There are three options available as interfaces to older Tru-
Tops versions and other software products which are not
PDM-compatible:
− Importing and exporting files and directories via the Tru-
Tops file browser.
− Importing and exporting files and directories with the Win-
dows prompt or automated by means of a script.
− Direct access via an enabled Windows folder or network
drive.
6.2 TruTops with PDM, TruTops without
PDM – a comparison
Characteristic TruTops with PDM TruTops with file
system
The system checks whether the files are up to date. Yes -
The dependencies between files are monitored for all products. Yes -
Searching for and displaying files by means of TruTops-specific
characteristics (e.g. material) is supported.
Yes, fast Yes, slow
Heterogeneous data management (metric and inch) is supported. Yes Yes
File attributes ("Properties") created with different character sets
(European, Japanese, ASCII…) can be saved (display in TruTops
still not correct).
Yes -
Comparison of TruTops with PDM and TruTops with file system Tab. 1-1
When working without the PDM, all functions of the TruTops file
browser are available.
 
1‐22 TruTops with PDM (Product Data Management) 2015-12-04 S523EN
7. PDM functions, calling up via prompt/
scripts (pdmCLI.exe)
The following PDM functions can be called up via the Windows
prompt or can be executed in an automated manner via script
files (*.bat).
Function Command Remark
Exporting files/directories from a direc-
tory
Get (see "Files and folders, importing/exporting
(PDM)", pg. 1 ‐41)
Importing files into a folder Put (see "Files and folders, importing/exporting
(PDM)", pg. 1 ‐41)
Deleting files from a folder Delete (see "Examples of PDM functions which can be
performed with pdmCLI.exe", pg. 1 ‐24)
Listing files in a folder List (see "Examples of PDM functions which can be
performed with pdmCLI.exe", pg. 1 ‐24)
Generating lists of attributes ListAttributes (see "Examples of PDM functions which can be
performed with pdmCLI.exe", pg. 1 ‐24)
Creating a new (sub) folder Mkdir (see "Examples of PDM functions which can be
performed with pdmCLI.exe", pg. 1 ‐24)
Deleting an empty (sub) folder Rmdir (see "Examples of PDM functions which can be
performed with pdmCLI.exe", pg. 1 ‐24)
Copying a file or folder into a target
folder
Copy (see "Examples of PDM functions which can be
performed with pdmCLI.exe", pg. 1 ‐24)
Moving a file or folder to a target folder Move (see "Examples of PDM functions which can be
performed with pdmCLI.exe", pg. 1 ‐24)
Redetermining file properties and
dependencies
Rescan (see "Examples of PDM functions which can be
performed with pdmCLI.exe", pg. 1 ‐24)
Executing commands contained in a
script file
Batch (see "Examples of PDM functions which can be
performed with pdmCLI.exe", pg. 1 ‐24)
Tab. 1-2
7.1 Calling up help for pdmCLI.exe
1. Start Windows prompt.
2. Go to the '…:\TRUMPF.NET\Utils\PDM2\bin' folder.
3. Enter the following command:
pdmCLI.exe –h
 
S523EN 2015-12-04 PDM functions, calling up via prompt/scripts
(pdmCLI.exe)
1‐23
Help for pdmCLI.exe is displayed:
Help for pdmCLI.exe Fig. 43561
4. To call up help for a specific command (e.g. "Put"), enter the
following command:
pdmCLI.exe –h Put
Help for the specific command is displayed:
Help on the "Put" command Fig. 43562
7.2 Examples of PDM functions which
can be performed with pdmCLI.exe
Notes
■ Write everything in a single line  when entering commands
in the command prompt or in script files.
■ Be sure that slashes, backslashes, and spaces are correct.
■ Replace server name with the actual name of the server.
■ Only those parts highlighted in bold can vary from the com-
mands shown in the examples. Everything before and after it
remains the same.
 
1‐24 PDM functions, calling up via prompt/scripts
(pdmCLI.exe)
2015-12-04 S523EN
1. Either
Ø Start Windows command prompt.
Ø Go to the folder '…:\TRUMPF.NET\Utils\PDM2\bin''.
or
Ø Write cd C:\TRUMPF.NET\Utils\PDM2\bin in a self-
written BAT shell file (*.bat).
Ø Extend the following (example) command lines.
2. To delete the 'box.mi' file in the '/
TRUMPF.NET/ TEST_DIR_1/' folder, for example, enter the
following command:
pdmCLI.exe Delete /TRUMPF.NET/ TEST_DIR_1/box.mi  --
service-name=TruTopsPDM2 --port-address=servername:9999
3. Press <Enter> or <Return> ( ↲).
4. To list all files in the '/TRUMPF.NET/ TEST_DIR_1' folder, for
example, enter the following command:
pdmCLI.exe List /TRUMPF.NET/TEST_DIR_1 --service-
name=TruTopsPDM2 --port-address=servername:9999
5. Press <Enter> or <Return> ( ↲).
6. To create a list of attributes, enter the following command:
pdmCLI.exe ListAttributes --service-name=TruTopsPDM2 --
port-address=servername:9999
7. Press <Enter> or <Return> ( ↲).
8. To create a folder '/TRUMPF.NET/TEST_DIR_1', for example,
enter the following command:
pdmCLI.exe Mkdir /TRUMPF.NET/TEST_DIR_1 --service-
name=TruTopsPDM2 --port-address=servername:9999
9. Press <Enter> or <Return> ( ↲).
10. To delete the folder '/TRUMPF.NET/TEST_DIR_1', for exam-
ple, enter the following command:
pdmCLI.exe Rmdir /TRUMPF.NET/TEST_DIR_1 --service-
name=TruTopsPDM2 --port-address=servername:9999
11. Press <Enter> or <Return> ( ↲).
12. To copy the 'box.mi' file in the '/
TRUMPF.NET/ TEST_DIR_1' folder to the '/
TRUMPF.NET/ TEST_DIR_2' folder, for example, enter the
following command:
pdmCLI.exe Copy /TRUMPF.NET/TEST_DIR_1/ box.mi --tar-
get-directory=/TRUMPF.NET/ TEST_DIR_2 --service-
name=TruTopsPDM2 -- port-address=servername:9999
13. Press <Enter> or <Return> ( ↲).
14. To copy all files from the '/TRUMPF.NET/ TEST_DIR_1'
folder into the '/TRUMPF.NET/ TEST_DIR_2' folder, for exam-
ple, enter the following command:
 
S523EN 2015-12-04 PDM functions, calling up via prompt/scripts
(pdmCLI.exe)
1‐25
Opening command prompts,
creating script files
Deleting file
Listing files in a folder
Generating lists of attributes
Creating a new (sub) folder
Deleting a (sub) folder
Copying a single file into a
different folder
Copying several files into a
different folder
pdmCLI.exe Copy /TRUMPF.NET/TEST_DIR_1 --target-
directory=/TRUMPF.NET/TEST_DIR_2 --service-
name=ToPs_PDM --port-address=servername:9999
15. Press <Enter> or <Return> ( ↲).
16. To move the 'box.mi' file from the '/TRUMPF.NET/
TEST_DIR_1/' to the '/TRUMPF.NET/TEST_DIR_2' folder, for
example, enter the following command:
pdmCLI.exe Move /TRUMPF.NET/ TEST_DIR_1/ box.mi --
target-directory=/TRUMPF.NET/ TEST_DIR_2 --service-
name=TruTopsPDM2 -- port-address=servername:9999
17. Press <Enter> or <Return> ( ↲).
18. To move the '/TRUMPF.NET/TEST_DIR_1' folder into the '/
TRUMPF.NET/TEST_DIR_2' folder, for example, enter the fol-
lowing command:
pdmCLI.exe Move /TRUMPF.NET/ TEST_DIR_1 --target-
directory=/TRUMPF.NET/TEST_DIR_2 --service-name=Tru-
TopsPDM2 --port-address=servername:9999
19. Press <Enter> or <Return> ( ↲).
20. Enter the following command:
pdmCLI.exe Rescan --service-name=TruTopsPDM2 --port-
address=servername:9999
21. Press <Enter> or <Return> ( ↲).
 
1‐26 PDM functions, calling up via prompt/scripts
(pdmCLI.exe)
2015-12-04 S523EN
Moving a single file into a
different folder
Moving a folder
Redetermining file properties
and dependencies
8. TruTops file browser
The TruTops file browser features the following functions:
■ Convenient and simple operation with a user-friendly inter-
face (Windows standard).
■ Advanced search functions: various additional configurable
search criteria assist you in systematic part management.
■ All files in the TruTops file browser are displayed in a folder
structure.
■ The dependencies between files are displayed (PDM).
■ Simple import and export of files (PDM).
■ Creating and restoring file versions (PDM).
1 Navigate back
2 Navigate forwards
3 Go to next higher directory
4 Filter view (search)
5 Folder view
6 Show and hide version window
7 Create new folder
8 Create version
9 Update view
10 Navigator
11 Directory contents (file list)
12 Current path
13 Show directories from which a
file has already been opened
TruTops file browser (here via File, Open, with PDM) Fig. 53347
Quick access to a folder in the TruTops file browser is possible
as follows:
■ Open file browser (e.g. via > File >Open).
■ Keep the <Shift> key pressed and press the <Tab> key twice
or click directly in the file list using the mouse.
■ Enter the first letters of the desired folder until the required
folder is marked.
 
S523EN 2015-12-04 TruTops file browser 1‐27
Quick access to folders
TruTops shows the current path under the toolbar (9).
To show folders from which a file has already been loaded: open
the current path with ▼ (11).
The displayed files can be sorted according to the required detail
by clicking on the detail (e.g. "File size").
The detail used for sorting is marked in gray. Clicking repeatedly
on the detail modifies the sorting direction (upward/downward).
1 Shortcut Menu
Context menu of TruTops file browser (here via Open file,
with PDM)
Fig. 41364
Note
Menu items that cannot be selected at the relevant point are
grayed out.
8.1 Opening TruTops file browser
The TruTops file browser is automatically opened when, for
example, a file is opened via > File >Open… or a file is saved
via >File >Save.
Additionally, the TruTops file browser can be opened independent
from the loading or saving of a file:
Ø In an arbitrary TruTops application: select > File >File
browser....
or
Ø Select >Start >Programs >TRUMPF.NET >PDM Browser.
 
1‐28 TruTops file browser 2015-12-04 S523EN
Last selected folder
File sorting options
Context menu of the
TruTops file browser
8.2 Creating a new folder
1. Open file browser (e.g.via > File >File browser).
2. Either
Ø Select 
  (Create new folder).
or
Ø Open the context menu with the right mouse button.
Ø Select >New.
3. Enter the name of the new folder.
4. Press <Enter> or <Return> ( ↲).
5. If required, refresh view with 
  (Refresh) or <F5>.
8.3 Deleting folders
1. Open file browser (e.g.via > File >File browser).
2. Select the folder to be deleted.
3. Either
Ø Press <Entf> or <Del>.
or
Ø Open the context menu with the right mouse button.
Ø Select >Delete.
4. Confirm the query with OK.
8.4 Renaming files or folders
1. Open file browser (e.g.via > File >File browser).
2. Either
Ø Go to the folder to be renamed.
Ø Select the folder.
or
Ø Go to the folder in which files are to be renamed.
Ø Select the file.
3. Either
Ø Click on the folder or the file name once.
or
Ø Open the context menu with the right mouse button.
Ø Select >Rename.
4. Enter a new name.
 
S523EN 2015-12-04 TruTops file browser 1‐29
5. Confirm the new name with <Enter> or <Return> ( ↲) or click
outside the folder or file name.
8.5 Deleting and restoring files, emptying
the recycle bin (PDM)
When working with PDM, deleted files are moved to the recycle
bin of the file browser. These files can be restored from the recy-
cle bin if required (including all attributes such as material, mate-
rial thickness etc.).
The folder name of the recycle bin is 'RecycleBin' and can be
modified (at the PDM server) by the PDM administrator.
When working in the file system, a simple query appears asking
whether the file should be deleted permanently.
1. Open file browser (e.g.via > File >File browser).
2. Go to the folder from which files are to be deleted.
3. Select the file(s) to be deleted. To mark several files: press
<Strg> or <Ctrl> pressed.
4. Either
Ø Press <Entf> or <Del>.
or
Ø Open the context menu with the right mouse button.
Ø Select Delete.
5. Confirm the query.
When working with PDM, the files (including the path specifi-
cations and the extension '.trash.zip') are moved to the recy-
cle bin of the file browser.
Tip
To delete files permanently (then they are not moved to the
recycle bin and can not be restored): press the Shift key
when deleting files.
6. Go to the recycle bin of the TruTops file browser ('Recycle-
Bin').
7. Select the file to be restored (i.e. the complete file specifica-
tion with the file name and the extension '.trash.zip'). To mark
several files: press <Strg> or <Ctrl> pressed.
8. Open the context menu with the right mouse button.
9. Select > Restore.
10. Go to the recycle bin of the TruTops file browser ('Recycle-
Bin').
11. To delete single files in the recycle bin permanently: select
the files. To mark several files: press <Strg> or <Ctrl>
pressed.
 
1‐30 TruTops file browser 2015-12-04 S523EN
Deleting files
Restoring deleted files
Emptying recycle bin
12. To delete all files in the recycle bin permanently: select files
with <Strg>+<A> or <Ctrl>+<A>.
13. To delete the complete recycle bin permanently: select the
recycle bin ('RecycleBin').
Note
If the entire recycle bin is deleted (folder including its con-
tent), it is automatically recreated the next time a file is
deleted.
14. Either
Ø Press <Entf> or <Del>.
or
Ø Open the context menu with the right mouse button.
Ø Select >Delete.
15. Confirm the query.
Note
The recycle bin can be renamed only on the PDM server.
16. Select >Start >Programs >TRUMPF.NET >PDM Administra-
tion >PDM Admin.
17. Double click in the RECYCLE_BIN_NAME line in the table cell
of the "ParamValue" column (default content of the cell:
RecycleBin).
18. Rename RecycleBin as desired.
19. Select Exit.
20. Select >Start >Settings >Control panel  >Administration
>Services.
21. Select TruTopsPDM2.
22. Select Restart service.
8.6 Searching for files
1. Open file browser (e.g.via > File >File browser).
2. Either
Ø Select 
 .
or
Ø Open the context menu with the right mouse button.
Ø Select Search....
3. Set filters (the filters can be combined) and enter the
searched names (case insensitive). If required, use place
holders (see "Searching with the help of place holders (wild-
cards)", pg. 1 ‐67).
4. Open the list field "Search in:" with ▼.
 
S523EN 2015-12-04 TruTops file browser 1‐31
Renaming recycle bin
5. Select the folder where the search should be started.
6. If required, select "Search sub-folder".
7. To start the search: select Search.
8. To switch on the folder view again: select 
 .
8.7 Adding other details to the list field
of the files
By default, the TruTops file browser displays the "File name", the
"File size" and the "Last write access" (sorted in ascending order
of file names) in the file view.
The displayed details can be expanded (e.g. with "Machine
name" or with "Sheet thickness").
Note
The more details the TruTops file browser displays, the more
time it requires to create the view.
1 Standard information in the list
header
2 Files list
TruTops File Browser Fig. 41788
1. To add details: right click in the list header (1).
2. Either
Ø Select the desired detail.
 
1‐32 TruTops file browser 2015-12-04 S523EN
Adding details
or
Ø Select >More….
Ø Select the desired details.
Ø Press OK.
3. Keep the mouse button pressed and drag the details one
after another to the desired position.
4. To sort files by a specific detail: click on the detail.
The detail used for sorting is marked in gray. Clicking repeatedly
on the detail modifies the sorting direction (upward/downward).
8.8 Opening files with the Geo Viewer
File formats from TruTops (e.g. *.GEO, *.TMT, *.ROT …) can be
opened with the Geo Viewer in PDM. The appropriate shortcut
required to open them with the Geo Viewer is created automati-
cally when installing TruTops.
1. Open file browser (e.g.via > File >File browser).
2. Search for the file to be opened with the Geo Viewer.
3. Select the file.
4. If the file browser was opened via > File >Open or > File
>Save: right click to open the context menu, select > Open.
5. If the independent file browser is opened: double click on the
file.
6. Close Geo Viewer with OK.
8.9 Sending files through e-mail
1. Open file browser (e.g.via > File >File browser).
2. Search for the file(s) to be sent.
3. Select the file(s).
4. Open the context menu with the right mouse button.
5. Select > Send to....
6. Select > Mail recipient.
An e-mail mask containing the selected file as an attachment is
displayed. The e-mail can be processed further and sent.
8.10 Zipping files
1. Open file browser (e.g.via > File >File browser).
 
S523EN 2015-12-04 TruTops file browser 1‐33
Moving details in the list
field to the desired position
Opening a file with the Geo
Viewer
Closing Geo Viewer
2. Search for the file(s) to be zipped.
3. Select the file(s).
4. Open the context menu with the right mouse button.
5. Select > Send to....
6. Select > Zip-File.
A zip file containing all the selected files is created in PDM. The
name of the zip file comprises the name of the file selected first
(without the file extension) and the new file extension '.tpdm.zip'.
In one more step, the zip file can, for example, be exported into
the file system or be sent to a mail recipient (see relevant sec-
tions).
8.11 Sending files from PDM to "My
Documents" in the file system
1. Open file browser (e.g.via > File >File browser).
2. Search for the file(s) to be zipped.
3. Select the file(s).
4. Open the context menu with the right mouse button.
5. Select > Send to....
6. Select > My Documents.
 
1‐34 TruTops file browser 2015-12-04 S523EN
9. Creating and restoring file versions
(PDM)
9.1 Displaying and hiding the version
window
1 Hide and show version window
2 Button for creating a file version
3 Directory contents (file list)
4 File, of which a version is to be
created and archived
5 Version window (archive)
File versions in version window Fig. 50219
File versions are displayed in a separate version window. In the
TruTops file browser (with PDM), the version window appears by
default.
Ø To hide and then view the version window again: select 
(Version window).
9.2 Creating a file version
1. Open file browser (e.g.via > File >File browser).
2. Select the file from which a version is to be created
3. Either
Ø Select 
  (Create version).
 
S523EN 2015-12-04 Creating and restoring file versions (PDM) 1‐35
or
Ø Open the context menu with the right mouse button.
Ø Select >Create version.
The "Properties... - Version x" mask, "Version information"
tab is displayed.
4. Enter any information you wish about the new version.
5. Press OK. (Cancel cancels the entering of information, how-
ever not the creation of the file version.)
The file version is displayed in a separate version window
(see "Fig. 50219", pg. 1 ‐35).
9.3 Restoring a file version
Note
If a file version is to be modified (e.g. contours are deleted or
added), the file version must be copied from the version window
into the normal directory. File versions cannot be opened directly
from the version window.
1. Open file browser (e.g.via > File >File browser).
2. Select the file from which the versions have been created
All file versions of the selected file are displayed in the ver-
sion window (see "Fig. 50219", pg. 1 ‐35).
3. Select the file version to be recovered.
4. Open the context menu with the right mouse button.
5. Either
Ø In order to copy the file version from the version window
into the normal directory under its original file name  (so
that the file version can be opened with the appropriate
application): select > Restore.
Ø Replying to a query:
− Yes: A version is created from the file from the normal
directory and it is stored in the version window.
− No: The file in the normal directory is overwritten with the
file version.
or
Ø In order to copy the file version into the normal directory
under a different file name  (so that the file version can
be opened with the appropriate application): select
>Restore under....
The "New file name" mask is displayed.
Ø Change the suggested file name if required.
 
1‐36 Creating and restoring file versions (PDM) 2015-12-04 S523EN
6. Press OK.
The restored file is displayed in the normal directory and can be
opened with the appropriate application (e.g. TruTops CAD).
9.4 Deleting a file version
1. Open file browser (e.g.via > File >File browser).
2. Select the file from which the versions have been created
All file versions that have been created from the selected file
are displayed in the version window (see "Fig. 50219",
pg. 1‐35).
3. Select the file version to be deleted.
4. Open the context menu with the right mouse button.
5. Select > Delete.
9.5 Tips & Tricks
Archiving the copies of a file
Earlier, variants of a file had to be saved as copies under differ-
ent names (see "Fig. 53348", pg. 1 ‐37).
But now, variants of a file can be archived together as file ver-
sions under one name. Only the current status of a file is dis-
played in the file list of the TruTops file browser and the file ver-
sions are in the version window (see "Fig. 50219", pg. 1 ‐35).
The following gives an example of how an (old) copy of a file
('egon1.geo') can be created as a file version of the current sta-
tus ('egon.geo').
1 Latest status of the file 2 Copy of a file (old status)
Variants of a file in the file list Fig. 53348
1. Open file browser (e.g.via > File >File browser).
2. Create a file version of 'egon1.geo' (right click to open the
context menu, select > Create version).
A file version is stored in the version window of 'egon1.geo'
which is identical to 'egon1.geo'.
3. Open 'egon.geo' and save it as 'egon1.geo'.
 
S523EN 2015-12-04 Creating and restoring file versions (PDM) 1‐37
When overwriting, 'egon1.geo' in the file list is overwritten.
The file version of 'egon1.geo' in the version window is
retained.
'Egon1.geo' has the current status. The old status of the file
version is located in the version window.
4. Delete 'egon.geo'.
5. Rename 'egon1.geo' as 'egon.geo.'
6. If several files are to be archived together:
− Create a version of the oldest file and overwrite it with
the second oldest file. (This ensures that the file versions
in the version window are stored in the right sequence).
− Repeat the process till all file versions in the version win-
dow have been archived together.
− Then rename the file in the file list whose versions are
currently present.
 
1‐38 Creating and restoring file versions (PDM) 2015-12-04 S523EN
10. File Properties
10.1 Viewing file properties
Note
The properties of files which have been written on an operating
system with a different language and which contain special char-
acters may be displayed incorrectly.
Ø Either
Ø (With PDM) show properties of a file when checking the
dependencies (see "Dependencies Between Files",
pg. 1‐45).
or
Ø Open file browser (e.g.via > File >File browser).
Ø Search for the file whose properties are to be displayed.
Ø Mark the file.
Ø Open the context menu with the right mouse button.
Ø Select >Properties.
The "Properties..." screen, "General" tab is displayed.
Ø To view all the information for a file: select the "File info"
tab.
Ø Select "Mask attributes that are not occupied" as
required.
10.2 Selecting the unprocessed material
ID and raw material from the drawing
data
In addition to the unprocessed material, the raw material can
now also be selected. This unprocessed material is then preset
in TruTops Punch. TruTops Bend does not have a sheet layout,
i.e. the unprocessed material and raw material are not requested
in TruTops Bend until a bend is created. This selection should
now be made in TruTops CAD, provided the unprocessed mate-
rial is available in the database. The advantage is that this
selected raw material is supported by TruTops Work and TruTops
Unfold.
1. Select > File, >Properties....
The "File information" mask is opened.
2. Select the drop-down arrow for the unprocessed material ID.
The "Select material" mask is opened.
 
S523EN 2015-12-04 File Properties 1‐39
Selecting an unprocessed
material ID
3. Enter %AI%, for example, between the two percent signs
(below the list field, first list field: Material ID, second list
field: Stock ID).
The list field displays all entries that begin with these letters.
The material selection is thereby filtered and restricted.
Note
The selection can be limited even further using the "Z" filter
field. If, for example, <=3 is entered here, all unprocessed
materials with a material thickness of 3 mm or less are dis-
played. >=3 displays all unprocessed materials with a thick-
ness of 3 mm or more.
4. Select Unprocessed material.
The unprocessed material is applied.
5. Select the raw material drop-down arrow.
The "Selection" mask is opened.
Note
If the raw material does not match the unprocessed material
or vice versa, the corresponding raw material or unprocessed
material is automatically used. If there is no corresponding
unprocessed/raw material, the relevant field remains empty
and must be reselected.
6. Select raw material.
The raw material is adopted.
 
1‐40 File Properties 2015-12-04 S523EN
Selecting the raw material
11. Files and folders, importing/exporting
(PDM)
11.1 Files, importing/exporting via
Windows Explorer (PDM)
The PDM file storage can be used like a normally enabled Win-
dows folder or an enabled network drive. This enables for exam-
ple, saving drawings from a CAD system directly in PDM.
1. Either
Ø Start Windows Explorer.
Ø Select >Extras >Connect network drive … .
Ø Select Drive.
Ø Enter \\Servername\trumpf_pdm2 under "Folder" or
using Search search for '\\Servername\trumpf_pdm2'.
(Server name = name of the server on which PDM has
been installed.)
Ø Select Finish.
or
Ø Start the Windows command prompt via > Start >Pro-
grams >Accessories >Command prompt.
Ø Enter NET USE P: \\Servername\trumpf_pdm2 .
(Server name = name of the server on which PDM has
been installed. Any free drive letter can be selected as
the drive letter.)
2. Use the selected drive to store files and directories in PDM
or to read them out from PDM.
11.2 Importing files and single folders
using the file browser (PDM)
Files and folders are imported using the TruTops file browser as
follows:
■ PDM adopts the folder structure from the file system and
ensures the correct sequence. All sub-folders are also
imported and their structures are adopted. The target folder
in the PDM can be located anywhere.
■ TruTops determines the existing dependencies between the
files and saves them.
Notes
■ If a *.GEO file is moved to a different folder after being
imported, TruTops deletes the dependency to all sheets to
which the *.GEO was nested.
 
S523EN 2015-12-04 Files and folders, importing/exporting (PDM) 1‐41
Connecting the PDM
network drive
Importing/exporting files
■ Dependencies can only be established to files that are also
in the PDM. No dependencies are created if, for example, a
nested sheet (*.TAF) is imported before the parts (*.GEO)
are imported.
■ Depending on the file format, not all dependencies between
the files can be determined when importing. For example,
dependencies to .pdf files are set in TruTops when they are
created. No dependencies can be read from .PDF files when
exporting from PDM or re-importing into PDM.
1. Open file browser (e.g.via > File >File browser).
2. Go to the folder where files are to be imported .
3. Open the context menu with the right mouse button.
4. Select > Import directory.
The "Import directory" mask is displayed.
5. Go to the folder to be imported.
6. Mark the folder.
Note
So that dependencies can be established between files,
always import files chronologically in the sequence of
their creation  or import whole folders at a time.
7. Select > Import file.
The "Import file(s)" mask is displayed.
The mask has the same functions as the file browser (e. g.
adding further details to the list field of the files, searching for
files in the filter view...; see section "TruTops file browser").
8. To restrict the file selection in the folder view (
 ): open the
"File type" list field with ▼.
9. Select file type.
10. Mark the searched files. To mark several files: press <Strg>
or <Ctrl> pressed.
11. Select OK.
11.3 Folders, importing several folders in
a single job step (PDM)
Several folders (that are independent of each other) can be
imported into the TruTops PDM in a single job step via the "PDM
importer".
Additionally, a different target folder can be selected in TruTops
PDM for each folder. TruTops determines the existing dependen-
cies between the files and saves them.
 
1‐42 Files and folders, importing/exporting (PDM) 2015-12-04 S523EN
Selecting an import folder
Import folder
Importing files
1. Select > Start >Programs >TRUMPF.NET >PDM Importer.
2. In the "PDM directory import" mask, mark the folder to be
imported.
3. Transfer the folder to the right list field with 
 .
4. To import other folders: repeat steps 2 and 3.
5. Right click on the folder icon under "Target path".
The "Selection of PDM target path" is displayed.
6. Select the target folder.
7. Select OK.
8. Mark the folder to be deleted.
9. Select 
 .
Note
When importing folders, the dependencies between files are
automatically checked and entered in the PDM. A .TAF'. for
example, knows which '.GEO' it uses. A '.GEO', however,
does not know the '.TAF' in which it is being used.
If all '.TAF' files are imported from one folder first and then
the corresponding 'GEO' files belonging to them are imported
from another folder, the dependencies cannot be entered dur-
ing the import.
10. To set the dependencies correctly after the import: select
"Update file dependencies after import".
11. If all folders to be imported have been transferred into the
right-hand list field and the target folders have been defined:
select Start directory import .
12. After the import: select Exit.
11.4 Files, exporting via the TruTops file
browser (PDM)
1. Open file browser (e.g.via > File >File browser).
2. Either
Ø Go to the folder to be exported.
or
Ø Change to the folder from which files are to be exported.
Ø Select the file(s) which are to be exported. To mark sev-
eral files: press <Strg> or <Ctrl> pressed.
3. Open the context menu with the right mouse button.
4. Select > Export.
The "Target path for export..." mask is displayed.
5. Go to the folder to which the files are to be exported.
6. Mark the folder.
 
S523EN 2015-12-04 Files and folders, importing/exporting (PDM) 1‐43
Select folder
Defining target paths
Delete folder from the
import list
Updating file dependencies
after import
Starting import
7. Select OK.
11.5 Importing/exporting files using the
prompt/script (PDM)
Files and folders can also be imported into the PDM or exported
from the PDM via the Windows command prompt or automated
via shell scripts (*.bat) (see "PDM functions, calling up via
prompt/scripts (pdmCLI.exe)", pg. 1 ‐23).
1. Start Windows command prompt.
2. Go to the folder '…:\TRUMPF.NET\Utils\PDM2\bin'.
3. To export files, enter the following command (enter every-
thing in one line , and be sure that slashes or backslashes
and spaces are correct). Replace the highlighted example
names with actual names:
pdmCLI.exe Get --service-name=ToPs_PDM --port-
address=servername:9999 --target-directory=C:\target direc-
tory /source directory/example file.geo
4. Press <Enter> or <Return> ( ↲).
5. To export directories, enter the following command (enter
everything in one line , and be sure that slashes or back-
slashes and spaces are correct). Replace the highlighted
example names with actual names:
pdmCLI.exe Get --service-name=TruTopsPDM2 --port-
address=servername:9999 --recursive --use-entity-directory --
target-directory=C:\target directory°/source directory/exam-
ple directory
6. Press <Enter> or <Return> ( ↲).
7. To import files, enter the following command (enter every-
thing in one line , and be sure that slashes or backslashes
and spaces are correct). Replace the highlighted example
names with actual names:
pdmCLI.exe Put --service-name=TruTopsPDM2 --port-
address=servername:9999 --target-directory=/target direc-
tory°C:\source directory\°example file.geo
8. Press <Enter> or <Return> ( ↲).
9. Write cd C:\TRUMPF.NET\Utils\PDM2\bin in a self-written
BAT shell file (*.bat).
10. Add the above (exemplary) command lines.
 
1‐44 Files and folders, importing/exporting (PDM) 2015-12-04 S523EN
Exporting/importing using
the prompt
Exporting a file
Exporting a directory
Importing files
Automated export/import
using script files
12. Dependencies Between Files
12.1 Checking dependencies between files
(PDM)
Files can, on the one hand, form the basis for other files and, on
the other hand, be based on other files. Checking these depend-
encies is important whenever, for example, a file needs to be
modified or deleted.
Example: The file is the basis for other files
■ On which sheets (*.TAF) has a particular part (*.GEO)
already been nested?
■ In which NC programs (*.LST) does a particular GEO file
(*.GEO) occur?
Example: the file uses the other following files:
■ Which parts (*.GEO) have been nested on a particular sheet
(*.TAF)?
Note
If a *.GEO file has been moved to a different folder after being
imported, TruTops deletes the dependency to all sheets on which
the *.GEO was nested.
1. Open file browser (e.g.via > File >File browser).
2. Search for the file whose dependencies are to be checked.
3. Mark the file.
4. Open the context menu with the right mouse button.
5. Select > Dependencies (if > Dependencies has been grayed
out, the file has no dependencies.)
6. To check which other files the file uses: select the "Used..."
tab.
7. To check which other files are based on the file: select the
"Basis for..." tab.
 
S523EN 2015-12-04 Dependencies Between Files 1‐45
Fig. 41785
8. To group the display according to file types: select "Group
according to file type".
9. To view a preview of dependent files: select "Preview" (self-
holding) and select the desired file.
12.2 Deleting, exporting dependent files,
displaying properties
1. Open file browser (e.g.via > File >File browser).
2. Search for the file whose dependencies are to be checked.
3. Mark the file.
4. Open the context menu with the right mouse button.
5. Select > Dependencies (if > Dependencies has been grayed
out, the file has no dependencies.)
6. In the "Dependencies" mask, select the file to be deleted.
7. Open the context menu with the right mouse button.
8. Select > Delete.
9. Select the file(s) which are to be exported. To mark several
files: press <Strg> or <Ctrl> pressed.
10. Open the context menu with the right mouse button.
11. Select >Export.
The "Target path for export..." mask is displayed.
12. Switch to the directory to which you want to export.
13. Select the directory.
14. Press OK.
15. Mark the file(s) whose properties are to be displayed. To
mark several files: press <Strg> or <Ctrl> pressed.
16. Open the context menu with the right mouse button.
 
1‐46 Dependencies Between Files 2015-12-04 S523EN
Viewing the "Dependencies"
mask
Delete dependent files
Export dependent files
Displaying properties of
dependent files
17. Select >Properties.
The properties of the file are displayed.
 
S523EN 2015-12-04 Dependencies Between Files 1‐47
13. Updated status of the files
13.1 Checking the updated status of the
files automatically when loading and
saving in TruTops (PDM)
Ø To automatically check the updated status of the files when
loading them in TruTops: set the value of the "PDMWarning-
Mode" variables in the public system rules to the desired
value (see TruTops Laser or TruTops Punch software man-
ual, chapter "Setting basic data"):
− 0 = Do not check updated status.
− 1 = Check updated status when loading.
− 2 = Check updated status when saving.
− 3 = Check updated status when loading and when sav-
ing.
 
1‐48 Updated status of the files 2015-12-04 S523EN
14. Characteristics: a property of
elements and contours
A characteristic is a property which one or more elements or
contours have.
Characteristics are created in TruTops CAD, saved in the geo file
and can be evaluated in other TruTops applications.
Advantages:
■ Rows of holes and hole grids can be machined more easily:
Rows of holes that have been created in TruTops CAD
through >Create >Macros >Row of holes  can also be evalu-
ated in other TruTops applications. The conversion into rows
of holes is no longer required. As a result, it is also possible
to create rows of holes which are not axially parallel. The NC
program is shortened.
■ In TruTops CAD, Geometries with the characteristic Property
are interpreted as a unit. All actions are applied to the
entire unit, reducing the drawing effort considerably.
14.1 Switching "Characteristic fixed" on or
off - TruTops behavior
"Characteristic fixed" is active:
■ Certain elements are combined to form a unit with the char-
acteristic property. If the "Characteristic fixed" is active, then
a certain action is applied either to the complete unit (i.e. to
all elements) or the action is rejected.
For example, a single element  of the "Single square hole"
unit cannot be deleted. The entire single hole  is deleted.
■ All impermissible actions  result in the contour or the ele-
ment being displayed in pink. The colored highlight is kept
up to the next redrawing.
Examples:
A single stroke cannot be stretched. The single stroke is dis-
played in pink.
It is not possible to shorten elements for single strokes. The
elements are displayed in pink.
■ Clicking on an element results in the selection of the entire
unit (all elements). When boxing in an element using the
mouse, an action is executed only if the entire unit  has
been boxed in.
"Characteristic fixed" is not active:
■ If "Characteristic fixed" is not active, the elements of con-
tours can be arbitrarily modified with the Property characteris-
 
S523EN 2015-12-04 Characteristics: a property of elements and contours 1‐49
tic. A single element of the single square hole can be
deleted, for example. During modification, the Property char-
acteristic is lost and the display color "orange" is reset to the
normal line color.
Example "Characteristic
fixed"
Delete Effect
active not
active
Ele-
ment
Con-
tour
Single square hole X X The entire single hole is deleted.
X X The entire single hole is deleted.
X X The single element  of the single hole is deleted.
The display color changes from orange to the nor-
mal line color. The characteristic is dissolved.
X X The entire single hole is deleted.
Row of square
holes
X X The entire row of holes is deleted.
X X The row of holes remains unchanged.
The clicked contour of the row of holes is dis-
played in pink.
If the drawing is updated (
 ), the original state
is restored.
X X The clicked element of the contour  is deleted.
The remaining holes are assembled into smaller
rows of holes.
(Example: row of holes with 10 holes, an element
of hole 3 is deleted: one of the new rows of holes
consists of holes 1 and 2, the other consists of
holes 4 to 10.)
X X The clicked contour  is deleted.
The remaining holes are assembled into smaller
rows of holes.
(Example: row of holes with 10 holes, an element
of hole 3 is deleted: one of the new rows of holes
consists of holes 1 and 2, the other consists of
holes 4 to 10.)
Tab. 1-3
1. Select > Edit >Characteristic fixed.
or
Ø Select Fix characteristics
 . (If "Characteristic fixed" is
activated, the button is pressed).
2. Select Highlight characteristics
 .
The characteristics are displayed in orange.
3. Select > Edit >Delete >Characteristics.
or
Ø Select Delete characteristics
 .
 
1‐50 Characteristics: a property of elements and contours 2015-12-04 S523EN
Switching "Characteristic
fixed" on and off
Highlighting characteristics
Removing characteristics
14.2 Notches: Advanced options through
the "Characteristic" property
The "Characteristic" property automatically increases the number
of options for shaping and processing notches:
■ Notches can be enhanced by roundings, bevels or sub-
notches.
■ Roundings, bevels, separating cuts or sub-notches can be
removed from a notch. TruTops CAD joins adjacent notch
elements automatically.
■ If a notch is deleted entirely, the adjacent elements are
joined again.
■ Notches can be copied, moved, rotated, mirrored and
stretched.
■ The length of end elements of notches can be changed.
 
S523EN 2015-12-04 Characteristics: a property of elements and contours 1‐51
15. Screen display
15.1 Adapting window size
The window size can be adapted in a stepless manner. This is
advantageous, for example, when working with online documen-
tation simultaneously, or when the start bar lies over the TruTops
command bar.
Ø Drag the window frame to the desired size using the mouse.
15.2 Increasing or reducing the work
surface
1. Click the vertical separating line between the blue bar and
the work surface.
The blue bar is hidden.
2. Click the blue line at the left edge of the screen.
The blue bar appears.
15.3 Modifying color scheme
The following color schemes are possible:
■ Bright (white) background.
■ Dark (black) background.
■ Blue background.
■ Gray background.
Each color scheme is effective only for the current application
(CAD, Nest, Laser, Punch ...).
1. Either
Ø Select >Tools >Options....
or
Ø Select >View >Toolbars >Adapt....
Ø Select the "Options" tab.
2. Open the color scheme with ▼ and mark the desired color
scheme.
 
1‐52 Screen display 2015-12-04 S523EN
Increasing the work surface
Reducing the work surface
15.4 Moving masks and messages on the
interface
In TruTops, masks and messages can be freely moved on the
interface. This is advantageous, for example, when a message
and the objects under the message need to be visible.
1. Click on the title bar of the mask or the message.
2. Hold down the mouse button and move to the desired posi-
tion.
 
S523EN 2015-12-04 Screen display 1‐53
16. Display of drawings
16.1 Restructuring display of drawings
Ø Either
Ø Select >View >Zoom >Refresh.
or
Ø Press <F5> button.
or
Ø Select Refresh view
 .
16.2 Displaying drawing completely
Ø Either
Ø Select >View >Zoom >All.
or
Ø Press <Ctrl>+<T>.
or
Ø Select Total view
 .
16.3 Displaying sheet completely
This view can be displayed only in Laser and Punch applica-
tions.
Ø Either
Ø Select >View >Zoom >Sheet.
or
Ø Select Total sheet view
 .
16.4 Displaying detail view
1. Either
Ø Select >View >Zoom >Detail.
or
Ø Select Detail view
 .
 
1‐54 Display of drawings 2015-12-04 S523EN
Boxing in the desired detail
2. Click on the first point in the box with the mouse pointer (cur-
sor).
3. Click on the opposite point in the box.
4. Right click on the desired detail in the graphics area.
The graphics is zoomed in on. The pick point in the graphics
area becomes the new center.
5. Use the mouse wheel or the middle mouse button to click on
the desired detail in the graphics area.
The graphic is zoomed out from. The pick point in the graph-
ics area becomes the new center.
16.5 Moving screen section
Ø Either
Ø Select >View >Zoom.
Ø Select >Up, >Down, >Left or > Right.
or
Ø Position the mouse pointer (cursor) as sizing tool in the
working range.
Ø Keep the mouse wheel (or its middle button) pressed.
Ø Move the mouse pointer.
Tip
Depending on the usual method, the <Ctrl> button can be
pressed. This however is not necessary.
16.6 Zooming drawing
Ø Either
Ø For stepless zooming: position the mouse pointer (cursor)
in the working range.
Ø Keep the right mouse button pressed.
Ø Move the mouse downwards (zoom out) or upwards
(zoom in).
or
Ø To zoom stepwise: position the mouse pointer (cursor) in
the working range.
Ø Keep the <Ctrl> key pressed.
Ø Zoom the view in or out using the mouse wheel.
 
S523EN 2015-12-04 Display of drawings 1‐55
Zooming in (detailing)
Zooming out
16.7 Getting last view
TruTops always memorizes the last view that was set using a
button or the mouse.
Ø Either
Ø Select >View >Zoom >Last zoom.
or
Ø Select Show last view
 .
16.8 Memorizing and recalling view
1. Use the mouse or the Total view
  or Detail view
  buttons
to set the view that is to be saved.
2. Either
Ø Select >View >Zoom >Memorize zoom.
or
Ø Select Memorize view
 .
3. Either
Ø Select >View >Zoom >Get zoom.
or
Ø Select Get view
 .
16.9 Displaying and hiding outline points
Ø Either
Ø Select >View >All points  or > View >Open points.
or
Ø Select Show all points
  or Show open points
 .
Contour point Description
Green Closed contour point
Red Open contour point
Yellow More than two contour elements attached to a point
Tab. 1-4
 
1‐56 Display of drawings 2015-12-04 S523EN
Memorize view
Getting saved view
17. Selection preview, selecting
components
17.1 Working with selection preview
With selection preview, actions which are performed with the
mouse are visible immediately on the cursor or on the screen.
Function Screen/cursor dis-
play
Example
Measuring The current measure-
ment result is shown
on the cursor
Length, point, circle
measurements
Selection of compo-
nents (elements, bend-
ings, contours etc.)
Components are high-
lighted in color
Deleting contours, cre-
ating bending lines,
stretching
Selection of compo-
nents
The number of
selected components
is shown on the cursor
Deleting elements,
moving, smoothing
Corner selection The corner and both
corner elements are
highlighted in color
Creating roundings,
bevels, notches
Position selection Special element points
(see the following
table) are caught and
are displayed on the
cursor
Creating points, line 2
points, curve center
radius
Selection preview options Tab. 1-5
Special element points:
Point Affected elements Symbol
End Point Line, bevel, curve, rounding Square
Make Midpoint Circle, construction circle, curve,
rounding
+ (color: cyan)
Intersection All Entities Text: "x" and
large circle
Element center Line, bevel, curve, rounding Text: "1/2"
0 degree posi-
tion
Circle, construction circle, curve,
rounding
Text: "0"
90 degree posi-
tion
Circle, construction circle, curve,
rounding
Text: "90"
180 degree
position
Circle, construction circle, curve,
rounding
Text: "180"
270 degree
position
Circle, construction circle, curve,
rounding
Text: "270"
Other element
point
All Entities Small circle
 
S523EN 2015-12-04 Selection preview, selecting components 1‐57
Point Affected elements Symbol
Virtual corner
(original position
of a corner that
was beveled,
rounded or
notched)
Bevel, rounding, notch Square
Element points Tab. 1-6
Activating selection preview
Ø Select >View >Selection preview.
Selection preview is active (a check mark appears in front of
the menu item).
17.2 Selecting components
Elements, contours, bendings or points can be selected and
modified individually (individual selection). Multiple selection is a
further option. For this, they are firstly selected one after the
other and are then modified.
Multiple selection
Components are selected one after the other and are then modi-
fied for multiple selection. Selecting the component once again
undoes the selection.
1. Function, e.g. delete, select elements.
2. Press the <Ctrl> key.
The * symbol on the cursor shows that multiple selection
mode is active.
3. Select the elements to be deleted.
The selected elements are marked in color. If > Selection pre-
view is active, the number of selected elements is displayed
on the cursor.
4. Select OK.
The selected elements are deleted.
 
1‐58 Selection preview, selecting components 2015-12-04 S523EN
Fixed multiple selection
When this mode is selected, a component cannot be deselected
once it has been selected. This is only possible by changing
over to multiple selection mode.
1. Function, e.g. delete, select elements.
2. Press the <Shift> key.
The + symbol on the cursor shows that fixed multiple selec-
tion mode is active.
3. Select the elements to be deleted.
The selected elements are marked in color. If > Selection pre-
view is active, the number of selected elements is displayed
on the cursor.
4. Select OK.
The selected elements are deleted.
Switching between multiple selection and
fixed multiple selection
1. Select components.
2. Press the <Ctrl> or <Shift> key to switch to the other mode.
The selected mode is indicated by the symbol on the cursor.
Switching back to individual selection
Ø Either
Ø Select >Edit >Unmark.
or
Ø Release the <Ctrl> or <Shift> key.
Ø Click on the selected components again.
The components are displayed in black again.
Marking all components
All drawn components are marked using this function. Individual
components can then be deselected.
 
S523EN 2015-12-04 Selection preview, selecting components 1‐59
Ø Select >Edit >Mark all.
All components are marked.
Tip
If All is used, the selected function, for example "Delete", will be
immediately applied to all components.
 
1‐60 Selection preview, selecting components 2015-12-04 S523EN
18. Operating TruTops with the mouse
18.1 Automatically placing the mouse
pointer in masks
1. Select > Extras >Modify data....
2. Select > User >Configuration.
The "Configuration" mask is displayed.
3. Select "Place mouse pointer at OK".
or
Ø Select "Place mouse pointer at the next area of action".
4. Press Modify.
 
S523EN 2015-12-04 Operating TruTops with the mouse 1‐61
19. Operating TruTops using keyboard
19.1 Using Windows keyboard commands
and shortcuts
TruTops can now be operated using the usual Windows key-
board commands or shortcuts:
■ All menu items  linked with a shortcut have been appropri-
ately marked (e.g. > File >Open...: <Ctrl>+<O>).
■ The keyboard commands for the Command block  (9) (see
"Fig. 50209", pg. 1 ‐14) are displayed in the appropriate tool
tip:
− Total view: <Ctrl>+<Enter> ( ↲) or <Ctrl>+<Return> ( ↲).
− End: <Esc>.
− Ok: <Enter> or <Return> ( ↲).
1. To save a file: press <Ctrl>+<S> (instead of selecting > File
>Save).
2. To undo an action: press <Ctrl>+<Z> (instead of selecting
>Edit >Undo).
19.2 Entering numerical values and
coordinates
1. When entering decimals, use a point as separator. (Example:
Enter 30.5.)
2. Press <Enter> or <Return> ( ↲).
3. Enter X and Y coordinates separated by a comma. (Exam-
ple: X = "10 mm", Y = "20,5 mm": enter 10,20.5.)
4. Press <Enter> or <Return> ( ↲).
19.3 Entering texts in input fields
1. Click into the input box with the mouse pointer (cursor).
2. Enter characters one after the other.
3. To confirm the input: Press <Enter> or <Return> ( ↲).
 
1‐62 Operating TruTops using keyboard 2015-12-04 S523EN
Example 1
Example 2
Entering decimal values
Entering coordinates
19.4 Using key functions of TruTops
During initial installation and update of TruTops, the Windows
key functions are automatically set in the individual applications.
However, one can also work with the TruTops key functions on
request.
Note
The key functions must be separately set in each existing appli-
cation.
1. Select the application in which the TruTops key functions are
to be set.
2. Select > Extras >Modify data....
3. Select > User >Configuration.
The "Configuration" mask is displayed.
4. Select "Set TruTops key functions".
5. Select Modify.
Key Configuration
TruTops key functions Windows key function
↲ Jump to next input field. Confirm mask; is the same as
pressing Ok.
<↑>, <↓> - Delete characters in input fields.
<SHIFT>+<Backspace> Delete characters in input fields. Delete characters in input fields.
<Tab> Jump to next input field. All the field contents are automatically marked.
<Tab>+<→> or <Tab>+<←> Jump to next input field. Automatic marking of all the field contents is
removed.
Keep <SHIFT> pressed, mark the
area using <→> or <←>.
Mark selected field contents from the cursor position onwards.
Keep <SHIFT> pressed + <Pos 1>
(German keyboard) or <Home>
(English keyboard).
Mark from the cursor position to the start of the input field.
Keep <SHIFT> pressed + <Ende>
(German keyboard) or <End> (Eng-
lish keyboard).
Mark from the cursor position to the end of the field.
(Field contents are marked)
<Entf> (German keyboard) or <Del>
(English keyboard)
Delete marked contents of field.
(Field contents are marked)
Press desired character.
Marked field contents are replaced with the character pressed.
<SHIFT>+<Tab> - Jump to previous input field.
<Esc> Delete characters in input fields. Close mask; is the same as press-
ing: Cancel.
TruTops or Windows key functions Tab. 1-7
 
S523EN 2015-12-04 Operating TruTops using keyboard 1‐63
19.5 Using "Copy" – "Paste"
The "copy and paste" function is available in all TruTops input
fields.
Depending on the position of the cursor in the input field, the
contents are copied either completely or only partly into the inter-
mediate memory.
When pasting, the copied contents appear at the point where the
cursor is located.
Contents of the intermediate memory can be pasted from other
programs and into the TruTops input fields and vice versa.
Ø Copy and paste as described in the following table.
Copy Pasting into empty input field
Cursor position
Ι
Key combina-
tion
Key combina-
tion
Result
Example 123 Ι <CTRL> + <C>
or
<Strg> + <C>
<CTRL> + <V>
or
<Strg> + <V>
Example123
Ι Example123 Example123
Exam p le123 ple123
Copying and pasting Tab. 1-8
19.6 Using keyboard buffer of the
command line (repeating entries)
Repeated entries and functions do not need to be reentered.
The keyboard buffer saves entries or functions which have been
entered into the command line or which have run in the back-
ground. The last commands can be opened and scrolled through
using ▼:
1. Open the list field of the command line with ▼.
2. Mark the desired command or the desired entry.
3. Press <Enter> or <Return> ( ↲).
The command or the entry is repeated.
 
1‐64 Operating TruTops using keyboard 2015-12-04 S523EN
20. Calculator
You can carry out the following actions using the calculator:
■ Entering numerical values and coordinates.
■ Executing arithmetic operations and entering the result of the
arithmetic operations simultaneously.
The calculator is automatically activated during a new installation
and a TruTops update. It can be operated with the mouse as
well as (to some extent) with the keyboard in all modules. It is
displayed automatically on double-clicking in an input field.
Function Using with the
mouse
Using with the key-
board
Opening the calculator Double click in an
input field for numeri-
cal values.
(Not possible)
Deleting an entry C / Cl (Not possible)
Exiting the calculator
without adopting
entries
Cancel <Esc> (possible only if
the Windows key func-
tions have been set)
Closing calculator,
adopting entry
OK <Strg/Ctrl>+<Enter/
Return> ( ↲)
Squaring x2 (Not possible)
Pi Pi (Not possible)
Multiply * <*>
Divide / </>
Adding + <+>
Subtracting - <->
Result = ↲
Calculator functions Tab. 1-9
20.1 Deactivating calculator permanently
The calculator is automatically activated during a new installation
and a TruTops update.
Ø To deactivate the calculator permanently: set the value of the
"ST_NumInputWithMouse" variable in the public rules to 0
(under >Tools >Modify data...  >Rules >System).
 
S523EN 2015-12-04 Calculator 1‐65
20.2 Entering numerical values in input
fields
1. Position the mouse pointer (cursor) in the input field for
numerical value.
2. Double click.
The "easy" calculator is displayed:
Fig. 20085
3. Click on the desired figures and arithmetic operations or
enter them using the keyboard.
4. Press OK.
The calculator is closed.
20.3 Entering X and Y coordinates of
points
1. Select Calculator
  (on the left near the command line).
The calculator extended by "Coordinate" is displayed.
2. Enter the numerical value of the X coordinate in the upper
input field.
3. Select →X.
The value is adopted in the lower input field.
4. Enter the numerical value of the Y coordinate in the upper
input field.
5. Select →Y.
The value is adopted in the lower input field.
6. Press OK.
The calculator is closed.
 
1‐66 Calculator 2015-12-04 S523EN
21. Searching with the help of place
holders (wildcards)
Place holders simplify the search, when a designation (e.g. a file
name) or a number (e.g. a technology table) is not exactly
known.
The following place holders can be used in the TruTops file
browser:
■ ? = 1 arbitrary character.
■ * = arbitrary character string.
In case of database accesses (under > Tools >Modify data...) and
when selecting the technology table, the percent sign ("%") is a
place holder for arbitrary characters:
■ 1% = 1, subsequently none, one or several arbitrary charac-
ters.
■ %1 = none, one or several arbitrary characters, subsequently
1.
 
S523EN 2015-12-04 Searching with the help of place holders (wildcards) 1‐67
22. Message and confirmation masks
22.1 Reactivating hidden message and
confirmation masks
1. Select > Extras >Modify data....
2. Select > User >Configuration.
The "Configuration" mask is displayed.
3. Select "Show optional message boxes again".
4. Press Modify.
 
1‐68 Message and confirmation masks 2015-12-04 S523EN
23. Print
23.1 Printing screen content
The present screen can be printed with this function.
1. Load the file whose screen content is to be printed.
2. Select > File >Print >Screen....
The standard printer mask is displayed.
3. If required, modify the settings.
4. Press OK.
The screen content is printed.
23.2 Configuring line thickness when
printing screen contents
If the screen contents are printed on a printer with high resolu-
tion, the lines may be hard to see.
1. Open the file topsprn.ini in the Windows folder using a text
editor (such as Notepad).
Note
The entry LineWidthResolution specifies what proportion of
the printer's resolution is used for a line width of 1 pixel.
With printer resolution of 600dpi, the default value of 150
results in a line thickness of 4 pixels.
Higher values produce finer lines, lower values produce
thicker lines.
2. Adapt the LineWidthResolution entry.
23.3 Printing GEO files as *.HPGL files
TruTops CAD can print GEO files in the '*.HPGL' format (=
graphical output of plotters).
1. Load the desired file in the '*.GEO' or '*.DXF' format.
2. Select > File >Print >Plotting....
The "Plotting" mask is displayed.
3. Make the desired settings.
 
S523EN 2015-12-04 Print 1‐69
4. Press OK.
The 'GEO' is printed in the '*.HPGL' format.
 
1‐70 Print 2015-12-04 S523EN
24. Using auxiliary tools
24.1 Drawing auxiliary lines 
Drawing auxiliary line through 2 points
1. Select > Aux. tools,>Construction line  >Two points.
2. Follow the instructions in the command line.
Drawing an auxiliary line parallel to the
existing auxiliary line
Condition
■ The drawing contains at least one auxiliary line.
Fig. 4726
1. Select > Auxiliary tools  >Auxiliary line  >Parallel.
2. Click on the auxiliary line (P1) for which a parallel line is to
be drawn.
3. For one parallel auxiliary line: click on the point (P2) on the
parallel auxiliary line.
or
Ø For several parallel auxiliary lines: enter all distances at
which parallel auxiliary lines are to be drawn (separate
numerical values through blanks. Do not use any com-
mas. Example: 10 20 30).
4. ↲Press .
5. Click on the side on which the parallel line(s) should appear.
Drawing horizontal or vertical auxiliary
lines
1. Select > Aux. tools  >Construction line  >Horizontal.
 
S523EN 2015-12-04 Using auxiliary tools 1‐71
or
Ø Select >Aux. tools  >Construction line  >Vertical.
2. Follow the instructions in the command line.
Drawing an auxiliary line as a tangent at
the arc element and point
Condition
■ The drawing contains at least one arc element or circle.
P1 Approximate tangent point P2 End point of the tangent
Fig. 27381
1. Select > Auxiliary tools  >Auxiliary line  >Tangent at point .
2. Follow the instructions in the command line.
Drawing an auxiliary line at right angles to
an element
P1 Point on element P2 Start point of the auxiliary line
at right angles
Fig. 4729
1. Select > Aux. tools  >Construction line  >Perpendicular.
2. Follow the instructions in the command line.
 
1‐72 Using auxiliary tools 2015-12-04 S523EN
Drawing an auxiliary line through point and
angle of inclination
P1 Start point of the auxiliary line
P2 Point on the auxiliary line
A Angle
Fig. 4730
1. Select > Aux. tools  >Construction line  >Angle X.
2. Follow the instructions in the command line.
Drawing an auxiliary line through point and
angle to the base line
P1 Point on auxiliary line
P2 Point on base line
A Angle between auxiliary line
and element
Fig. 4732
1. Select > Auxiliary tools  >Auxiliary line  >Angle to line .
2. Follow the instructions in the command line.
 
S523EN 2015-12-04 Using auxiliary tools 1‐73
Drawing an auxiliary line through tangent
at 2 arc elements
P1 First tangent point P2 Second tangent point
Fig. 4731
1. Select > Auxiliary tools  >Auxiliary line  >Tangent at 2 arcs .
2. Follow the instructions in the command line.
Dividing an element with an auxiliary line
Application: dividing an element with a vertical construction line
between two random points (P1) and (P2)
Fig. 4733
1. Select > Aux. tools  >Construction line  >Division.
2. Either
Ø Click on the first point (P1).
or
Ø Enter the division factor (between 0 and 1).
Division factor 0.5: The auxiliary line is placed at the cen-
ter of the base element.
Division factor 0.2 means that the auxiliary line is placed
after one fifth of the base element.
Ø Click on the first point.
3. Click on the second point (P2).
 
1‐74 Using auxiliary tools 2015-12-04 S523EN
24.2 Drawing auxiliary circle
Drawing an auxiliary circle through three
points
Fig. 4734
1. Select > Auxiliary tools  >Auxiliary circle  >Three points.
2. Follow the instructions in the command line.
Drawing auxiliary circle through center and
radius
Fig. 4735
1. Select > Auxiliary circle  >Auxiliary circle  >Center radius.
2. Follow the instructions in the command line.
Drawing auxiliary circle through diameter
P1 Start point of the diameter P2 End point of the diameter
Fig. 4736
 
S523EN 2015-12-04 Using auxiliary tools 1‐75
1. Select > Auxiliary tools  >Auxiliary circle  >Diameter.
2. Follow the instructions in the command line.
Drawing auxiliary circle through center and
diameter
Fig. 4709
1. Select > Auxiliary tools  >Auxiliary circle  >Center - diameter .
2. Follow the instructions in the command line.
Drawing concentric auxiliary circles
Fig. 4737
1. Select > Auxiliary tools  >Auxiliary circle  >Concentric.
2. Click on the base circle (P1).
3. Click on a point (P2) on the arc.
or
Ø Enter the distance.
Positive value: concentric circle outside the basic circle.
Negative value: concentric circle inside the basic circle).
 
1‐76 Using auxiliary tools 2015-12-04 S523EN
Drawing auxiliary circle tangential to two
elements
P1 Point on first tangent
P2 Point on second tangent
P3 Point on circle line
Fig. 4738
1. Select > Auxiliary tools  >Auxiliary circle  >Two tangents - one
point.
2. Follow the instructions in the command line.
Drawing auxiliary circle tangential to an
element and two points
Fig. 4739
1. Select > Auxiliary tools  >Auxiliary circle  >Tangent - two points .
2. Click on approximate tangent point (P1).
3. Click on a point (P2) on the arc.
4. Click on a point (P3) on the arc.
 
S523EN 2015-12-04 Using auxiliary tools 1‐77
Drawing auxiliary circle tangential to three
elements
P1 Tangent point on first element
P2 Tangent point on second ele-
ment
P3 Tangent point on third element
Fig. 4740
1. Select > Auxiliary tools  >Auxiliary circle  >Three tangents.
2. Follow the instructions in the command line.
Drawing auxiliary circle tangential to an
element
P1 Tangent point P2 Center of the auxiliary circle
Fig. 4741
1. Select > Auxiliary tools  >Auxiliary circle  >Tangent - center .
2. Follow the instructions in the command line.
24.3 Auxiliary geometry
Note
Auxiliary geometries can be deleted partially or completely.
 
1‐78 Using auxiliary tools 2015-12-04 S523EN
Auxiliary geometry, deleting
1. Select > Auxiliary tools  >Delete auxiliary geometry .
2. Select All if the auxiliary geometry is to be completely
deleted.
or
Ø Click on individual elements if particular auxiliary geome-
tries are to be deleted.
3. Select Total view to rebuild the interface after the auxiliary
geometries are deleted.
or
Ø Change the window setting.
24.4 Measuring
Measuring the distance between 2 points
1. Select > Auxiliary tools  >Measure >2 points.
2. Follow the instructions in the command line.
Measuring coordinates of a point
1. Select > Auxiliary tools  >Measure >Point.
2. Follow the instructions in the command line.
Measuring horizontal or vertical distance
between 2 points
1. Select > Auxiliary tools  >Measure >Horizontal or > Vertical.
2. Follow the instructions in the command line.
Measuring coordinates, radius and
diameter of a circle
1. Select > Auxiliary tools  >Measure >Circle.
2. Follow the instructions in the command line.
 
S523EN 2015-12-04 Using auxiliary tools 1‐79
Measuring angle
1. Select > Auxiliary tools  >Measure >Angle.
2. Follow the instructions in the command line.
Measuring length
1. Select > Auxiliary tools  >Measure >Length.
2. Follow the instructions in the command line.
24.5 Zero point of the coordinate system
Displacing zero point
Note
If the zero point of the coordinate system has been displaced
and the *.GEO is then saved and reloaded, the zero point is
located again at the original place: in the lower left corner of the
circumscribing rectangle of the loaded '*.GEO' (1).
1 Zero point of the coordinate system in the lower left
corner of the circumscribing rectangle
2 Offset zero point
Fig. 30651
1. Select > Auxiliary tools  >Displace zero point .
2. Click on the zero point.
 
1‐80 Using auxiliary tools 2015-12-04 S523EN
25. Help in the case of problems
25.1 Diagnostics for program crash
A so-called "Crash-Dump" of the process is written in a file every
time TruTops crashes. This helps the TruTops development ana-
lyze the cause of the crash.
1. Following a crash, change to the following directory:e.g. in
TruTops Laser '...:\TRUMPF.NET\Applications\ToPs100\bin.'
In this directory you will find files with the following names:
'CRASH_20YYMMDD_hhmmss.DMP'.
'ERRORLOG_20YYMMDD_hhmmss.TXT'.
The time stamp of both files is the time of the crash:
20YYMMDD = year, month, day and hhmmss = hour, minute,
second.
2. Send both files and a description of what action cause the
crash to technical customer service.
 
S523EN 2015-12-04 Help in the case of problems 1‐81
 
1‐82 Help in the case of problems 2015-12-04 S523EN
Chapter 2
Setting basic data
1 The database as a knowledge-base 2‐3
1.1 Backup of data 2‐3
1.2 To import data into the database 2‐4
1.3 To modify the database 2‐4
1.4 To send a database via email 2‐4
2 TRUMPF function 2‐6
3 Data management 2‐7
3.1 To open the data management 2‐7
4 Machine data 2‐8
4.1 To copy or delete a machine 2‐8
Copying machine 2‐8
Deleting machine 2‐9
5 Material data 2‐10
5.1 To modify material data 2‐12
 
S523EN 2015-12-04 Setting basic data 2‐1
5.2 To delete material data 2‐13
6 System rules 2‐14
6.1 To change the value of a variable 2‐14
6.2 To create a variable 2‐15
6.3 To copy a variable 2‐15
6.4 To display the details for a variable 2‐16
6.5 To delete a variable 2‐17
6.6 To assign the values to colors and line types 2‐18
6.7 Description of variables in the system rules 2‐18
7 NC post-processing programs, external
programs
2‐26
7.1 To enter programs 2‐26
7.2 To execute programs 2‐28
7.3 Creating a collection call up for several NC
post-processing programs
2‐28
7.4 To modify programs 2‐31
7.5 To delete programs 2‐31
8 User-defined programs 2‐32
8.1 To enter programs 2‐32
8.2 To change programs 2‐32
8.3 To run programs 2‐32
 
2‐2 Setting basic data 2015-12-04 S523EN
1. The database as a knowledge-base
Technological knowledge that TRUMPF has developed for
TRUMPF machines over the years, and which has been continu-
ously optimized, has been integrated into the TruTops database.
It contains all data that TruTops accesses in the different pro-
gramming phases.
■ machine data.
■ Material data.
■ Technology tables.
■ Rules.
■ NC output data (NC cycles, formats, times ...).
■  
The technology tables and the rules contain the current applica-
tion parameters that have been released by the TRUMPF Proc-
ess Development Department. The updates of the data collec-
tions are released at regular intervals.
The database is an upgradeable knowledge base. Newly
acquired knowledge in the field of processing technology can be
entered here. TruTops accesses this data the next time an NC
program is generated.
The database offers the following options:
■ Creating data records (creating complete new ones or copy-
ing the existing ones).
■ Changing data records (modifying entries).
■ Deleting available data records.
■ Adding data about your material.
■  
■ Checking the values stored in the database.
The database must be configured for the individual machine in
the Data Management. Only then are the required functions
available for processing in TruTops.
1.1 Backup of data
Note
The data will be saved using the "Backup & restore" tool.
Ø (See the TruTops installation manual)
 
S523EN 2015-12-04 The database as a knowledge-base 2‐3
Current application
parameters
Knowledge base
Working with the database
Maintaining data
1.2 To import data into the database
Some data (e.g. a new set of rules, new technology tables, ...)
cannot be imported directly into the TruTops database without an
update.
Condition
■ The file extension corresponds to the current database ver-
sion.
1. Load the storage medium.
2. Select > Extras >Modify data....
3. Select > User >Database... >Modify....
The file browser opens.
4. Change the directory and mark the database file.
5. Press OK.
The new data will be read into the database.
1.3 To modify the database
To modify the database, any database script (*.exe file) can be
launched, to fix faults in the database or to meet customer
requirements (e.g. to change data).
Database scripts can be obtained from technical customer serv-
ice.
1. Select > Extras >Modify data....
2. Select > User >Database... >Modify....
The file browser opens.
3. Select the database script.
All changes are shown in a log after the modification.
1.4 To send a database via email
Notes
■ With this procedure, only application-specific data can be
sent. To send the complete database, use the "Backup &
restore" tool.
■ When working with a network database (MSDE), sending of
the TruTops database through email can only be started by
the database server.
 
2‐4 The database as a knowledge-base 2015-12-04 S523EN
■ The email program for sending the database must be MAPI-
compatible.
Note
By default, when sending the database by email, it will be
broken up into 4 MB files. This file size can be changed.
1. Select > Extras >Modify data....
2. Select > Rules >System.
3. Find the variable "DbComprSplitSizeInKb" and enter the
required file size under "Value".
4. Select > User >Database... >Send....
The "Send database via email" mask is displayed.
5. Fill in the input fields.
6. Press OK.
The database will be compressed and broken up into parts.
The required number of emails will be created in the email
program.
7. To send emails.
 
S523EN 2015-12-04 The database as a knowledge-base 2‐5
Modifying file size
To generate emails
2. TRUMPF function
Certain functions are password-protected. Only open and modify
functions under the instructions of technical customer service.
Note
The daily password must be requested from technical customer
service. It is only valid for the day on which it is issued.
 
2‐6 TRUMPF function 2015-12-04 S523EN
3. Data management
All default values for machines and components have already
been set. The options available depend on the machine selected.
3.1 To open the data management
1. Start TruTops.
Note
The Data Management is usually opened for the currently
active machine. The machine cannot be changed within the
open Data Management.
3. If required, change the machine (via > Tools >Change
machine).
4. To open the data management, select > Extras >Modify
data....
 
S523EN 2015-12-04 Data management 2‐7
4. Machine data
The machine data is the basic requirement for the generation of
NC programs. TruTops can be configured for different machines
with an NC interface.
The technical data for the machine, the laser and the control
system is stored in the database. TruTops accesses this data
when generating an NC program.
Incorrect values in the machine data can lead to inoperable
NC programs.
Ø Check that all entries and modifications are correct.
Ø If required: contact Technical Service.
All the data necessary for your machine can be found in the cur-
rent operator's manual and the current programming manual of
your machine.
4.1 To copy or delete a machine
Copying machine
In order to be able to create various configurations from a
machine, it can be copied (several times).
1. Start Windows Explorer.
2. Go to the following directory:
<LW>\TRUMPF.NET\Utils\DbTools\MachineCopy'.
(LW = drive letter)
3. Double-click on the 'machineCopy.bat' shell script.
The "Copy machine" mask is displayed.
4. Mark the desired language and select OK.
Note
The correct ODBC entry can be called up via > Help
>Info"Files". The current database will be shown in the first
line, enclosed in round brackets.
The "Copy/Delete machine" mask is displayed.
6. Mark the machine to be copied.
7. Select Copy.
 
2‐8 Machine data 2015-12-04 S523EN
 NOTICE 
The machine is copied. A number is attached in front of the
type no. ("Type") and increases consecutively (number for
the first copy: "1").
8. Select Exit.
9. Select > Extras >Modify data....
10. Configure the machine.
Deleting machine
1. Start Windows Explorer.
2. Go to the following directory:
<LW>\TRUMPF.NET\Utils\DbTools\MachineCopy'.
(LW = drive letter)
3. Start the machineCopy.bat script file (double click).
The "Copy machine" mask is displayed.
4. Mark the desired language and select OK.
The "Copy/Delete machine" mask is displayed.
6. Mark the machine to be deleted.
7. Select Delete.
8. Select Exit.
 
S523EN 2015-12-04 Machine data 2‐9
5. Material data
With the exception of sheet margins, the material data is
machine-independent. Additions or changes will not be overwrit-
ten when TruTops is updated.
When a new raw material is created, all values which are impor-
tant for machining in TruTops must also be created. This is why
every material is assigned an alias, whose values should be
used instead.
TruTops uses the following layers of material data:
Term Important prop-
erties
Description
Group e.g. aluminum,
steel, stainless
steel,...
Materials are assigned to various
materials groups.
Material e.g.:
 ■ Tensile
strength
 ■ E-modulus
 ■ Admitted
processing
The material is the basis for the
raw material.
If no bend allowances have been
entered for the associated unpro-
cessed material, then the bend
allowances from the bend allow-
ance alias will be used.
Raw material  ■ Material
 ■ Material
thickness
 ■ Film
 ■ Tempering
A raw material is a material of a
defined thickness.
Blank  ■ X dimension
 ■ Y dimension
A blank is a raw material with
defined dimensions (=°sheet).
By specifying a stock ID, the ware-
house management can precisely
determine the bin location of the
blank and make it available for
processing. The stock ID is output
in the NC program and in other
TRUMPF-specific file formats (e.g.
*.taf, *.pdf, *.job, *.tmt ...).
Material data levels Tab. 2-1
All levels of the material data have a clear relationship to one
another.
 
2‐10 Material data 2015-12-04 S523EN
Material data levels Fig. 60476
The standard raw material ID consists of the name of the stand-
ard material group and the material thickness in 1/100°mm as
well as information regarding the material surface.
An 11-character raw material ID is automatically created for new
raw materials.
Position Variable Explanation
1-4 Abbreviation if the material group.
5-8 Material thickness 4-digit in 1/100 mm (0.1
in = 0100).
9 Film type
- None
f One-sided, ready-to-laser
D Two-sided, ready-to-laser
p One-sided, points
I Two-sided, points
c One-sided, vaporize
K Two-sided, vaporize
10 Surface coating
- None
I Electrolytically galvanized
H Hot-dip galvanized
Z Galvanized
B Primed
O Oxidized
 
S523EN 2015-12-04 Material data 2‐11
Unprocessed material ID
Position Variable Explanation
11 High surface quality required?
- Standard stripper level
K Stripper level +1 mm (only TruTops Punch)
Note: The letter "K" for the variable is
adapted to other languages.
Meaning of the raw material ID Tab. 2-2
Example: SS000100f-K
■ SS00: Material group StainlessSteel 00 (1.4301).
■ 0100: Material thickness 1.0 mm.
■ f: foil type, one-sided, ready-to-laser.
■ -: no surface coating.
■ K: high surface quality is required (stripper level +1 mm).
The standard stock IDs correspond to the standard raw material
IDs with a sheet size of 2000 x 1000 mm.
A 21-character stock ID is automatically created for new raw
blanks.
Position Explanation
1-11 Corresponds to the raw material ID.
12 Dummy.
13-21 Sheet dimension (X dimension x Y dimension) in mm or
inch (e.g. 96°in = 0960)
Meaning of the stock ID Tab. 2-3
Example: SS000100f-K-2000x1000
■ SS000100f-K: corresponds to the raw material ID.
■ 2000x1000: sheet size with 2000 mm in X direction and
1000 mm in Y direction.
Example in inch: SS000100f-K-0800x0400
■ SS000100f-K: corresponds to the raw material ID.
■ 0800x0400: Sheet dimension with 80°inch in X direction and
40° inch in Y direction.
5.1 To modify material data
1. Select > Extras >Modify data....
2. Select material.
3. Select the data record.
The data is entered in the mask head.
 
2‐12 Material data 2015-12-04 S523EN
Stock ID
4. Modify data.
5. Press Modify.
5.2 To delete material data
Note
TRUMPF materials cannot be deleted.
This is because faulty assignments will result between
materials and technology tables in TruTops if original
material data from TRUMPF is deleted!
Ø Do not delete original material files from TRUMPF .
1. Select > Extras >Modify data....
2. Select material.
3. Select the data record.
The data is entered in the mask head.
4. Select Delete.
5. Confirm message with Yes.
The material, the unprocessed material or the blank will be
deleted in the selection field and in the database.
 
S523EN 2015-12-04 Material data 2‐13
 NOTICE 
6. System rules
Apart from the internal TRUMPF, password-protected rules, there
is also a public set of system rules available. The variables in
the system rules concern all machines and all of TruTops.
6.1 To change the value of a variable
Notes
■ In the internal, password-protected rules, variables can only
be changed with the help of technical customer service.
■ Changes to the public rules will be retained after a new
installation or an updates of TruTops.
Deleted or incorrect variables can lead to inoperable NC
programs!
Ø Do not delete TRUMPF variables.
Ø Check all entries and changes.
Ø If required: contact Technical Service.
1. Select > Extras >Modify data....
Note
The variable shown in the machine rules depends on the
active machine.
2. Either
Ø To open the machine rules, select> Rules >Machine.
or
Ø To open the system rules, select > Rules >System.
A screen with all of the available variables will be displayed.
Tip
By entering filter criteria, the number of variables displayed
can be limited.
3. Mark variables.
The value of the variables will be displayed under "value". In
the comment text underneath, information about the marked
variable will be displayed.
4. Modify the value.
5. Press Modify.
 
2‐14 System rules 2015-12-04 S523EN
Internal and public sets of
rules
 NOTICE 
Open rules
Display the value and
comment of the variable
Modify the value
If the value entered is invalid, an error message will be dis-
played.
If it is necessary to restart the active TruTops application, for the
changes to take effect, a message will be displayed.
6.2 To create a variable
Not all variables have already been created when TruTops is
delivered. As required, some can be added.
Condition
■ The machines for which the copied variables should apply
must be active.
1. Select > Extras >Modify data....
Note
The variable shown in the machine rules depends on the
active machine.
2. To open the machine rules, select> Rules >Machine.
A screen with all of the available variables will be displayed.
Tip
By entering filter criteria, the number of variables displayed
can be limited.
3. Press Create.
The "Selection" mask is displayed.
4. Mark variables.
The "Selection" screen will be closed.
5. Enter the value.
6. Press Create.
The value will be entered into the list.
7. Select Return.
6.3 To copy a variable
In the machine rules, variables for one machine can be copied
and used for another.
 
S523EN 2015-12-04 System rules 2‐15
Open rules
Creating a variable
Enter value
Condition
■ The machines for which the copied variables should apply
must be active.
1. Select > Extras >Modify data....
Note
The variable shown in the machine rules depends on the
active machine.
2. To open the machine rules, select> Rules >Machine.
A screen with all of the available variables will be displayed.
Tip
By entering filter criteria, the number of variables displayed
can be limited.
3. Press Create.
The "Selection" mask will be displayed. It contains variables,
which are already in the database for other machines, but
which have not yet been defined for the active machine.
4. Mark variables.
The "Selection" screen will be closed.
5. Enter the value.
6. Press Create.
The value will be entered into the list.
7. Select Return.
6.4 To display the details for a variable
Other information is stored for the variables apart from the
descriptive text, such as the range of values, the test expression
or whether they will be overwritten by a TruTops update.
1. Select > Extras >Modify data....
Note
The variable shown in the machine rules depends on the
active machine.
2. Either
Ø To open the machine rules, select> Rules >Machine.
 
2‐16 System rules 2015-12-04 S523EN
Open rules
Variable, copying
Enter value
Open rules
or
Ø To open the system rules, select > Rules >System.
A screen with all of the available variables will be displayed.
Tip
By entering filter criteria, the number of variables displayed
can be limited.
3. Mark variables.
The value of the variables will be displayed under "value". In
the comment text underneath, information about the marked
variable will be displayed.
4. Select Info.
Details about the variables are displayed.
6.5 To delete a variable
Deleted or incorrect variables can lead to inoperable NC
programs!
Ø Do not delete TRUMPF variables.
Ø Check all entries and changes.
Ø If required: contact Technical Service.
1. Select > Extras >Modify data....
Note
The variable shown in the machine rules depends on the
active machine.
2. Either
Ø To open the machine rules, select> Rules >Machine.
or
Ø To open the system rules, select > Rules >System.
A screen with all of the available variables will be displayed.
Tip
By entering filter criteria, the number of variables displayed
can be limited.
3. Mark variables.
The value of the variables will be displayed under "value". In
the comment text underneath, information about the marked
variable will be displayed.
 
S523EN 2015-12-04 System rules 2‐17
Display the value and
comment of the variable
Displaying details
 NOTICE 
Open rules
Display the value and
comment of the variable
4. Press Delete.
6.6 To assign the values to colors and
line types
If colors or line types can be defined for variables in the rules,
always the same digits are used for the respective color and line
type.
Value Color Line type
-1 Transparent -
0 Black, if background is black.
White, if background is white.
Solid
1 White, if background is black.
Black if background is white.
Dashed
2 Red Dotted
3 Yellow Dot and dash
4 Green -
5 Cyan -
6 Blue -
7 Magenta -
Tab. 2-4
6.7 Description of variables in the system
rules
Variable Description
BarcodeCommon  ■ 0: TruTops does not output a bar code for the program name in
the setup plan (*.html, *.pdf).
(standard)
 ■ 1: TruTops outputs a bar code for the program name in the setup
plan (*.html, *.pdf).
BarcodeEncoding The coding of the barcode.
BarcodeFont The font of the barcode.
BarcodeSinglePart  ■ 0: TruTops does not output bar codes for single parts in the setup
plan (*.html, *.pdf). (standard)
 ■ 1: TruTops outputs the part ID of each single part as bar code in
the setup plan (*.html, *.pdf).
 ■ 2: TruTops outputs the drawing notes of each single part as bar-
code in the setup plan (*.html, *.pdf).
BarcodeSize The font size of the barcode.
CadCheckContourIntersectionOnSave 1: When saving in TruTops CAD, a check for overlapping contours is
done.
 
2‐18 System rules 2015-12-04 S523EN
Deleting a variable
Variable Description
CheckForGmtWhenLoadGeo_FsMode 1
CheckForGmtWhenLoadGeo_PdmMode
2
CheckForGmtWhenLoadGeo_Option Relates to variables "CheckForGmtWhenLoadGeo_FsMode" and
"CheckForGmtWhenLoadGeo_PdmMode".
If *.gmt files are also to be suggested which were produced for other
machines, remove machineName=ST_MaschinenName from the
value.
ClickZoomFactor Factor for zoom when clicking with center or right mouse click.
CompanyLogo The path where the company logo is stored, which will be shown in
the setup plan.
Note: The file name of the company logo must begin with "System".
Example: 'C:\trumpf\kundendaten\system_mylogo.gif'
DimensioningColor Color of the dimensioning
 ■ 3: Yellow, (standard)
Other colors: (see "To assign the values to colors and line types",
pg. 2 ‐18)
DxfIgnoreInvisibleElements Loading of DXF files with/without invisible elements
 ■ 0: Dxf files are loaded with invisible elements.
 ■ 1: Dxf files are loaded without invisible elements.
EnableRedrawAcceleration Accelerated redraw.
 ■ 0: Deactivated
 ■ 1: Activated
FactorElectircPowerPiercing Part of cutting performance for the piercing power output (negative:
standard).
LabelPrinterLayoutFile Path to the layout file to print a label.
LabelPrinterModeCommon
LabelPrinterModePart
Producing labels. The "LabelPrinterModeCommon" variable relates to
the NC program, the "LabelPrinterModePart" variable to the part.
 ■ 0: No labels are produced.
 ■ 1: Labels are produced.
LaserAutoRuleSelect If only one matching technology table or a matching set of rules is
found, this will automatically be activated.
 ■ 0: Yes
 ■ 1: No
LaserFormatString This defines which information is shown for the active laser.
 ■ $N: Text "Laser".
 ■ $L: LTT.
 ■ $G: Gas type.
 ■ $M: Material.
 ■ $R: Laser rules.
 ■ $I: Process rule remark.
Example $N $L $R ($I): "Laser T2D-5532 T2D-5532-1 (round off)" will
be displayed.
1 When working with TruTops in the file system.
2 When working with TruTops in the PDM system.
 
S523EN 2015-12-04 System rules 2‐19
Variable Description
LaserShowAllRulesDefault Only show suitable rules for the technology table
 ■ 0: No
 ■ 1: Yes
LicenceServerPeekTimeSpanInSeconds Time span in seconds in which the TruTops network license server is
to be queried.
 ■ -: If no value is entered, then the server will not be queried.
LOG_PATH The path where log files of the backup are placed.
MaterialRawInchMetricSelection  ■ 0: Only display materials in the active system of dimensions.
 ■ 1: Show all material.
MaxDoubleClickTimeInMs Time in ms during which a mouse click is interpreted as a double-
click.
NestResultLogText Write .erg files.
 ■ 0: No
 ■ 1: Yes
NestResultShowText Show .erg files as result of nesting.
 ■ 0: No
 ■ 1: Yes
NestShowParametersAfterCreatingJob Display parameter dialog after assembling the job.
 ■ 0: No
 ■ 1: For free geometry nester
 ■ 2: For rectangle nester.
NestShowParametersBeforeCreatingJob Display parameter dialog before assembling the job.
 ■ 0: No
 ■ 1: For free geometry nester
 ■ 2: For rectangle nester.
NestTextInFeedback Show texts in the feedback.
 ■ 0: No
 ■ 1: Yes
NestWriteTafFileCopies  ■ 0: Do not write copies of sheets.
 ■ 1: Write each individual sheet in taf files when saving.
NrOfFilesInCadRingBuf Size of the ring buffer in the CAD part
PDM_minimalDatabaseSpace Minimum required database memory (MB)
PDM_minimalDiscSpace Minimum required space on hard disk for file storage (MB).
PDMWarningMode Specification when PDM warnings are to be issued.
 ■ 0: No warnings if files are used which are no longer up to date, or
if files are overwritten which have lots of dependencies.
 ■ 1: Warn if files that are based on files that have been modified in
the meanwhile are to be loaded. The name of the relevant file is
specified.
Example:
− A 'sample.dxf' file is used to generate a 'sample.geo' file.
− The 'sample.geo' file is nested with other GEO files on a
sheet.
− The 'sample.dxf' file will be changed.
− If the sheet is re-loaded, a message saying that the 'sam-
ple.dxf' file has been modified will be displayed.
 
2‐20 System rules 2015-12-04 S523EN
Variable Description
 ■ 2: Warn if, when saving a file, another file is affected by the modi-
fications. The name of the relevant file is specified.
Example:
− A 'sample.geo' file will be generated and saved.
− The 'sample.geo' file will be nested on a 'sample.taf' sheet.
− The 'sample.geo' file will be modified and saved again. A mes-
sage saying that the 'sample.taf' file is also affected by the
modifications will be displayed.
 ■ 5: Warn if files that are based on modified files that have been
intermediately modified are to be loaded. The names of all the rel-
evant files are listed.
Example:
− A 'sample.dxf' file is used to generate a 'sample.geo' file.
− The 'sample.geo' file is nested with other GEO files on a
sheet.
− The 'sample.dxf' file will be changed.
− If the sheet is re-loaded, a message saying that the 'sam-
ple.dxf' file has been modified and the 'sample.geo' file is no
longer up to date will be displayed.
 ■ 6: Warn if, when saving a file, other files are affected by the modi-
fications. The names of all the relevant files are listed.
Example:
− A 'sample.geo' file will be generated and saved.
− The 'sample.geo' will be saved as 'sample.mtl' mini nest and
nested on a 'sample.taf' sheet.
− The 'sample.geo' file will be modified and saved again. A mes-
sage saying that the 'sample.mtl' and 'sample.taf' files are also
affected by the modifications will be displayed.
 ■ 7: Warn if files that are based on files that have been modified in
the meanwhile are to be loaded and warn if when saving a file,
other files are also affected by the modifications. The names of all
the relevant files are listed.
For examples, see value = 5 and value = 6.
PrinterDialog Printing for setup plans.
 ■ 1: The screen to select the printer will be displayed.
 ■ 3: The setup plan will be printed on the default printer with no fur-
ther interaction.
Sc_KennzNotBearbGeo Evaluation of the settings for contours which cannot be processed.
The settings can be modified under General 2  in the parameters for
the laser rules. Modify settings: .
 ■ 0: The settings are evaluated.
 ■ 1: The settings are evaluated.
(standard)
Sc_Krit_Geo Evaluation of the color information during laser cutting. Cyan colored
points will be point marked. Yellow lines will be marked.
 ■ 0: Color information will be evaluated.
 ■ 1: Color information will not be evaluated.
(standard)
 
S523EN 2015-12-04 System rules 2‐21
Variable Description
ScrollcustomerNameDefaultOf
ScrollmaterialDefaultOf
ScrollmaterialIDDefaultOf
ScrollstockIDDefaultOf
ScrolltruMachineNameDefaultOf
ScrolluserDefaultOf
"Scroll" variables are used to configure content of selection list boxes
(scrolls).
Example: Scrolluser ("Operator" selection list box in the "Create NC
program" screen).
 ■ ScrolluserDefaultOf: default value 100. TruTops searches the data-
base and determines the 100 last used user names.
 ■ ScrolluserMaxNumber: default value 19. Of the 100 last used user
names, the 19 most frequent are determined and shown in the
selection list box.
 ■ ScrolluserSortOrder: default value TIME. The 19 most frequently
used user names are sorted in descending order by date.
− AZ: alphabetical sorting from A in ascending order.
− ZA: alphabetical sorting from Z in descending order.
Other selection list boxes (scrolls) are configured analogously:
 ■ ScrollcustomerNameDefaultOf: "Customer/Job number" selection
list box in the "Create NC program" screen. Customer names are
displayed.
 ■ ScrollmaterialDefaultOf: material
 ■ ScrollmaterialIDDefaultOf: unprocessed material identity numbers
 ■ ScrollstockIDDefaultOf: stock identity numbers
 ■ ScrolltruMachineNameDefaultOf: machine names
ScrollDrawingNoteMaxNumber Maximum number of entries in the selection list box for drawing notes
ScrollDrawingNoteSortOrder The sort order for the selection list box with drawing comments.
 ■ AZ: Alphabetical sort, from A upwards.
 ■ ZA: Alphabetical sort, from Z downwards.
 ■ TIME: Sort from the last entry used, downwards.
ScrollOrderNumberMaxNumber The maximum number of entries in the selection list box for job num-
bers
ScrollOrderNumberSortOrder The sort order for the selection list box with order numbers.
 ■ AZ: Alphabetical sort, from A upwards.
 ■ ZA: Alphabetical sort, from Z downwards.
ScrollPartIdNumberMaxNumber Maximum number of entries in the selection list box for part identity
numbers
ScrollPartIdNumberSortOrder The sort order for the selection list box with part identity numbers.
 ■ AZ: Alphabetical sort, from A upwards.
 ■ ZA: Alphabetical sort, from Z downwards.
 ■ TIME: Sort from the last entry used, downwards.
SetupPlanTimeformatGeneralData Format for total time in the setup plan.
 ■ %#H : %M : %S [h:min:s]: Example, (standard)
SetupPlanTimeformatSinglePart Format for the single part time in the setup plan.
 ■ %q2 min: Example, (standard)
ST_BendTypeAutoCorrect 1: Bending method and technology (pre/final bend) are automatically
corrected.
ST_BmtPath For *.bmt files:
Path to the folder which is displayed by default when opening or sav-
ing the file type.
 
2‐22 System rules 2015-12-04 S523EN
Variable Description
ST_BmtPathModal For *.bmt files: The last selected folder will be displayed again when
opening or closing.
 ■ 0: No
 ■ 1: Yes
ST_DwgfPathModal For *.dwgf files:
Path to the folder which is displayed by default when opening or sav-
ing the file type.
ST_DwgPath For *.dwgf files:
The last selected folder will be displayed again when opening or clos-
ing.
 ■ 0: No
 ■ 1: Yes
ST_DxfPath For *.dxf files:
Path to the folder which is displayed by default when opening or sav-
ing the file type.
ST_DxfPathModal For *.dxf files:
The last selected folder will be displayed again when opening or clos-
ing.
 ■ 0: No
 ■ 1: Yes
ST_FsLoaderMask To activate the command line file selector: set the value to M_Loa-
derKommandoZeile.
ST_GraPath For *.gra files (only in the Nest application):
Path to the folder which is displayed by default when opening or sav-
ing the file type.
ST_GraPathModal For *.gra files:
The last selected folder will be displayed again when opening or clos-
ing.
 ■ 0: No
 ■ 1: Yes
ST_IgsPath For *.igs files (only in the Nest application):
Path to the folder which is displayed by default when opening or sav-
ing the file type.
ST_IgsPathModal For *.igs files:
The last selected folder will be displayed again when opening or clos-
ing.
 ■ 0: No
 ■ 1: Yes
ST_IgsSaveExt For *.igs files:
File ending when saving.
 ■ IGS: (standard)
ST_IgsSelect For *.igs files:
Reg. expr. for the file display
ST_MiPath For *.mi files (only in the Nest application):
Path to the folder which is displayed by default when opening or sav-
ing the file type.
 
S523EN 2015-12-04 System rules 2‐23
Variable Description
ST_MiPathModal For *.mi files:
The last selected folder will be displayed again when opening or clos-
ing.
 ■ 0: No
 ■ 1: Yes
ST_MiSaveExt For *.mi files:
File ending when saving.
 ■ IGS: (standard)
ST_MiSelect For *.mi files:
Reg. expr. for the file display
ST_NumInputWithMouse A calculator will be displayed for input fields where a numerical value
can be entered.
 ■ 0: Deactivated
 ■ 1: Activated
ST_ReplaceArcWithLineError Replace arcs with a single line when loading a drawing if the maxi-
mum chordal error is smaller than the given tolerance value.
 ■ 0.001: (standard)
ST_ReplaceArcWithPolygonDistance Indicates the maximum permissible error for the replacement of a
banana with a large radius (see ST_ReplaceArcWithPolygonRadius).
If this value is reduced, then more lines are generated.
 ■ 0.001: (standard)
ST_ReplaceArcWithPolygonMinLength This value indicates the minimum length of a line when replacing an
arc that is too large with a line (see ST_ReplaceArcWithPolygonRa-
dius).
 ■ 4.0: (standard)
ST_ReplaceArcWithPolygonRadius Replace arcs with a line during loading of a drawing if the radius of
the arc is larger than the given radius. The fewest possible lines are
always generated. If the replacement fails, the arc remains unaffected.
 ■ 10000: (standard)
ST_SelRingBufAnz Ring buffer size
ST_TtfPath For *.ttf files:
Path to the folder which is displayed by default when opening or sav-
ing the file type.
ST_TtfPathModal For *.ttf files:
The last selected folder will be displayed again when opening or clos-
ing.
 ■ 0: No
 ■ 1: Yes
ST_VlgSelRingBufAnz Ring buffer size for templates
ST_WindowPanFaktor Factor and direction of the movement arrows for the graphics window
TcPartBitmapHeight The size of the single part image in the html setup plan in the Y
direction, in pixels.
TcPartBitmapMonochrome The mode of the single part images in the *.html setup plan.
 ■ 0: Colored
 ■ 1: Black & white
TcPartBitmapWidth The size of the single part image in the html setup plan in the X
direction, in pixels.
 
2‐24 System rules 2015-12-04 S523EN
Variable Description
TcSheetBitmapHeight The height of the sheet image in the *.html setup plan in pixels.
 ■ 440: (standard)
TcSheetBitmapMonochrome The mode of the sheet image file in the *.html setup plan.
 ■ 0: Colored
 ■ 1: Black & white, (standard)
TcSheetBitmapWidth The width of the sheet image in the *.html setup plan in pixels.
 ■ 580: (standard)
'TOPS_PWD' Working directory for ToPs. Overwrites the INI environment entry
TOPS_PWD. (If empty, then the last working directory will be used)
TxSrTafC_WRITE_CRG_EXT To generate an event file for TC-CELL.
 ■ -: If no value is entered, no event file will be produced.
 ■ CEL: For example, an event file will be generated for TC-CELL
with the file ending '*.cel'.
UseAdvancedCalculator To active the extended calculator.
 ■ 0: No
 ■ 1: Yes
Description of variables in the system rules Tab. 2-5
 
S523EN 2015-12-04 System rules 2‐25
7. NC post-processing programs,
external programs
7.1 To enter programs
NC post-processing programs or external programs can be
entered and used in TruTops. The possible settings are
explained in the following example of an NC post-processing pro-
gram.
Examples:
■ *.html setup plans can be edited, each time they are gener-
ated, by an NC program using Microsoft Word.
■ *.lst files can be edited, each time they are generated, by an
NC program using Word.
1. Select > Extras >Modify data....
2. Select > User >Programs.
The "External Program Settings" mask is displayed.
3. Under "User", enter trumpf.
Note
Any designation can be entered here which is not already in
use.
4. Enter "Designation".
Note
As soon as an external program (in the example Microsoft
Word) is opened in self-holding (modal) mode from within
TruTops, or if a TruTops file is opened by an external pro-
gram, it will no longer be possible to interact with TruTops.
The external program must first be closed.
5. Either
Ø If the program is to remain open or if the modified file is
to be re-imported into the PDM file management system
then, under "Modal", select YES.
or
Ø If the program is not to remain open then, under "Modal",
select NO.
6. If the program (e.g. to do some editing) is to be opened in
its own window then, under "Window", select YES.
7. If a logfile is to be created:
 
2‐26 NC post-processing programs, external programs 2015-12-04 S523EN
Opening Management
Setting
− Under "Show log", select YES.
− Under "Parameters", enter the following:
-l (in words: minus lower-case L, space), followed by
the absolute path to the logfile.
Example: ‑l C:\TRUMPF.NET\workfiles
\user1\logfile.log
If the 'C:\TRUMPF.NET\workfiles\user1 \logfile.log' log file is
created by the external program (must be programmed in
this way), TruTops displays the log file automatically after the
external program has been ended.
8. If the external program operates with UNC paths (Windows
default): under "Export" and "Re-import", select NO.
It is not necessary to export and then re-import.
Note
If files exported from the PDM system are to be re-imported,
the file names must not be changed.
9. If the external program does not operate with UNC paths
then, under "PDM settings", make the following settings:
− Set "export" to Yes.
The files to be accessed in PDM will be exported to a
temporary directory in the file system.
− If the exported files are to be modified and are then to
be available again in the PDM, then set "re-import" to
Yes. (Only possible if "Modal" is active.)
The modified files will be re-imported into PDM as soon
as the program is closed.
− If the program needs the files which were used to create
the NC program (*.geo, *.mtl, *.gmt, ...),then set "export
help files" to Yes.
10. To notify Microsoft Word of the location of the *lst file, under
"Parameter" enter the variable $(U).
If for example, the NC program '/TRUMPF.NET/WORKFILES/
USER1/SAMPLE.LST' is created on the PC4711 computer
and TruTops with PDM, the contents of the variables reads "\
\PC4711\TRUMPF.PDM2\TRUMPF.NET\WORKFILES\USER1
\SAMPLE.LST".
$(D)Directory = absolute directory
$(N)Name = file name (without
file extension)
$(E)Extension = file extension
$(P)Path = complete path to file
Fig. 42508
 
S523EN 2015-12-04 NC post-processing programs, external programs 2‐27
TruTops with PDM, version 2
$(D)Directory = absolute directory
$(N)Name = file name (without
file extension)
$(E)Extension = file extension
$(P)Path = complete path to file
$(U)Path of the file (not included
in the graphics)
Fig. 43230
The variable contains "\
\PC4711\TRUMPF.PDM2\TRUMPF.NET/WORKFILES/USER1/
SAMPLE.LST".
11. Under "Program", enter the path and the name of the pro-
gram.
Tip
In the example with Microsoft Word, the path and the pro-
gram name would be C:\Programme\Microsoft Office
\OFFICE11\Winword.exe.
12. Under "Work directory" enter the directory in which the pro-
gram should be run
Tip
As a rule, $(D) is correct.
13. Press Create.
The program will be added to the selection field.
7.2 To execute programs
Ø .
7.3 Creating a collection call up for
several NC post-processing programs
Several single NC post-processing programs can be consecu-
tively called up in a defined sequence via the 'PostprocessorCol-
lection.bat' NC post-processing program.
Any number of 'PostprocessorCollection.bat' files can be created.
However, only one per machine can be activated as a standard.
 
2‐28 NC post-processing programs, external programs 2015-12-04 S523EN
1. Start Windows Explorer.
2. Go to the '…\TRUMPF.NET\UTILS\Macros' directory.
Notes
■ The copies must also be in the '…\TRUMPF.NET\UTILS
\Macros' directory.
■ The name of the file must not contain more than 14 char-
acters.
3. Copy and rename 'PostprocessorCollectionTemplate.bat' in
the required quantity (e.g. 'PostprocessorCollection_1.bat',
'PostprocessorCollection_2.bat').
4. Open the copy (e.g. 'PostprocessorCollection_1.bat') with an
editor (e.g. Notepad).
Note
The line notepad %A_LST_FILENAME_STRING% in the fol-
lowing example of a *.bat file must be in one line.
5. Enter the NC post-processing programs to be activated in
the desired order (see highlighting).
Example:
− Execute the NC post-processing program 'customer.pl'.
− Open NC program using an editor.
− Print the NC program using the default printer.
Corresponding entries in the *.bat file (e.g. 'Postprocessor-
Collection_1.bat'):
rem -----------------------------------------
set A_LST_FILENAME_STRING=%1
set A_TC_PERL_PATH=%2
set A_TC_TOOL_PATH=%3
rem -----------------------------------------
rem -----------------------------------------
rem Here comes the list of postprocessors
rem -----------------------------------------
%A_TC_PERL_PATH%\bin\perl
%A_TC_TOOL_PATH%\customer.pl
%A_LST_FILENAME_STRING%
notepad %A_LST_FILENAME_STRING%
notepad /p %A_LST_FILENAME_STRING%
 
S523EN 2015-12-04 NC post-processing programs, external programs 2‐29
Copying template
Modifying template
rem -----------------------------------------
set A_LST_FILENAME_STRING=
set A_TC_PERL_PATH=
set A_TC_TOOL_PATH=
rem -----------------------------------------
Tip
The NC post-processing programs entered can be deactivate
by commenting them out with "rem" at the beginning of the
line.
6. Save changes.
7. Open the Data Management of the machine for which the
NC post-processing program is to be used.
8. Select > User >Programs.
9. Enter "User", trumpf.
10. Enter "Designation", PostprocessorCollection_1 (exam-
ple!).
11. Select "NC converter", YES.
12. Select "Modal", YES.
13. Select "Window", YES.
14. Select "Show log", NO.
15. Select "export", "re-import" and "export help files", NO.
Note
The following list must be extended or shortened according
to the entered post-processing program.
16. Under "Parameters", enter
$(P) $(TOPS_PERL_PATH)$(TOPS_APP_UTILS_PATH)
eingeben.
These transfer parameters are adapted to the 'Postproces-
sorCollectionTemplate.bat' template and mean the following
in the above-mentioned example:
− $(P): Name of the generated NC program.
− $(TOPS_PERL_PATH): Path to PERL.
− $(TOPS_APP_UTILS_PATH): Path to the product-specific
tools.
17. Under "Program": enter $(TOPS_MACROS_PATH)\Postpro-
cessorCollection_1.bat.
Note
The NC post-processing program selected last is set as the
standard for the active machine. The standard holds for all
TruTops users.
 
2‐30 NC post-processing programs, external programs 2015-12-04 S523EN
Entering a collection call up
as NC post-processing
program
18. Select Create.
TruTops adds the NC post-processing program in the selec-
tion field.
Tip
7.4 To modify programs
1. Select > Extras >Modify data....
2. Select > User >Programs.
The "External Program Settings" mask is displayed.
3. Select the program.
The program data is entered in the mask header.
4. Modify parameters (see "To enter programs", pg. 2 ‐26).
5. Press Modify.
7.5 To delete programs
Note
Programms which are delivered with TruTops may not be
deleted.
1. Select > Extras >Modify data....
2. Select > User >Programs.
The "External Program Settings" mask is displayed.
3. Select the program.
The program data is entered in the mask header.
4. Press Delete.
The program will be deleted from the selection field.
 
S523EN 2015-12-04 NC post-processing programs, external programs 2‐31
Opening Management
Modify parameter
Opening Management
Delete
8. User-defined programs
Note
User-defined programs are managed centrally for all applications.
8.1 To enter programs
1. Select > Extras >Modify data....
2. Select > User >TruTops functions.
The "User-defined TruTops functions" mask is displayed.
3. Enter any name that you wish for the program under "Com-
mand name".
Note
The standard path for the user-defined programs is '…
\TRUMPF.NET\Utils\UserFunctions'.
4. Enter the path and file name of the program which was sup-
plied by TRUMPF under "Shell script".
5. Select the desired applications under "Modules with visible
command".
6. Press Create.
8.2 To change programs
1. Select > Extras >Modify data....
2. Select > User >TruTops functions.
The "User-defined TruTops functions" mask is displayed.
3. Select the program.
4. Modify data.
5. Press Modify.
8.3 To run programs
1. Leave the data management via Exit.
2. Select > File >Execute...
3. Click on a user-defined program.
The program is running.
 
2‐32 User-defined programs 2015-12-04 S523EN
Opening Management
Create a program
Opening Management
Modifying data
Chapter 3
Opening and saving files
1 Saving TruTops CAD files 3‐3
1.1 Saving drawings as a workfile 3‐3
1.2 Saving drawing as GEO 3‐4
1.3 Entering drawing data 3‐4
1.4 Saving drawings as DXF 3‐6
1.5 Saving geometry templates as VLG for single
holes, rows of holes and circles of holes
3‐7
1.6 Saving punching or bending tools as WZG 3‐8
2 Opening TruTops CAD files 3‐9
2.1 Opening workfile 3‐9
2.2 Opening TruTops files 3‐9
2.3 Opening and vectorizing image files
(optional)
3‐9
3 Opening foreign formats from CAD sys-
tems
3‐14
3.1 Loading 2D drawings in format DXF, DWG,
IGS or MI
3‐14
 
S523EN 2015-12-04 Opening and saving files 3‐1
3.2 Defining loading options for 2D drawings in
DXF/DWG format
3‐15
3.3 Defining loading options for 2D drawings in
IGS format
3‐19
3.4 Defining loading options for 2D drawings in
MI format
3‐21
4 Extracting parts and sheets from foreign
formats (assistant for layout
3‐27
4.1 Extracting parts from drawings in foreign for-
mat and saving as GEO
3‐27
4.2 Extracting parts from drawings in foreign for-
mat and saving as sheet
3‐28
4.3 Filled-in selected parts 3‐31
 
3‐2 Opening and saving files 2015-12-04 S523EN
1. Saving TruTops CAD files
When saving two-dimensional drawings, a geometry is automati-
cally prepared to avoid inaccuracies. All geometry elements are
analyzed and, if necessary, prepared:
■ The inside and outside contours are determined.
■ Lines that have been drawn twice are removed.
■ Contour transitions which have not been drawn cleanly are
cleaned.
When saving a drawing as '*.GEO' or '*.DXF', the auxiliary lines
and auxiliary circles are not saved.
Tip
To retain auxiliary lines and auxiliary circles as long as you are
working with them, save the drawing as a workfile.
When saving drawings as '*.GEO', the zero point of the drawing
is automatically set to the bottom left corner. If a contour has no
bottom left corner, the zero point is set to the bottom left corner
of a circumscribing rectangle.
Tip
To retain the zero point of a drawing as long as you are working
with it, save the drawing as a workfile .
1.1 Saving drawings as a workfile
Application: Quick intermediate save of the current status of the
following files without geometry preparation:
■ Drawings.
■ Geometry templates for single holes, rows of holes, bolt hole
circles and hole grids
■ The auxiliary lines and auxiliary circles are retained. A work-
file is always overwritten when another workfile is saved.
Directory of the workfile in TruTops CAD:
■ The directory is set in the "TOPS_PWD" variable in the pub-
lic system rules and can be changed there. (See the Tru-
Tops Laser or TruTops Punch software manuals, chapter
"Setting basic data".)
 
S523EN 2015-12-04 Saving TruTops CAD files 3‐3
Geometry preparation when
saving
Auxiliary lines are not saved
Zero point
Condition
■ The drawing is open.
Ø Select >File >Save workfile.
The workfile is saved as 'Workfile_CAD.geo'.
The Windows user name and the computer name are added to
the name of the workfile.
Example: '…\TRUMPF.NET\Workfiles\workfile_CAD_muel-
lerhe_PC012345.geo'
(muellerhe = Windows user name, PC012345 = computer name.)
1.2 Saving drawing as GEO
Condition
■ The drawing is open.
1. Enter the drawing data if required.
2. Either
Ø Select >File >Save.
Ø The drawing is saved with the unchanged name in the
unchanged directory.
or
Ø Select >File >Save as....
Ø Change the directory in the TruTops file browser if
required.
Ø Select *.GEO as "file type".
Ø Enter the file name (without file extension).
Ø Press OK.
The drawing is saved under the new name in the (if
required) new directory.
1.3 Entering drawing data
Drawing data means additional information that TruTops
accesses, e.g. when machining a part.
The drawing data is a part of the file properties (see "File Prop-
erties", pg. 1 ‐39).
 
3‐4 Saving TruTops CAD files 2015-12-04 S523EN
Condition
■ The drawing is open.
1. Select > File> >Properties ....
The "File information" mask is displayed.
2. Enter the desired information:
− Open the list fields with ▼.
− Mark the selection or enter the data manually.
Tips
■ To display the "File information" mask automatically the
next time a new geometry is saved: select "Request
properties during saving",
■ With Values last used , the mask can be filled with the
values used last at the press of a button. Only individual
data must be modified then.
3. Select "General settings".
Note
Under "Quantity", a minimum and maximum quantity can be
defined for a part. This data is then used accordingly in the
nester.
4. If necessary, switch to "TwinLine/Options" and select the
desired options:
− If a part is suitable for common cuts (TwinLine): select
"Suitable for TwinLine". Enter the number of parts in X or
Y direction which are to form a TwinLine group.
− To define a part as sample part: select "Sample part" and
enter the number (for description of "Sample parts", see
the software manuals of TruTops Laser or TruTops
Punch, chapter "Nesting parts").
− To divide sheets in grids in TruTops Laser/Punch and to
place the part in the appropriate grid: select Displace
"part in grid".
With "Part in grid", the sheets are separated into grids
(depending on the size and the shape of the part) and
the parts are regularly transferred in it. In case of differ-
ent parts, various grid divisions can appear within a
sheet.
"Part in grid" is suitable for L-shaped, rectangular and C-/
V-shaped parts. Parts with circular outer contour are
unsuitable". "Part in grid" can improve the material utiliza-
tion and generate more homogeneous nesting patterns.
 
S523EN 2015-12-04 Saving TruTops CAD files 3‐5
A Parts displaced in grid B Parts not displaced in grid
Displacing parts in grid - example Fig. 43220
5. Switch to "Technology" as required.
Note
Only enter the rules number if the part is to be machined
according to very specific rules (e.g. if you have created
rules specifically for this purpose).
6. To save the drawing data immediately: select Save as….
Note
If the drawing is to be saved only later, the drawing data is
also saved along with it.
7. Close the "File information" mask with OK.
1.4 Saving drawings as DXF
Condition
■ The drawing is open.
1. Select > File >Save as....
2. Change the directory in the TruTops file browser if required.
3. Select *.DXF as "file type".
4. Enter the file name (without file extension).
5. Press OK.
 
3‐6 Saving TruTops CAD files 2015-12-04 S523EN
1.5 Saving geometry templates as VLG
for single holes, rows of holes and
circles of holes
Condition
■ A geometry template has been drawn using the drawing
functions in TruTops
or
■ A geometry template from a CAD system has been read in.
1. Enter the drawing data if required.
2. Select > File >Save.
or
Ø Select >File >Save as....
The file browser opens.
3. Select *.VLG as "file type".
4. Enter the file name.
5. Press OK.
A query is displayed, whether a new center (with respect to
the zero point) should be defined.
6. If a new center is to be defined: confirm the query with Yes.
7. Enter the X and Y coordinates of the point which is to be the
new zero point (example below: 30, 20).
or
Ø Click on the point which is to be the new zero point
(example below: click on M).
The zero point is redefined.
0 Old zero point
M1 Center of one's own geome-
try template
M2 Center and new zero point of
one's own geometry template
Left: before moving; right: after moving Fig. 26986
8. To save the new zero point: select > File >Save.
 
S523EN 2015-12-04 Saving TruTops CAD files 3‐7
Entering the file name
Define a new zero point?
9. Confirm the query as to whether the existing data should be
overwritten.
10. Do not confirm the query as to whether a new center should
be defined (select No.)
1.6 Saving punching or bending tools as
WZG
Condition
■ A punching tool has been drawn using the drawing functions
in TruTops. (For importing punching tool data, see software
manual of TruTops Punch.)
or
■ A bending tool has been created using the bending tool
assistant in TruTops(see "Drawing bending tool", pg. 6 ‐7).
1. Enter the drawing data if required.
2. Select > File >Save as....
The file browser opens.
3. Select *.WZG as "file type".
Note
Tool drawings are automatically saved in the '…
\TRUMPF.NET\Data\PunchTools' (punching tools) or '…
\TRUMPF.NET\Data\BendTools' (bending tools) directory. The
directory cannot be changed.
4. Enter the file name (without file extension).
5. Press OK.
The "Save tool" mask is displayed.
6. Select "Punching tool" and options for the punching tool.
or
Ø Select "Bending tool" and options for the bending tool.
7. Press OK.
The drawings are saved as tools in the *.WZG format.
 
3‐8 Saving TruTops CAD files 2015-12-04 S523EN
2. Opening TruTops CAD files
2.1 Opening workfile
Condition
■ A workfile has been saved.
Ø Select >File >Open workfile.
2.2 Opening TruTops files
1. Select > File >Open.
The file browser opens.
2. Select the file type:
− 2D drawings of parts: *.GEO.
− Geometries with variants: < *.GMV.
− Geometry templates: *.VLG.
− Tools from TruTops Punch or TruTops Bend: *.WZG.
The file browser displays all files of the selected format
which are located in the current directory.
3. Search for the file if necessary.
4. Mark the desired file.
5. Press OK.
2.3 Opening and vectorizing image files
(optional)
Image files of types BMP, JPG, PNG, GIF, TIF or PDF can be
opened, vectorized, and saved as *.GEO files. The purpose of
vectorization is to convert a raster image into a vector image
which can then be used for calculations (it contains closed con-
tours and no contour lines which are not for production) or which
is production-ready (can be used for calculations and contains
suitable geometric elements).
The better the used drawing is, the better the vectorization proc-
ess works. The following points should be observed:
 
S523EN 2015-12-04 Opening TruTops CAD files 3‐9
Drawing Remark
Black/white Best results.
When scanning drawings, make sure that the
"Black/white" function is used.
Grayscale Good results.
When scanning drawings, make sure that the
"Grayscale" function is used.
colored Poor results.
Grid background Poor results.
The results may be able to be improved by
adjusting the threshold value.
Tab. 3-1
Tips
Contour types The GEO format recognizes only three types of
segments: line, circle, and contour segment. If a
circle is not recognized as such and a line
string of contour segments is generated instead,
the production of the part will be more complex
as a result (e.g. multiple strokes and possibly
multiple tools in the case of punching
machines). It may therefore be advisable to
replace these "line string circles" with geometric
circles.
Drawings with reflec-
tive gloss
Using photographs as the drawing often results
in unsightly reflective gloss which may be rec-
ognized as a contour in the vector image. In
such cases, the functions "Generate black/white
picture" (adjust threshold) and "Edit black/white
picture" (strengthen or weaken contour) can
help.
Technical drawings Vectorizing dimension lines and units of meas-
urement regularly causes problems. The dimen-
sion lines need to be separated from the work-
piece and excluded from vectorization using the
threshold. Or you can remove the dimensions
and units from the drawing.
Any contours still
open?
The steps described might not always result in
success. In such cases, you need to adjust the
drawing manually via "Start drawing program".
Overlaps and unnec-
essary lines
Superfluous lines and filled-in corners are often
a problem for vectorization. It is advisable to
remove these parts manually.
Work step-by-step Whenever possible, one work step (e.g. gener-
ating the black/white image) should be com-
pleted before starting the next step. This
ensures that the results of work steps are never
lost.
Tab. 3-2
1. Select > File, >Open bit map.. .
The file browser opens.
2. Select "file type".
 
3‐10 Opening TruTops CAD files 2015-12-04 S523EN
Vectorizing an image
3. Select the desired file.
4. Press OK.
The "Grid loading options" mask is opened
Note
The vectorization process must be initiated manually each
time the parameters have been changed.
5. Process drawing.
or
Ø Select the desired vectorization parameter.
Button Options Remark
Edit drawing
Start drawing program The raster image can be opened and edited in
an external drawing program. This is helpful in
allowing you to close contours manually and to
remove superfluous elements.
This function must only be used if the automatic
vectorization process is unsuccessful. The result-
ing drawing is added to the vectorization
sequence again.
Select drawing pro-
gram
Use this button to select the drawing program to
be used.
Generate black/white picture
Generate black/white
picture with threshold
value
This function defines the minimum level of
brightness required for a line or surface to be
included in the image. Everything below the
threshold value will be suppressed and will have
no effect during vectorization.
This is useful with smudged hand drawings, for
example, or when scanning has produced dark-
ened areas.
Checking the box for the "Contour "option allows
the threshold to be adjusted for unevenly filled-in
areas so that they form a single contour.
Edit black/white picture
Thickening Lines are thickened.
Thinner Lines are drawn thinner.
Invert Black and white areas in the picture are
exchanged.
This function helps to remove shading in the ras-
ter image.
Select region Selection of a rectangular section of the raster
image.
Set vectorization parameters
 
S523EN 2015-12-04 Opening TruTops CAD files 3‐11
Button Options Remark
Connection distance Open contours are connected if their end points
are within the value set here.
It is recommended to select a small value first
and only increase it if necessary.
Filter length Superfluous detached contours that are less
than the filter length are deleted during vectori-
zation.
It is recommended to select a small value first
and only increase it if necessary.
Accuracy This function controls the maximum deviation of
the generated contour from the raster image.
High accuracy means that the generated contour
will have more anchor points.
Center line Line drawing
In a line drawing, the center line is used as a
contour.
Contour Drawing with filled-in areas
Here the edge of the filled-in areas is used as a
contour
Set dimensions
Width/height These define the dimensions of the bounding
rectangle of the resultant geometry.
Retain ratio The ratio is maintained when alterations are
made to the width or height.
Toolbar
Refresh view This button is active only when vectorization
parameters have been changed. When the but-
ton is pressed, the drawing is revectorized using
the set parameters.
Show all points Shows all points on the segment boundaries of
the contours. In this way you can find out
whether a circle was recognized as such or
instead consists of many separate partial circles.
Show raster image Hide the display of the raster image so that the
vector image can be seen more easily.
Show vector image Hide the display of the vector image so that the
raster image can be seen more easily.
Tab. 3-3
6. Press OK.
The drawing opens.
Note
Depending on the function selected, either the imported
drawing only will be displayed, or the resultant geometry, or
both together. The legend provides a key to the meanings of
the symbols and colors.
7. Click on the drawing surface.
 
3‐12 Opening TruTops CAD files 2015-12-04 S523EN
Show legend
8. Press Shift and F1.
The legend is displayed.
9. Press OK.
Vectorization is concluded and the geometry is accepted.
 
S523EN 2015-12-04 Opening TruTops CAD files 3‐13
Finishing vectorization
3. Opening foreign formats from CAD
systems
Files can be loaded in the following formats:
External format Supported by Tru-
Tops CAD 10.0
DWG (= file format from the AutoCAD CAD sys-
tem).
DWG 2013
DXF (= a file format from CAD systems, e.g.
AUTOCAD)
ASCII-DXF (all ver-
sions)
MI (= file format from the ME10 CAD system) ASCII and binary for-
mat up to version 2.5
Optionally available: *.IGS (= file format of vari-
ous CAD systems).
ASCII
External formats Tab. 3-4
All drawings loaded from external systems can be further proc-
essed with the drawing functions of TruTops CAD.
3.1 Loading 2D drawings in format DXF,
DWG, IGS or MI
Conditions
■ TruTops CAD can read in only 2D data with standardized Z
coordinates. 3D drawings must be projected onto a plane
and saved as 2D drawings.
■ '*.IGS': The IGES standard stipulates a fixed format of 80
characters per line. Only drawings which comply with this
standard can be read in.
■ '*.MI': TruTops CAD can read only the uncompressed '*.MI'
format as a 2D drawing or as a processing for a tube.
■ '*.DXF': When loading DXF files, specific unknown colors can
be changed via the rules entry DxfReplaceColor, e.g. to a
fixed color or to an automatically selected color.
■ The drawing may only contain machinable contours, in other
words no drawing frames and headers and no auxiliary geo-
metries.
■ Bending lines are interpreted only in TruTops Bend. Other-
wise, they are skipped.
■ Only geometry elements recognized by TruTops CAD may be
transferred.
1. Select > File >Open.
The file browser opens.
2. Open the desired folder and select the file type.
 
3‐14 Opening foreign formats from CAD systems 2015-12-04 S523EN
Note
If the '*.MI' format is selected, the TruTops file browser dis-
plays all files that are located in the current directory and are
not TruTops-specific (with and without file extension).
3. Mark the file and select OK.
The "... loading options" screen for the selected file format will
be displayed.
3.2 Defining loading options for 2D
drawings in DXF/DWG format
Notes
■ Mutually exclusive loading options are grayed out accord-
ingly.
■ Invisible elements in the DXF files will not be loaded. If these
have to be loaded, the entry DxfIgnoreInvisibleElements in
the system rules has to be set to 0.
Parameters Description
"Transfer only specific layers" By reading in particular layers it is possible to read in geometries of a
layer specifically or leave them out specifically. As a result,
time-consuming post-machining procedures (e. g. deleting dimensions) are
no longer required.
"Adopt inactive layers" Individual layers can be "deactivated" in AutoCad. They are then no longer
displayed.
The inactive layers can be loaded in TruTops.
"Contour preparation" A tolerance can be entered for the drawing's contour preparation. Points
which are not separated by the defined tolerance are merged into one
point.
Automatic preparation The automatic preparation attempts to recognize collision contours such as
drawing frames, dimensionings, approach flags etc. The recognized part
becomes white in color, and all other parts become blue. Advantage: The
geometry offset can be easily removed via > Edit, > Delete, > Selection,
"Blue".
"Smooth drawing" During smoothing, TruTops replaces an existing contour (or contour sec-
tion) with a new contour (or contour section).
The aim is to reduce the number of single elements of a contour as far as
possible without deviating too far from the original contour.
"Transfer block section" All geometry elements which were defined as a block in '.DXF' or '.DWG'
format while creating a drawing are adopted.
"Adopt only single block" This option can be used to adopt a single block with geometry elements in
TruTops and to ignore the remaining drawing. The block can be modified
using the drawing functions in TruTops CAD and saved as a geometry
template (*.).
Geometry templates can be positioned in a drawing as often as desired
through > Create >Macros (e.g. as hole grids).
 
S523EN 2015-12-04 Opening foreign formats from CAD systems 3‐15
Parameters Description
Adopt only single layout Single layouts (different views/cutouts of the model) can be stored in DXF
and DWG files. These can be loaded individually in TruTops CAD.
"Transfer texts" Defines whether the texts of the drawing should be transferred and which
TruTops font should be used for this.
"B-splines" A "B-spline" is a mathematical description of a curve. With this form of
description, the curve is defined by a series of points and further parame-
ters.
If a file contains B-splines, they can be converted into the TruTops ele-
ments "lines" and "arcs".
Loading options for .DXF - description of parameters Tab. 3-5
1. Check "Transfer only specific layers".
The "Existing layers" list field is displayed.
2. Mark the layer to be adopted.
The layer is added to the "Layers for transfer" list field.
3. To remove an adopted layer again: execute the procedure in
reverse order.
4. Check the box for "Display deactivated".
5. Select "Adopt inactive layers".
6. Select "Contour preparation".
7. Enter the tolerance.
Points which are not separated by the defined tolerance are
merged into one point.
Note
The preparation is now visible in the preview.
8. To prepare the DXF/DWG file automatically, select the "Pre-
pare""automatic" checkbox.
The collision contours are displayed in blue.
Note
If contours have to be smoothed individually (with different
parameters or several times if required), you can also
smoothen them "manually" after loading .
9. Select "Smooth drawing".
The "Smooth parameter" mask is displayed.
10. Either
Ø Select the preset "coarse", "medium" or "fine-pitch" reso-
lution (the respective data is displayed at the bottom).
or
Ø Select "user-defined".
Ø Enter the desired data.
 
3‐16 Opening foreign formats from CAD systems 2015-12-04 S523EN
Read in only particular
layers?
Load deactivated layers?
Adopt inactive layers?
Prepare contours?
Automatic preparation?
Smooth drawing?
The coarser the resolution, the fewer elements are required.
The new contour section deviates further away from the orig-
inal contour.
The finer the resolution, the more elements needed. The new
contour section is the closest to the original contour.
11. Press OK.
12. Select "Transfer block section".
13. Select "Adopt only single block".
The block can be modified using the drawing functions in
TruTops CAD and saved as a geometry template (*.). Geom-
etry templates can be positioned in a drawing as often as
desired through > Create >Macros (e.g. as hole grids).
14. Select "Adopt only single layout".
A list of the available layouts is opened.
If there are no layouts in the selected file, a message
appears.
15. Select "Transfer texts".
16. Open the list field of text fonts with ▼.
The file browser opens. It displays all available fonts.
By default, the fonts can be found in the '...\TRUMPF.NET
\Data' directory. The directory cannot be changed.
17. Mark the font to be adopted.
18. Press OK.
19. Select "B-Splines".
20. Open the list with ▼.
21. To convert B-splines into a contour: Mark: Interpolate.
22. Enter the distance (1) and the minimum length (2).
TruTops CAD converts the curve into a contour during the
interpolation:
1 Distance 2 Minimum length
Interpolation of B-splines Fig. 25996
The "Distance" corresponds to the increment along the
curve. The smaller this value is, the more exactly the interpo-
lation will match the curve. A disadvantage is that the num-
ber of lines generated is increased.
 
S523EN 2015-12-04 Opening foreign formats from CAD systems 3‐17
Read in block section?
Adopt only single block?
Adopt only single layout?
Transfer texts?
Defining options for B-
splines
"Minimum length": "Each line must be longer than the value
entered in "Min. length". The B-spline is not converted if the
total length of the B-spline is shorter than the value entered
in "Min. length".
23. To convert B-splines into a contour consisting of lines and
arcs, mark Approximate.
24. Enter the distance (1) and the minimum length (2).
TruTops CAD converts the curve into a contour of lines and
arcs during the approximation:
1 Distance 2 Minimum length
Approximation of B-splines Fig. 25997
This parameter defines the maximum distance from the lines
and arcs to the curve. The curve is divided until the distance
between the approximated continuous line and the curve is
less than the specified value.
"Minimum length":"Each line must be longer than the value
entered in "Min. length". The B-spline is not converted if the
total length of the B-spline is shorter than the value entered
in "Min. length".
25. To display the control polygon of the B-splines, mark Control
polygon.
The control polygon joins the control points of B-splines with
a contour, thereby indicating the approximate course of the
curve. The control polygon can be used to estimate the posi-
tion of the B-splines.
Application example: A B-spline is too short and therefore
cannot be converted. The control polygon can be used to
estimate the point where the too-short B-spline lay.
26. Select Show selection.
27. Press OK.
Report that errors have occurred?
Ø To load the file in spite of errors, press Press OK.
Ø . To display a list of the errors that have occurred, select
Check. The error list specifies the line to which the error
is assigned. There are errors that are assigned to only
one line; other errors are assigned to a range in the file.
If the name of the range is available, it is specified.
Splines which have not been loaded are also included in
the error list.
Ø If you do not wish to load the file, select Cancel.
 
3‐18 Opening foreign formats from CAD systems 2015-12-04 S523EN
Display control polygon?
Display file preview?
Once the loading options
are defined
If there are no errors, the 2D drawing is loaded in the '.DXF' or
'.DWG' format.
3.3 Defining loading options for 2D
drawings in IGS format
Parameters Description
"Contour preparation" A tolerance can be entered for the drawing's contour preparation. Points
which are not separated by the defined tolerance are merged into one
point.
"Smooth drawing" During smoothing, TruTops replaces an existing contour (or contour sec-
tion) with a new contour (or contour section).
The aim is to reduce the number of single elements of a contour as far as
possible without deviating too far from the original contour.
"B-splines" A "B-spline" is a mathematical description of a curve. With this form of
description, the curve is defined by a series of points and further parame-
ters.
If a file contains B-splines, they can be converted into the TruTops ele-
ments "lines" and "arcs".
Loading options for .IGS - description of parameters Tab. 3-6
Only activate this option if the DXF file to be loaded is (very)
complex and contains "unnecessary things" such as drawing
frames etc., which can easily be deleted if this option is acti-
vated. If the drawing is largely OK, the activation of this option
can have negative side effects (e.g. yellow lines become white
lines etc.).
1. Select "Contour preparation".
2. Enter the tolerance.
Points which are not separated by the defined tolerance are
merged into one point.
Note
If contours have to be smoothed individually (with different
parameters or several times if required), you can also
smoothen them "manually" after loading .
3. Select "Smooth drawing".
The "Smooth parameter" mask is displayed.
4. Either
Ø Select the preset "coarse", "medium" or "fine-pitch" reso-
lution (the respective data is displayed at the bottom).
or
Ø Select "user-defined".
 
S523EN 2015-12-04 Opening foreign formats from CAD systems 3‐19
Prepare contours?
Smooth drawing?
Ø Enter the desired data.
The coarser the resolution, the fewer elements are required.
The new contour section deviates further away from the orig-
inal contour.
The finer the resolution, the more elements needed. The new
contour section is the closest to the original contour.
5. Press OK.
6. Select "B-Splines".
7. Open the list with ▼.
8. To convert B-splines into a contour: Mark: Interpolate.
9. Enter the distance (1) and the minimum length (2).
TruTops CAD converts the curve into a contour during the
interpolation:
1 Distance 2 Minimum length
Interpolation of B-splines Fig. 25996
The "Distance" corresponds to the increment along the
curve. The smaller this value is, the more exactly the interpo-
lation will match the curve. A disadvantage is that the num-
ber of lines generated is increased.
"Minimum length": "Each line must be longer than the value
entered in "Min. length". The B-spline is not converted if the
total length of the B-spline is shorter than the value entered
in "Min. length".
10. To convert B-splines into a contour consisting of lines and
arcs, mark Approximate.
11. Enter the distance (1) and the minimum length (2).
TruTops CAD converts the curve into a contour of lines and
arcs during the approximation:
1 Distance 2 Minimum length
Approximation of B-splines Fig. 25997
 
3‐20 Opening foreign formats from CAD systems 2015-12-04 S523EN
Defining options for B-
splines
This parameter defines the maximum distance from the lines
and arcs to the curve. The curve is divided until the distance
between the approximated continuous line and the curve is
less than the specified value.
"Minimum length":"Each line must be longer than the value
entered in "Min. length". The B-spline is not converted if the
total length of the B-spline is shorter than the value entered
in "Min. length".
12. Select Show selection.
13. Press OK.
The 2D drawing is loaded in the '.IGS' format.
3.4 Defining loading options for 2D
drawings in MI format
Parameters Description
"Transfer only certain parts." By reading in particular parts of a drawing it is possible to read in geome-
tries specifically or leave them out specifically. As a result, time-consuming
post-machining procedures (e. g. deleting dimensions) are no longer
required.
"Contour preparation" A tolerance can be entered for the drawing's contour preparation. Points
which are not separated by the defined tolerance are merged into one
point.
"Smooth drawing" During smoothing, TruTops replaces an existing contour (or contour sec-
tion) with a new contour (or contour section).
The aim is to reduce the number of single elements of a contour as far as
possible without deviating too far from the original contour.
"B-splines" A "B-spline" is a mathematical description of a curve. With this form of
description, the curve is defined by a series of points and further parame-
ters.
If a file contains B-splines, they can be converted into the TruTops ele-
ments "lines" and "arcs".
"Transfer detail drawings" In the ME 10 program, it is possible to create detail drawings of a part.
These detail drawings are given part names which begin with a point.
Detail drawings of such parts are normally not loaded by TruTops CAD.
 
S523EN 2015-12-04 Opening foreign formats from CAD systems 3‐21
Display file preview?
Parameters Description
"Generate stroke characteristics" Single holes with tool information ("stroke characteristics") can be defined
and saved in the MI file in Solid Designer/Sheet Advisor. (Tapping tools
are still not supported.)
If the stroke characteristics are adopted, the single holes from Solid
Designer have the property "Characteristic" (see "Characteristics: a prop-
erty of elements and contours", pg. 1 ‐49). TruTops Punch compares tool
ID with tool ID and executes the single stroke with the desired tool (pre-
requisite: the names of the tools must be identical in Solid Designer and
TruTops Punch). If TruTops Punch does not find a matching tool, the sin-
gle hole is not processed.
If the stroke characteristics are not adopted, TruTops compares the geo-
metries and allocates appropriate tools (TruTops Punch) or machines the
geometry with the laser (TruTops Laser, TruTops Tube). The tool ID is dis-
played at each single hole (as text; not machined).
Tool information is stored differently in an MI file than in TruTops Punch:
 ■ MI file: The dimensions e.g. of a rectangular tool are described by the
":HORIZ" value for the horizontal dimension and the ":VERT" value for
the vertical dimension. The name of a rectangular tool is "RECT".
 ■ TruTops Punch: Via Macros, Parameters, "Tools", tools are defined by
tool type and the dimensions "Dimension 1", "Dimension 2", "Dimen-
sion 3 …".
"Translation" rules must therefore be defined for each tool type of a MI file
for automatic conversions. These tool-specific rules can be saved and
applied to each MI file to be loaded.
TruTops has a pre-defined set of rules for standard tools, which are
adapted to the automatic transfer of TruTops tools in the Solid Designer.
Loading options for .MI - description of parameters Tab. 3-7
1. Select "Only transfer specific parts".
2. Mark the desired part (to display a preview of the part: right
click).
3. Use the arrow to add the marked part to "Parts for transfer".
4. Select "Contour preparation".
5. Enter the tolerance.
Points which are not separated by the defined tolerance are
merged into one point.
Note
If contours have to be smoothed individually (with different
parameters or several times if required), you can also
smoothen them "manually" after loading .
6. Select "Smooth drawing".
The "Smooth parameter" mask is displayed.
7. Either
Ø Select the preset "coarse", "medium" or "fine-pitch" reso-
lution (the respective data is displayed at the bottom).
or
Ø Select "user-defined".
 
3‐22 Opening foreign formats from CAD systems 2015-12-04 S523EN
Only load searched parts of
the file?
Prepare contours?
Smooth drawing?
Ø Enter the desired data.
The coarser the resolution, the fewer elements are required.
The new contour section deviates further away from the orig-
inal contour.
The finer the resolution, the more elements needed. The new
contour section is the closest to the original contour.
8. Press OK.
9. Select "Transfer texts".
10. Open the list field of text fonts with ▼.
The file browser opens. It displays all available fonts.
By default, the fonts can be found in the '...\TRUMPF.NET
\Data' directory. The directory cannot be changed.
11. Mark the font to be adopted.
12. Press OK.
13. Select "B-Splines".
14. Open the list with ▼.
15. To convert B-splines into a contour: Mark: Interpolate.
16. Enter the distance (1) and the minimum length (2).
TruTops CAD converts the curve into a contour during the
interpolation:
1 Distance 2 Minimum length
Interpolation of B-splines Fig. 25996
The "Distance" corresponds to the increment along the
curve. The smaller this value is, the more exactly the interpo-
lation will match the curve. A disadvantage is that the num-
ber of lines generated is increased.
"Minimum length": "Each line must be longer than the value
entered in "Min. length". The B-spline is not converted if the
total length of the B-spline is shorter than the value entered
in "Min. length".
17. To convert B-splines into a contour consisting of lines and
arcs, mark Approximate.
18. Enter the distance (1) and the minimum length (2).
TruTops CAD converts the curve into a contour of lines and
arcs during the approximation:
 
S523EN 2015-12-04 Opening foreign formats from CAD systems 3‐23
Transfer texts?
Defining options for B-
splines
1 Distance 2 Minimum length
Approximation of B-splines Fig. 25997
This parameter defines the maximum distance from the lines
and arcs to the curve. The curve is divided until the distance
between the approximated continuous line and the curve is
less than the specified value.
"Minimum length":"Each line must be longer than the value
entered in "Min. length". The B-spline is not converted if the
total length of the B-spline is shorter than the value entered
in "Min. length".
19. Select "Transfer detail drawings".
20. To transfer the stroke characteristics from Solid Designer,
select "Generate stroke characteristics".
21. Select Options.
The "Rule overview" mask is displayed:
Fig. 43564en
"Shop name": Name of the database which is the source of
the information. Normally (if the TruTops database is cali-
brated automatically) "Trumpf" is entered here.
"Table": Tool type from the Solid Designer. Corresponds more
or less to the tool types in TruTops (e.g. "rnd" for a round
tool). There is no direct allocation. The special tools from
TruTops are thus distributed among various tables in the
Solid Designer.
"Tool type": Tool type from TruTops.
22. Select tool-specific rules to be displayed in the mask:
 
3‐24 Opening foreign formats from CAD systems 2015-12-04 S523EN
Transfer detail drawings?
Adopting stroke
characteristics from Solid
Designer?
− To display all rules ever defined (even if the respective
tool does not exist in the current MI file), select "All
rules".
− To display only those rules required for the current MI
file, select "Rules of current file".
− To display all not yet defined rules generated automati-
cally by TruTops when it did not find a matching rule for
a tool type: select "Undefined rules".
23. To modify a tool-specific rule: mark the rule and select Mod-
ify.
The "Tool parameters" mask is displayed.
Fig. 43565en
24. Either
Ø To hide the tool information from Solid Designer: select
"Ignore single stroke" (all the following selection fields are
grayed out).
or
Ø Open "Tool type" using ▼ and mark the tool type.
Ø Open the list fields next to the tool dimensions used by
TruTops (Dim. 1, Dim. 2…) with ▼ and assign them the
dimension name from Solid Designer.
25. Confirm the changes with OK.
26. To delete a tool-specific rule, mark the rule and select
Delete.
If rules are changed, you are asked whether the changes are
to be saved after loading the 2D drawing in '.MI' format.
The changed rules apply to all following loading procedures
concerning MI files if the question is answered in the affirma-
tive.
The changed rules apply to the current file and are subse-
quently discarded if the question is not answered in the affir-
mative.
 
S523EN 2015-12-04 Opening foreign formats from CAD systems 3‐25
All changes to the rules are discarded if the procedure is
aborted.
The preceding zeros of the tool ID are not passed on by the
Solid Designer/Sheet Advisor. To avoid error messages in the
technology of TruTops Punch module, the preceding zeroes
of the concerned tools in TruTops Punch must be deleted
(technology module, > Tools menu, "Tools" mask).
27. Select Show selection.
28. Press OK.
The 2D drawing is loaded in the '.MI' format.
 
3‐26 Opening foreign formats from CAD systems 2015-12-04 S523EN
Displaying the MI file
preview
Once the loading options
are defined
4. Extracting parts and sheets from
foreign formats (assistant for layout
4.1 Extracting parts from drawings in
foreign format and saving as GEO
The assistant for the layout can be used to extract single parts
from drawings in foreign format one after the other and to save
them as *.GEO. The process can be repeated till all parts are
extracted from a drawing.
If all parts  from a drawing are to be saved as *.GEOs: select
>Assistants >Layout >Extract sheet  >Sheet all  (see the next sec-
tion).
If the sheet layout is not relevant, the option for saving the sheet
file (*.TAF) can be deselected here.
Note
Single parts can be saved one after the other without having
to reselect the function (> Assistants >Layout >Extract parts
>Part element).
The process is ended with Cancel or by selecting a new
function.
1. Load drawing in foreign format.
2. If required, select > Assistants >Layout >Find equals.
(If a saved part is present in the drawing several times, the
copies too are found in the same manner).
3. To mark single elements  that should belong to one *.GEO:
select >Assistants >Layout >Extract part  >Part element.
(>Part element  is useful only if the parts in the drawing are
not nested very close to one another.)
or
Ø To save full parts  as *.GEO (including all the inside con-
tours, texts or points contained in it): select > Assistants
>Layout >Extract part  >Part contour.
(>Part contour  is useful only if the outer contour of the
part is correctly drawn and has no gaps, for example.)
4. For > Part element: click all elements that should belong to
*.GEO one after the other, and press the <Ctrl> key at the
same time.
or
Ø For >Part contour: click on the outer contour  of the part
that is to be saved as *.GEO.
(Clicking several times while holding the <Ctrl> key makes it
possible to deselect selected elements; see the section on
multiple selections.)
 
S523EN 2015-12-04 Extracting parts and sheets from foreign formats
(assistant for layout
3‐27
Extracting selected
elements/entire parts
Note
If the <Ctrl> key is not pressed, only one element can be
selected. The assistant proceeds immediately with this selec-
tion.
5. After the selection is completed: Press <Enter> or <Return>
(↲).
or
Ø Press OK.
The file browser opens.
6. Enter the file name for the new *.GEO.
The first time elements of a drawing are saved, the path
from which the drawing was opened and the file type (*.geo)
are present. In addition, the previous name with the exten-
sion _1 is shown as file name. Example: 'J:\teile\test_1.geo'
when 'J:\teile\test.dxf' was loaded. The index increases by
one at each additional save (via > Save >Selection or > Assis-
tants >Layout).
7. Press OK.
The *.GEO is saved.
The saved part obtains a characteristic that groups the ele-
ments of the part in the drawing into one unit (see "Charac-
teristics: a property of elements and contours", pg. 1 ‐49). In
the "fixed" characteristic setting, certain actions are therefore
either applied to the entire unit, (i.e. on all elements) or the
actions are declined.
If Highlight characteristics  is active, the saved parts with a
characteristic are highlighted with a color in the loaded draw-
ing.
If >Find equals  is activated, copies of the part are searched
for (independent of the position and turning position) and
highlighted with a color as well.
8. Select > Assistants >Layout >Show part names .
9. Click on the part whose file name and storage location is to
be shown.
The storage location and the file name are shown.
4.2 Extracting parts from drawings in
foreign format and saving as sheet
The assistant for the layout can be used to extract selected
parts from drawings in foreign format and to save them in a
*.TAF (in other words, with sheet data included). The sheets
 
3‐28 Extracting parts and sheets from foreign formats
(assistant for layout
2015-12-04 S523EN
Showing storage location
and part names
saved in this way can be loaded and edited in "Nest", "Laser"
und "Punch".
1. Load drawing in foreign format.
2. If required, select > Assistants >Layout >Find equals.
(If >Find equals  is activated, all the copies of a part obtain
the same name during automatic saving. If > Find equals  is
not activated, each copy obtains a different name.)
3. To save a defined area  of the loaded drawing with all the
parts contained in it  as sheet geometry (*.TAF) and the
parts as *.GEO: select > Assistants >Layout >Extract sheet
>Sheet box. (The rectangle set up using the mouse leads to
the sheet geometry.)
or
Ø To save all parts within a contour  on the loaded draw-
ing as *.GEO and to adopt the contour (or its circum-
scribing rectangle) as sheet geometry: select > Assistants
>Layout >Extract sheet  >Sheet contour.
or
Ø To save all parts of the loaded drawing  as *.GEO and
to adopt the circumscribing rectangle of the drawing as
sheet geometry: select > Assistants >Layout >Extract
sheet >Sheet all.
The "Extract sheet with parts" mask is displayed.
Extracting sheet with parts Fig. 41322en
4. Either
Ø To manually save each single part after the definition of
the sheet through > File >Save as: select "Parts""Save
manually".
or
Ø To give the individual parts a single defined name with a
consecutive number (e.g. hugo_01.geo, hugo_02.geo...):
open the "Path" selection field with ▼.
 
S523EN 2015-12-04 Extracting parts and sheets from foreign formats
(assistant for layout
3‐29
Showing layout assistant
Defining part data
Ø In the TruTops file browser, select the folder in which the
parts located on the sheet are to be saved.
Ø Press OK.
Ø Enter the "name" for the parts found (for example: hugo).
Ø If the *.GEOs are already present and are to be overwrit-
ten: select "Overwrite existing files".
5. To save the sheet as '*.TAF': select "Sheet""Generate
sheet file".
(If all parts from a drawing are to be saved as *.GEOs as
quickly as possible and the sheet layout is not relevant:
deselect "Generate sheet file".)
6. Open the "Name" selection field with ▼.
The file browser opens.
7. Enter the name under which the extracted sheet (*.TAF) is to
be saved.
8. Press OK.
9. Select material (the material thickness is automatically
entered).
10. If the part and sheet data is specified: Press OK.
The circumscribing rectangle of the drawing is saved as
sheet geometry in case of the "Sheet all" area of application.
Outer contours are presented in cyan.
Is the sheet contour considered to be the outer contour
of the part and all outer contours of the parts are con-
sidered to be inside contours of the "sheet part" by mis-
take?
Ø Select >Assistants >Layout >Reduce.
Ø TruTops changes the next inner contours to outer con-
tours.
Ø Repeat the reduce process if necessary.
Ø When the selection of outer contours is correct: select
OK.
11. Set up the desired area using the mouse on the loaded
drawing.
or
Ø Click on the contour (= contour that should become the
sheet geometry).
Outer contours are presented in cyan.
Note
You can select or deselect parts by clicking several times or
by boxing them in.
12. If the selection of the area/of the outer contours is complete:
select OK.
 
3‐30 Extracting parts and sheets from foreign formats
(assistant for layout
2015-12-04 S523EN
Defining sheet data
Select area or mark
contour?
13. If "Part""Save manually" has been activated and the marked
part is to be saved manually: select > File >Save as.
or
Ø If the marked part is to be skipped (i.e.) not to be saved:
select >Assistants >Layout >Next part.
14. Repeat manual saving/skipping until all parts have been
either saved or skipped.
15. To enlarge the view on the selected sheet or (when saving
parts manually) on the part to be saved: select > Assistants
>Layout >Zoom.
The area is displayed in enlarged form.
16. Select >Assistants >Layout >Show part names .
17. Mark the part whose file name and storage location is to be
shown.
The storage location and the file name are shown.
4.3 Filled-in selected parts
If several parts are selected via the layout assistant (extract
sheet), these are filled in gray.
1. Select > Assistants, >Layout, >Extract sheet, >Sheet box.
The "Extract sheet with parts" mask is opened.
2. Assign part name.
3. Press OK.
4. Box in parts that are to be extracted.
The parts are filled in gray.
5. Press OK.
The contours of the selected parts are displayed in red.
The selection can be saved.
 
S523EN 2015-12-04 Extracting parts and sheets from foreign formats
(assistant for layout
3‐31
Save parts manually?
Enlarging the view
Showing storage location
and part names
 
3‐32 Extracting parts and sheets from foreign formats
(assistant for layout
2015-12-04 S523EN
Chapter 4
Geometries
1 Drawing geometries 4‐7
1.1 Points 4‐7
Drawing points 4‐7
1.2 Lines 4‐7
Drawing a line via 2 points 4‐7
Drawing parallel line to the available line 4‐8
Drawing horizontal or vertical lines 4‐8
Drawing a line as a tangent at an arc ele-
ment and point
4‐9
Drawing a line at a right angle to another
element
4‐9
Drawing a line with point, angle of inclina-
tion and length
4‐9
Drawing a line via tangent at 2 arc ele-
ments
4‐10
1.3 Circles 4‐10
Drawing a circle via 3 points 4‐10
Drawing a circle via center and radius 4‐10
Drawing a circle via diameter 4‐11
 
S523EN 2015-12-04 Geometries 4‐1
Drawing a circle via center and radius 4‐11
Drawing a circle tangential to 2 elements 4‐11
Drawing concentric circles 4‐12
1.4 Polygons 4‐12
Polygons, drawing 4‐12
1.5 Rectangle 4‐13
Drawing rectangles 4‐13
1.6 Arcs 4‐13
Drawing an arc via 3 points 4‐13
Drawing an arc via center, start and end
point
4‐13
Drawing an arc via diameter 4‐14
Drawing a concentric arc 4‐14
Drawing an arc via center, radius, start
and final angle
4‐15
Drawing a multicurve contour 4‐15
Converting arcs into roundings 4‐16
1.7 Notches 4‐16
Creating corner notches with different dis-
tances
4‐17
Creating corner notches with the same
distances
4‐18
Creating rectangular notches 4‐18
Creating triangular notches 4‐19
Creating the bend relief later 4‐20
1.8 Bevels 4‐20
Drawing a bevel with the distance to the
vertex
4‐20
Drawing a bevel via a corner point 4‐21
1.9 Rounding corners 4‐21
Corner round 4‐21
Restoring corners 4‐21
1.10 Drawing an equidistant to the contour 4‐22
1.11 Redrawing construction geometry 4‐22
2 Generating single holes, circles of holes
and rows of holes (macros)
4‐24
2.1 Defining circle, ellipse or dot marked point as
base element
4‐24
2.2 Defining rectangle or oblong hole as base
element
4‐26
2.3 Defining your own geometry templates as
base element
4‐27
 
4‐2 Geometries 2015-12-04 S523EN
2.4 Defining the drawing of a forming tool as
base element
4‐28
2.5 Defining a tool drawing as base element 4‐30
2.6 Generating single hole via macro 4‐31
2.7 Generating a circle of holes via macro 4‐32
2.8 Generating a row of holes via macro 4‐33
2.9 Generating hole grid via macro 4‐34
2.10 Generating bend relief via macro 4‐35
2.11 Delete duplicate single holes 4‐35
3 Modifying drawn geometries 4‐37
3.1 Shifting geometries 4‐37
Moving geometries horizontally or verti-
cally
4‐37
Moving geometries via 2 points 4‐38
3.2 Rotating geometries 4‐38
Rotating geometries around a center point 4‐38
Rotate geometries around 2 points 4‐39
3.3 Modifying the scale of geometries 4‐40
Modifying the scale of geometries around
a center
4‐40
Modifying the scale of geometries via 2
points
4‐41
3.4 Mirroring geometries 4‐42
Mirroring geometries in a horizontal or
vertical mirror line
4‐42
Mirroring geometries around a symmetry
point
4‐42
Mirroring geometries around any axis 4‐43
3.5 Stretching geometries 4‐44
Stretching geometry horizontal or vertical 4‐44
Stretching the geometry based on two
points
4‐44
3.6 Modifying line attributes (color and line type) 4‐45
Preset line color and line type. 4‐45
Modify the line color/line type of single
(available) elements.
4‐45
Globally modifying lines of one color
and/or line type
4‐45
3.7 Modifying radiuses and diameters of round-
ings or circles
4‐46
Modify rounding radius 4‐46
Modifying diameters of circles 4‐46
 
S523EN 2015-12-04 Geometries 4‐3
4 Correcting geometries 4‐47
4.1 Separating or combining elements 4‐47
Separate an element 4‐47
Separating two elements at their point of
intersection
4‐48
Combining elements together 4‐48
4.2 Shortening or extending elements 4‐49
Shortening or extending an element 4‐49
Shortening or extending two elements 4‐50
4.3 Converting narrow contours into lines 4‐52
Converting rectangles or oblong holes into
lines
4‐52
4.4 Converting lines 4‐53
Converting lines into bevels 4‐53
5 Editing multiple outer contours 4‐54
5.1 Displaying outer contours 4‐54
5.2 Displaying the first outer contour 4‐54
5.3 Going to the next outer contour 4‐55
5.4 Highlighting the outer contour 4‐55
5.5 Marking outer contour 4‐55
5.6 Deleting contour 4‐55
5.7 Selecting outer contour 4‐55
5.8 Zooming outer contour 4‐56
6 Deleting geometries 4‐57
6.1 Deleteing single elements or contours 4‐57
6.2 Deleting elements with particular line proper-
ties
4‐57
6.3 Delete small contours 4‐57
6.4 Deleting short elements 4‐58
6.5 Deleting attributes 4‐58
6.6 Delete dimensioning 4‐58
6.7 Delete duplicate single holes 4‐58
6.8 Deleting construction geometries 4‐59
7 Dimensioning geometries (option) 4‐60
7.1 Showing and hiding dimensionings 4‐60
7.2 Lines 4‐60
7.3 Circles, radiuses, arc lengths 4‐62
7.4 Angle 4‐62
 
4‐4 Geometries 2015-12-04 S523EN
7.5 Moving dimensioning 4‐63
7.6 Adapting dimensioning text 4‐63
7.7 Setting the dimensioning format 4‐65
7.8 Deleting dimensioning 4‐65
7.9 Setting standard text size 4‐65
8 Element groups 4‐66
8.1 Forming element groups 4‐66
8.2 Dissolving element groups 4‐66
9 Marking and hatching 4‐67
9.1 Setting marking 4‐67
9.2 Deleteing marking 4‐67
9.3 Hatching closed contours 4‐67
9.4 Hatching contours with closed inner contours 4‐68
9.5 Changing the hatching 4‐69
9.6 Deleting the hatching 4‐69
10 Inserting or modifying text in geometries 4‐70
10.1 Entering text and defining parameters 4‐70
10.2 Modifying text parameters 4‐72
10.3 Mirroring FNT texts 4‐72
10.4 Changing FNT text to TTF text (and vice
versa)
4‐73
10.5 Loading DXF, DWG and MI files with TTF
texts
4‐73
10.6 Creating texts with curvature 4‐73
10.7 Modifying TTF texts in Variants 4‐74
10.8 Creating your own text font 4‐75
11 Embossed texts 4‐78
11.1 Creating embossed text 4‐78
11.2 Using special characters 4‐79
12 Comparing geometries with one another
(geometry comparator)
4‐80
12.1 Opening and closing geometry comparator 4‐80
12.2 Comparing a reference drawing and a com-
parison drawing with one another
4‐80
12.3 Merging a reference drawing with a compari-
son drawing
4‐82
 
S523EN 2015-12-04 Geometries 4‐5
12.4 Deleting a reference drawing or a compari-
son drawing
4‐82
13 Prepare geometries for editing 4‐83
13.1 Loading and preparing geometries 4‐83
13.2 Modifying the processing sequence of pre-
pared geometries
4‐83
13.3 Modifying the start point for the machining 4‐85
13.4 Selecting preferred direction 4‐85
13.5 Determining the contour start 4‐86
13.6 Prefer contours 4‐86
13.7 Recalculating the preparation 4‐87
13.8 Saving prepared geometries 4‐87
14 Processing films 4‐88
14.1 Film separation 4‐88
14.2 Film peeling assistant 4‐88
 
4‐6 Geometries 2015-12-04 S523EN
1. Drawing geometries
In TruTops CAD, drawings can be created directly or imported
from other systems. TRUMPF provides interfaces to foreign for-
mats for this purpose (see "Opening foreign formats from CAD
systems", pg. 3 ‐14).
CAD drawings can be modified or added using the drawing func-
tions of TruTops CAD.
1.1 Points
Drawing points
Notes
■ Points that have to be dot marked have to be drawn in the
color cyan (see "Modifying line attributes (color and line
type)", pg. 4 ‐45).
■ Dot marked points can be defined as the base element for
single holes, circles of holes and rows of holes .
1. Select > Create >Special elements  >Point.
2. Follow the instructions in the command line.
1.2 Lines
Drawing a line via 2 points
1. Select > Create >Lines >2 points.
2. Follow the instructions in the command line.
 
S523EN 2015-12-04 Drawing geometries 4‐7
Interfaces to CAD systems
Modifying or adding CAD
drawings
Drawing parallel line to the available line
Condition
■ The drawing contains at least one line.
Fig. 4702
1. Select > Create >Lines >Parallel.
2. Click on the line (P1) for which a parallel line is to be drawn.
3. For one parallel line: click on the point (P2) on the parallel
line.
or
Ø For several parallel lines: enter all distances in which
one parallel line is to be drawn. (Separate numerical val-
ues by blanks. Do not use any commas. Example:
10 20 30.)
4. Press <Enter> or <Return> ( ↲).
5. Click on the side on which the parallel line(s) should appear.
Drawing horizontal or vertical lines
1. Select > Create >Lines >Horizontal or > Vertical.
2. Follow the instructions in the command line.
 
4‐8 Drawing geometries 2015-12-04 S523EN
Drawing a line as a tangent at an arc
element and point
Condition
■ The drawing contains at least one arc element or circle.
Fig. 4704
1. Select > Create >Lines >Tangent through pnt .
2. Follow the instructions in the command line.
Drawing a line at a right angle to another
element
Fig. 4705
1. Select > Create >Lines >At right angles .
2. Follow the instructions in the command line.
Drawing a line with point, angle of
inclination and length
Fig. 4706
1. Select > Create >Lines >Angle X.
2. Follow the instructions in the command line.
 
S523EN 2015-12-04 Drawing geometries 4‐9
Drawing a line via tangent at 2 arc
elements
Fig. 4707
1. Select > Create >Lines >Tangent at 2 arcs .
2. Follow the instructions in the command line.
1.3 Circles
Drawing a circle via 3 points
Fig. 4914
1. Select > Create >Circles >3 points.
2. Follow the instructions in the command line.
Drawing a circle via center and radius
Fig. 4709
1. Select > Create >Circles >Center radius.
2. Follow the instructions in the command line.
 
4‐10 Drawing geometries 2015-12-04 S523EN
Drawing a circle via diameter
Fig. 4915
1. Select > Create >Circles >Diameter.
2. Follow the instructions in the command line.
Drawing a circle via center and radius
Fig. 4709
1. Select > Create >Circles >Center diameter.
2. Follow the instructions in the command line.
Drawing a circle tangential to 2 elements
Condition
■ The drawing contains at least 2 elements.
Fig. 4711
1. Select> Create >Circles >2 tangents – 1 point .
 
S523EN 2015-12-04 Drawing geometries 4‐11
2. Follow the instructions in the command line.
Drawing concentric circles
Fig. 4710
1. Select > Create >Circles >Concentric.
2. Click on the base circle (P1).
3. Click on a point (P2) on the arc.
or
Ø Enter distance (positive value: concentric circle outside
the base circle, negative value: concentric circle within
the base circle)
1.4 Polygons
Polygons, drawing
Fig. 4708
1. Select > Create >Line >Polygon.
2. Follow the instructions in the command line.
 
4‐12 Drawing geometries 2015-12-04 S523EN
1.5 Rectangle
Drawing rectangles
1. Select > Create >Lines >Rectangle.
2. Follow the instructions in the command line.
1.6 Arcs
Notes
■ Arcs are always drawn in counter-clockwise direction.
■ If arcs are to be changed in one working step (e.g. new
radius), they have to be previously converted into roundings
(via >Modify >Elements >Radius corner).
Drawing an arc via 3 points
Fig. 4712
1. Select > Create >Arcs >3 points.
2. Follow the instructions in the command line.
Drawing an arc via center, start and end
point
Fig. 4713
 
S523EN 2015-12-04 Drawing geometries 4‐13
1. Select > Create >Arcs >Center-Start-End.
2. Follow the instructions in the command line.
Drawing an arc via diameter
Fig. 4917
1. Select > Create >Arcs >Diameter.
2. Follow the instructions in the command line.
Drawing a concentric arc
Fig. 4714
1. Select > Create >Arcs >Concentric.
2. Click on the point (P1) in the available arc element.
3. Click on the point (P2) in the new arc element.
or
Ø Enter the distance between the concentric arcs:
− To create a concentric circle outside the base circle:
enter a positive value.
− To create a concentric circle within the base circle: enter
a negative value.
 
4‐14 Drawing geometries 2015-12-04 S523EN
Drawing an arc via center, radius, start and
final angle
Fig. 4715
1. Select > Create >Arcs >Center-Radius-Angle.
2. Click on the center (P1).
3. Click on a point (P2) on the arc.
or
Ø Enter the arc's radius.
4. Enter the start angle (a).
or
Ø Click on a point (P3) on the arc.
5. Enter the final angle (b).
or
Ø Click on a point (P4) on the arc.
Drawing a multicurve contour
A multicurve contour consists of several arcs that are connected
together.
Notes
■ Multicurve contours can only be attached to existing ele-
ments.
■ If a construction circle is under the arc, no multicurve contour
is created.
Fig. 4918
1. Select > Create >Arcs >Multicurve contour.
 
S523EN 2015-12-04 Drawing geometries 4‐15
2. Click on the end point (P1) of an available element (arc or
line).
(P1) is also the start point of the arc.
3. Click on the end point (P2) of the arc.
(P2) is then the start point of the following arc.
4. Click on the next arc point (P3), etc.
Converting arcs into roundings
1. Select > Modify >Elements >Radius corner.
2. Follow the instructions in the command line.
1.7 Notches
Notches can be defined as corner notches or as element
notches. They can be created at line elements, arc elements and
circle elements. Notches have the "attribute" property (see "Char-
acteristics: a property of elements and contours", pg. 1 ‐49).
Note
The contour at which the notch is to be defined must be availa-
ble.
Fig. 19685
 
4‐16 Drawing geometries 2015-12-04 S523EN
Corner notches
Fig. 19686
Creating corner notches with different
distances
SP Vertex
A Notch depth of 1. element
B Notch depth of 2. element
d Bend relief diameter
Fig. 33472
1. Select > Create >Corners/elements >Rectangular corner
notch.
2. Follow the instructions in the command line. Before clicking
on the elements, enter a bend relief diameter if necessary.
For workpieces that will later be bent, the bend relief reduces
the deformation of the corner.
A bend relief diameter (d) >0 creates notches with pitch cir-
cle. A bend relief diameter (d) = 0 creates notches without
pitch circle.
If nothing is entered, the notch will also be created without
pitch circle.
 
S523EN 2015-12-04 Drawing geometries 4‐17
Element notches
Creating corner notches with the same
distances
SP Vertex
A Notch depth of the first and the
second element
d Bend relief diameter
Fig. 19688
1. Select > Create >Corners/elements >Square corner notch .
2. Follow the instructions in the command line. Before clicking
on the elements, enter a bend relief diameter if necessary.
For workpieces that will later be bent, the bend relief reduces
the deformation of the corner.
A bend relief diameter (d) >0 creates notches with pitch cir-
cle. A bend relief diameter (d) = 0 creates notches without
pitch circle.
If nothing is entered, the notch will also be created without
pitch circle.
Creating rectangular notches
P1 Element
w Notch width
M Notch center
h Notch height
d Bend relief diameter
Fig. 19690
1. Select > Create >Corners/elements >Rectangular notch.
 
4‐18 Drawing geometries 2015-12-04 S523EN
2. Follow the instructions in the command line. Before clicking
on the elements, enter a bend relief diameter if necessary.
For workpieces that will later be bent, the bend relief reduces
the deformation of the corner.
A bend relief diameter (d) >0 creates notches with pitch cir-
cle. A bend relief diameter (d) = 0 creates notches without
pitch circle.
If nothing is entered, the notch will also be created without
pitch circle.
Creating triangular notches
Fig. 19689
1. Select > Create >Corners/elements >Triangular notch.
2. Enter notch height (h).
3. Enter angle of triangle (α).
4. Enter the notch center (M).
or
Ø Enter the bend relief diameter (d).
For workpieces that will later be bent, the bend relief reduces
the deformation of the corner.
A bend relief diameter (d) >0 creates notches with pitch cir-
cle. A bend relief diameter (d) = 0 creates notches without
pitch circle.
If nothing is entered, the notch will also be created without
pitch circle.
5. Click on the element (P1) at the position at which the notch
is to be created.
 
S523EN 2015-12-04 Drawing geometries 4‐19
Creating the bend relief later
For workpieces which are to be bent later, a bend relief reduces
the deformation of the corner.
1. Select > Create >Corner/element >Bend relief
2. Follow the instructions in the command line. (Enter bend
relief diameter >0.)
1.8 Bevels
Bevels have the "attribute" property (see "Characteristics: a prop-
erty of elements and contours", pg. 1 ‐49). When a real bevel (as
opposed to a line) is deleted, the corner is closed.
When taking over external formats, bevels might be read as
lines, since not all foreign formats differentiate between bevels
and lines. Lines can be converted into real bevels (see "Convert-
ing lines", pg. 4 ‐53)
Drawing a bevel with the distance to the
vertex
a Distance between the bevel
and the vertex (first element)
b Distance between the bevel
and the vertex (second ele-
ment)
P1 Point on first element
P2 Point on second element
SP Vertex
Fig. 33468
1. Select > Create >Corners/elements >X/Y bevel.
2. Follow the instructions in the command line.
 
4‐20 Drawing geometries 2015-12-04 S523EN
Drawing a bevel via a corner point
a Distance between the bevel
and the vertex
SP Vertex
Fig. 33469
1. Select > Create >Corners/elements >Square bevel.
2. Follow the instructions in the command line.
1.9 Rounding corners
Corner round
Fig. 33470
1. Select > Create >Corner/element >Radius corner
2. Follow the instructions in the command line.
Restoring corners
Fig. 4716
1. Select > Edit >Delete >Element.
 
S523EN 2015-12-04 Drawing geometries 4‐21
2. Click on the rounding(s) to be deleted.
The corner(s) will be restored.
1.10 Drawing an equidistant to the contour
An equidistant is a second contour which runs parallel to the
original contour. It is created with a defined distance to the origi-
nal contour:
Fig. 33471
1. Select > Create >Special elements  >Equidistant.
2. Follow the instructions in the command line.
1.11 Redrawing construction geometry
1. Trace the auxiliary geometries in such a manner that they
lead to the desired geometry.
Fig. 51355
2. Select > Create >Special elements  >Trace auxiliary geometry .
3. Click on the intersection of the two auxiliary geometries.
 
4‐22 Drawing geometries 2015-12-04 S523EN
4. Click on the auxiliary geometry whose line is to be a part of
the geometry.
A line is drawn up to the next intersection.
5. Click on the next intersection and the next auxiliary geometry.
6. Continue till the geometry is traced.
Redrawn auxiliary lines Fig. 51356de
 
S523EN 2015-12-04 Drawing geometries 4‐23
2. Generating single holes, circles of
holes and rows of holes (macros)
You can use macros to create the following complex geometries
in a simple way:
■ Single holes
■ Circles of holes
■ Rows of holes
■ Hole grids
■ Any bend relief.
(Any bend reliefs are single holes. They are calculated with
contours that they cut.).
Circles of holes, rows of holes and hole grids consist of a base
element which is repeated.
The following base elements are possible:
■ Circles/ellipses/dot mark points
■ Rectangles/squares
■ Oblong holes
■ Geometry templates of your own
■ Drawings of forming tools
■ Tool drawings
■ Determine the base element and its parameters.
■ Create a single hole, row of holes, circles of holes or hole
grid.
2.1 Defining circle, ellipse or dot marked
point as base element
Condition
■ The drawing is open.
1. Select > Create >Macros > Parameter....
2. Select the "Circle" index card.
3. Select "Circle", "Ellipse" or "Dot mark pt.".
4. Enter the geometry data after selecting "Circle" or "Ellipse".
The geometry data for an ellipse is defined as follows:
− "Radius 1" = a/2
− "Radius 2" = b/2
 
4‐24 Generating single holes, circles of holes and rows of
holes (macros)
2015-12-04 S523EN
Overview of the procedure
Geometry data for an ellipse Fig. 19721
5. Enter the angle of inclination if an ellipse is to be rotated
around itself.
α Angle of inclination
Example: angle of inclination 45° Fig. 19722
6. Check "Also rotate geometry" if an ellipse is to be rotated
when creating rows of holes, circles of holes or hole grids:
1 Zero point of the ellipse
Left: ellipse is rotated, right: ellipse is not rotated Fig. 27160
7. Press OK.
The base element is defined.
8. Create a single hole, circles of holes, row of holes or hole
grid.
 
S523EN 2015-12-04Generating single holes, circles of holes and rows of
holes (macros)
4‐25
2.2 Defining rectangle or oblong hole as
base element
Condition
■ The drawing is open.
1. Select > Create >Macros > Parameter....
2. Select the "Rectangle/Oblong hole" index card.
3. Select "Rectangle" or "Oblong".
4. Enter the length and width.
5. Enter the angle of inclination if the rectangle or oblong hole
is to be rotated around itself:
α Angle of inclination
Example: angle of inclination 45° Fig. 19725
6. Enter the corner radius if the base element is a rectangle.
7. Check "Also rotate geometry" if the geometry is to be rotated
when creating rows of holes, circles of holes or hole grids:
1 Zero point of the rectangle
Left: rectangle is rotated, right: rectangle is not rotated Fig. 27159
8. Press OK.
The base element is defined.
 
4‐26 Generating single holes, circles of holes and rows of
holes (macros)
2015-12-04 S523EN
9. Create a single hole, circles of holes, row of holes or hole
grid.
2.3 Defining your own geometry
templates as base element
Condition
■ The drawing is open.
1. Select > Create >Macros > Parameter....
2. Select the "Template" index card.
3. To display the geometry template used last, open "Template"
with ▼.
The "Last templates" mask is displayed.
4. In order to select from all geometry templates, click on
Selection.
The file browser opens.It displays all files in *.VLG format
which are in the current directory.
5. Search for the file if necessary.
6. Mark the desired geometry template.
7. Press OK.
8. Enter an angle of inclination if the geometry template is to be
rotated around itself:
α Angle of inclination
Example: angle of inclination 45° Fig. 27162
9. Check "Also rotate geometry" if the geometry template is
also to be rotated when creating rows of holes, circles of
holes or hole grids:
 
S523EN 2015-12-04Generating single holes, circles of holes and rows of
holes (macros)
4‐27
1 Zero point of the geometry template
Left: template is rotated, right: template is not rotated Fig. 27163
10. Press OK.
The geometry template is defined as a base element.
11. Create a single hole, circles of holes, row of holes or hole
grid.
2.4 Defining the drawing of a forming
tool as base element
The geometries of forming tools from the TRUMPF punching tool
catalog can be used for drawing.
Since they are drawings, it does not matter whether the created
geometry is punched or machined with the laser.
Condition
■ The drawing is open.
1. Select > Create >Macros > Parameter....
2. Select the "Form model" index card.
3. If the number of the forming tool is known:
− Open "Form model type" with ▼.
− Mark the number of the forming tool in the following
mask.
4. If the number of the forming tool is not known:
− Select Selection.
− Mark the desired forming tool.
 
4‐28 Generating single holes, circles of holes and rows of
holes (macros)
2015-12-04 S523EN
"Selection" mask Fig. 41304en
5. Enter the geometry data of the forming tool.
6. Enter the angle of inclination if the forming tool is to be
rotated around itself:
α Angle of inclination
Example: angle of inclination 45° Fig. 19725
7. Check "Rotate form model" if the shaped tool is also to be
rotated when creating rows of holes, circles of holes or hole
grids:
 
S523EN 2015-12-04Generating single holes, circles of holes and rows of
holes (macros)
4‐29
1 Zero point of the shaped tool
Left: shaped tool is rotated, right: shaped tool is not
rotated
Fig. 27159
8. Press OK.
The base element is defined.
9. Create a single hole, circles of holes, row of holes or hole
grid.
2.5 Defining a tool drawing as base
element
Condition
■ The drawing is open.
Note
The function is only enabled in TruTops Punch.
1. Select > Create >Macros > Parameter....
2. Select the "Tool" tab
3. Either
Ø Select a tool.
or
Ø Select forming tool.
Ø At "Display as", select the type of display; for example,
graphic, point, identity number or comment.
Ø Press OK.
Ø Define the position of the stroke with the left mouse but-
ton.
Depending on the selection, the stroke will be shown, for
example, as identity number.
 
4‐30 Generating single holes, circles of holes and rows of
holes (macros)
2015-12-04 S523EN
4. Press OK.
The base element is defined.
5. Create a single hole, circles of holes, row of holes or hole
grid.
2.6 Generating single hole via macro
Condition
■ The base element is defined.
− Circle, ellipse or dot mark point.
− Rectangle or square.
− Oblong hole.
− A geometry template of your own.
− Drawing of a shaped tool.
− Tool drawing.
1. Select > Create >Macros >Single hole.
The base element is linked to the cursor.
The base element can be rotated using the wheel mouse
(increment of 10 °).
2. Either
Ø Enter or click on the target point for the single hole.
TruTops CAD sets the center of the base element on the
target point.
or
Ø Enter the angle of inclination of the base element. (Tru-
Tops CAD does not take into account the angle of incli-
nation from the definition of the base element in this
case. The base element appended to the cursor can be
turned further with a mouse wheel).
Ø Enter or click on the target point for the single hole.
The center of the base element is set on the target point.
3. Enter or click on further target points.
 
S523EN 2015-12-04Generating single holes, circles of holes and rows of
holes (macros)
4‐31
Creating single hole
Generating further single
holes
1 Target point and zero point of
the GEO file
α Angle of inclination for the
single hole
Fig. 26988
2.7 Generating a circle of holes via
macro
A full circle or a partial circle can be created.
Condition
■ The base element is defined.
− Circle, ellipse or dot mark point.
− Rectangle or square.
− Oblong hole.
− A geometry template of your own.
− Drawing of a shaped tool.
− Tool drawing.
Full circle Fig. 4757
 
4‐32 Generating single holes, circles of holes and rows of
holes (macros)
2015-12-04 S523EN
Part circle Fig. 4753
1. Select > Create >Macros >Bolt hole circle .
2. Click on the center (P1).
3. Enter the number of holes.
4. Enter the start angle (α).
or
Ø Define the start angle (α) by means of two points.
Note
In case of a full circle, the end angle must be 360° larger
than the start angle. (Example: start angle of 0°, end angle
of 360°).
5. Enter the end angle (β).
or
Ø Define the end angle (β) by means of two points.
6. Enter the radius.
or
Ø Define the radius by means of two points.
2.8 Generating a row of holes via macro
Application: Create several equally-spaced (2) holes of the same
size on a straight line (1):
Condition
■ The base element is defined.
− Circle, ellipse or dot mark point.
− Rectangle or square.
− Oblong hole.
− A geometry template of your own.
 
S523EN 2015-12-04Generating single holes, circles of holes and rows of
holes (macros)
4‐33
− Drawing of a shaped tool.
− Tool drawing.
1 Length of the row of holes
2 Distance between the holes
P1 Start point
P2 End point
α Angle of inclination
Row of holes Fig. 4752
1. Select > Create >Macros >Row of holes .
2. Follow the instructions in the command line.
2.9 Generating hole grid via macro
Condition
■ The base element is defined.
− Circle, ellipse or dot mark point.
− Rectangle or square.
− Oblong hole.
− A geometry template of your own.
− Drawing of a shaped tool.
− Tool drawing.
1 Distance between the rows of
holes
2 Distance between the holes
P1 Start point
P2 End point
α Angle to X axis
Hole grid Fig. 40779
 
4‐34 Generating single holes, circles of holes and rows of
holes (macros)
2015-12-04 S523EN
1. Select > Create >Macros >Hole grid.
2. Follow the instructions in the command line.
2.10 Generating bend relief via macro
Any bend reliefs are single holes. They are calculated with con-
tours that they cut.
Any bend reliefs can be used, for example, to create bend reliefs
on notches later.
Any bend reliefs must not be circular. They can be square or
rectangular and can be set at any positions of a closed contour
(even without notches).
Conditions
■ Any bend relief must consist of precisely one  closed con-
tour.
■ Any bend relief must cut another closed contour.
Notes
■ Any bend relief cannot be created at open contours.
■ Free single holes that do not cut anything are not possible
using this function.
1. Select > Create >Macros >Any bend relief .
2. Follow the instructions in the command line.
2.11 Delete duplicate single holes
"Duplicate single holes" are single holes which, for example,
have two rows of holes in common. "Duplicate single holes" are
equally sized, are positioned exactly over each other and are
created by > Create >Macros. (Duplicate single holes which are
not created by macros are automatically deleted during saving.)
1. Select > Create >Macros >Display duplicate single holes .
or
Ø Select >View >Display duplicate single holes .
2. Select > Create >Macros >Delete duplicate single holes .
or
Ø Select >Edit >Delete >Delete duplicate single holes .
 
S523EN 2015-12-04Generating single holes, circles of holes and rows of
holes (macros)
4‐35
Display duplicate single
holes
Deleting duplicate single
holes
In case needed, the rows of holes and circles of holes will be
deleted. The duplicate single holes are removed.
Then the remaining holes are brought together into smaller rows
of holes.
Example: for two rows of holes with one common hole, one row
of holes is kept. The other is separated into two small rows of
holes (respectively "left" and "right" of the other rows of holes).
 
4‐36 Generating single holes, circles of holes and rows of
holes (macros)
2015-12-04 S523EN
3. Modifying drawn geometries
Geometry elements can be modified in two ways:
■ Modifying the original element.
■ Copying the original element. Modifying the copy.
3.1 Shifting geometries
Moving geometries horizontally or vertically
Fig. 27704
1. Either
Ø To move the original geometry: select > Modify >Move
>Horizontal or > Vertical.
or
Ø To create copies and to rotate and move them: select
>Modify >Move >Copy horizontally  or > Copy vertically.
Ø Select the number of copies. (If the desired number is
not offered: select > Continue.)
2. Either
Ø Enter the distance for the movement.
or
Ø Click on the reference point (P1).
Ø Click on the target position (P2).
3. Click on the element in the original geometry.
or
Ø Box in the entire original geometry using the mouse (P3,
P4).
 
S523EN 2015-12-04 Modifying drawn geometries 4‐37
Moving geometries via 2 points
Fig. 27703
1. Either
Ø To move the original geometry: select > Modify >Move >2
points.
or
Ø To create copies and to move them: select > Modify
>Move >Copy 2 points .
Ø Select the number of copies. (If the desired number is
not offered: select > Continue.)
2. Click on the reference point (P1).
3. Click on the target position (P2).
4. Click on the element in the original geometry.
or
Ø Box in the entire original geometry using the mouse (P3,
P4).
3.2 Rotating geometries
Rotating geometries around a center point
Fig. 28062
1. Either
 
4‐38 Modifying drawn geometries 2015-12-04 S523EN
Ø To rotate the original geometry: select > Modify >Rotate
>Center.
or
Ø To create copies and to rotate them: select > Modify
>Rotate >Copy Center.
Ø Select the number of copies. (If the desired number is
not offered: select > Continue.)
2. Click on the center of rotation (P1).
3. Enter angle of rotation. E.g.: -90.
4. Click on the element in the original geometry.
or
Ø Box in the entire original geometry with the mouse (P2,
P3).
Rotate geometries around 2 points
Rotating a geometry by two points corresponds to rotating and
moving the geometry simultaneously.
Fig. 28060
1. Either
Ø To rotate the original geometry: select > Modify >Rotate
>2 points.
or
Ø To create copies and to rotate them: select > Modify
>Rotate >Copy – 2 points .
Ø Select the number of copies. (If the desired number is
not offered: select > Continue.)
2. Click on the reference point (P1).
3. Click on the target position (P2).
4. Enter angle of rotation. E.g.: -90.
5. Click on the element in the original geometry.
 
S523EN 2015-12-04 Modifying drawn geometries 4‐39
or
Ø Box in the entire original geometry using the mouse (P3,
P4).
3.3 Modifying the scale of geometries
Modifying the scale of geometries around a
center
Fig. 28084
1. Either
Ø To modify the scale of the original geometry: select
>Modify >Scale >Center.
or
Ø To create copies and to modify their scales: select > Mod-
ify >Scale >Copy Center.
Ø Select the number of copies. (If the desired number is
not offered: select > Continue.)
2. Click on the center (P1).
3. Enter the factor for enlargement or reduction.
4. Click on the element in the original geometry.
or
Ø Box in the entire original geometry with the mouse (P2,
P3).
 
4‐40 Modifying drawn geometries 2015-12-04 S523EN
Modifying the scale of geometries via 2
points
Fig. 28063
1. Either
Ø To modify the scale of the original geometry: select
>Modify >Scale >2 points.
or
Ø To create copies and to modify their scales: select > Mod-
ify >Scale >Copy – 2 points .
Ø Select the number of copies. (If the desired number is
not offered: select > Continue.)
2. Click on the reference point (P1).
3. Click on the target position (P2).
4. Enter the factor.
5. Click on the element in the original geometry.
or
Ø Box in the entire original geometry using the mouse (P3,
P4).
 
S523EN 2015-12-04 Modifying drawn geometries 4‐41
3.4 Mirroring geometries
Mirroring geometries in a horizontal or
vertical mirror line
Fig. 28082
1. To mirror the original geometry: select > Modify >Mirror >Hori-
zontal or > Vertical.
or
Ø To create a copy and to mirror it: select > Modify >Mirror
>Copy horizontally  or > Copy vertically.
2. Click on a point (P1) on the mirror line.
3. Click on the element in the original geometry.
or
Ø Box in the entire original geometry with the mouse (P2,
P3).
Mirroring geometries around a symmetry
point
Fig. 28064
 
4‐42 Modifying drawn geometries 2015-12-04 S523EN
1. To mirror the original geometry: select > Modify >Mirror >Cen-
ter.
or
Ø To create a copy and to mirror it: select > Modify >Mirror
>Copy Center.
2. Click on the symmetry point (P1).
3. Click on the element in the original geometry.
or
Ø Box in the entire original geometry with the mouse (P2,
P3).
Mirroring geometries around any axis
Fig. 28065
1. To mirror the original geometry: select > Modify >Mirror >2
points.
or
Ø To create a copy and to mirror it: select > Modify >Mirror
>Copy – 2 points .
2. Click on the first point (P1) on the mirror line.
3. Click on the second point (P2) on the mirror line.
4. Click on the element in the original geometry.
or
Ø Box in the entire original geometry using the mouse (P3,
P4).
 
S523EN 2015-12-04 Modifying drawn geometries 4‐43
3.5 Stretching geometries
Stretching geometry horizontal or vertical
Fig. 4756
1. Select > Modify >Stretch >Horizontal or > Vertical.
2. Follow the instructions in the command line.
Note
Elements that are cut by the frame will be stretched. Ele-
ments that are entirely within the marking of the frame will be
displaced.
3. To stretch several elements: use the mouse to box in all the
elements which are to be stretched.
Stretching the geometry based on two
points
Fig. 4754
1. Select > Modify >Stretch >2 points.
2. Follow the instructions in the command line.
Note
Elements that are cut by the frame will be stretched. Ele-
ments that are entirely within the marking of the frame will be
displaced.
3. To stretch several elements: use the mouse to box in all the
elements which are to be stretched.
 
4‐44 Modifying drawn geometries 2015-12-04 S523EN
3.6 Modifying line attributes (color and
line type)
The line attributes can be modified as follows:
■ Preset line color or line type. All connecting drawn elements
receive the new attributes.
■ Modify the line color or line type of single (available) ele-
ments. The preset line attributes will not be changed by this.
■ Globally modify lines of one color and/or line type (for exam-
ple, convert all red lines to blue lines or all dashed lines into
dotted lines). This function is especially useful if external
drawings are prepared in which the line attributes have other
meanings.
Preset line color and line type.
1. Open the "Current color and line type" with ▼.
2. In "Select line type", click on the desired line type and line
color.
3. Press OK.
All connecting drawn elements receive the new attributes.
Modify the line color/line type of single
(available) elements.
1. Select > Modify >Elements >Color or > Line type.
2. Click on the desired line color or line type.
3. One after the other, use the mouse to click on or box in all
the elements whose line color or line type should be modi-
fied.
Globally modifying lines of one color
and/or line type
1. Select > Modify >Elements >Change color...  or > Change line
type...
2. Click on the desired original color or original line type.
3. Click on the new color or the new line type.
 
S523EN 2015-12-04 Modifying drawn geometries 4‐45
4. Press OK.
For example, all red lines will be converted into blue lines or all
dashed lines into dotted lines.
3.7 Modifying radiuses and diameters of
roundings or circles
Note
Arcs whose radiuses are to be modified must be previously con-
verted into roundings (via > Modify >Elements >Radius corner).
Modify rounding radius
1. Select > Modify >Elements >Rounding radius.
2. Enter the new rounding radius in [mm].
3. If only roundings with a particular radius should be changed:
also enter the radius to be changed.
4. To modify individual roundings: click on the roundings one
after the other.
or
Ø Box in roundings with the mouse.
5. In order to modify all roundings: select All.
Modifying diameters of circles
1. Select > Modify >Elements >Circle diameter.
2. Enter the new circle diameter in mm.
3. If circles with a particular diameter should be changed: also
enter the diameter to be changed.
4. To modify individual circles: click on the circles one after the
other.
or
Ø Box in circles with the mouse.
5. In order to modify all circles: select All.
 
4‐46 Modifying drawn geometries 2015-12-04 S523EN
4. Correcting geometries
4.1 Separating or combining elements
Elements are separated when, for example, a part is to be
deleted. It is also possible to separate two elements at their
intersecting points and then to delete the single elements.
Note
If a circle is separated, a (full) arc is automatically generated
from the circle. In this manner, circles can be shortened (indi-
rectly).(see "Shortening or extending elements", pg. 4 ‐49).
Separate an element
Application: one part of an element is to be deleted.
Fig. 4719
1. If need be, select All points
 .
The start and end points of elements are marked with rot
squares (which is helpful when separating elements).
If the end points are simultaneously element connection
points, the squares are shown in green.
2. Select > Modify >Clear >Separate elements.
3. Click on the element (P1).
The element is displayed in yellow and with dashed lines.
4. Click on point (P2) at which the separation should be done.
or
Ø Enter the coordinates of (P2).
The element is separated.
5. To refresh the image: press the <F5> key or select Refresh
view
 .
 
S523EN 2015-12-04 Correcting geometries 4‐47
Separating two elements at their point of
intersection
Application: parts of elements are to be deleted.
Fig. 4718
1. If need be, select All points
 .
The start and end points of elements are marked with rot
squares (which is helpful when separating elements).
If the end points are simultaneously element connection
points, the squares are shown in green.
2. Select > Modify >Clear >Separate at cutting point .
3. Follow the instructions in the command line.
4. To refresh the image: press <F5> or select Refresh view
 .
Combining elements together
Conditions
■ Lines that are to be connected together have to have the
same direction or the same angular position. The end points
of the lines have to touch each other.
■ Two arcs that are to be combined with each other have to
have the same radius and center.
Note
It is not possible to combine two lines with different angular posi-
tions or two arcs with different radiuses and/or different centers.
 
4‐48 Correcting geometries 2015-12-04 S523EN
Fig. 4720
1. Select > Modify >Clear >Combine elements.
2. Click on the first element (P1).
The element (P1) is displayed in yellow and with dashed
lines.
3. Click on the second element (P2).
Both lines are shown in their original color.
4.2 Shortening or extending elements
Shortening or extending an element
Behavior of TruTops:
■ The element to be modified is shortened or, as the case may
be, extended up to the intersecting point.
■ If there are two shared intersecting points (e.g., arc), the
intersecting point is selected which is closest to the first pick
point.
■ The element to be modified is shortened on the side where
the pick point is not located. The side that is clicked on is
therefore kept.
Conditions
■ The element to be modified has to be a line, an arc, a bevel
or a rounding. (Bevels and roundings are automatically con-
verted to lines and arcs when they are shortened or
extended.)
■ The reference element can be a line, arc, circle, rounding,
bevel, construction line or construction circle.
Note
If a circle is separated, a (full) arc is automatically generated
from the circle. In this manner, circles can be shortened (indi-
rectly).(see "Separating or combining elements", pg. 4 ‐47)
 
S523EN 2015-12-04 Correcting geometries 4‐49
1 Reference element
2 Element to be modified
3 Clicked pick point
Defining modifications by clicking Fig. 26960
1. Select > Modify >Clear >Shorten/extend 1 element .
2. Click on the side of the element that is to be kept.
3. Click on the reference element.
The element to be modified is shortened (or extended) up to
the intersecting point.
Shortening or extending two elements
Behavior of TruTops:
■ Both elements will be shortened or, as the case may be,
extended up to the intersecting point.
■ If there are two shared intersecting points (e.g., arc), the
intersecting point is selected which is closest to the first pick
point.
■ Both of the elements to be modified will be shortened on the
side where the pick point is not located. The sides that are
clicked on are therefore kept.
 
4‐50 Correcting geometries 2015-12-04 S523EN
Conditions
■ Two elements have to have a common intersecting point
(real or virtual).
■ The element to be modified has to be a line, an arc, a bebel
or a rounding. (Bevels and roundings are automatically con-
verted to lines and arcs when they are shortened or length-
ened.)
Note
If a circle is separated, a (full) arc is automatically generated
from the circle. In this manner, circles can be shortened (indi-
rectly).(see "Separating or combining elements", pg. 4 ‐47)
1 First element to be modified
2 Second element to be modified
3 Pick point on the first element
4 Pick point on the second ele-
ment
Defining a modification by clicking Fig. 26961
1. Select > Modify >Clear >Shorten/extend both elements .
2. Either
Ø Click on the first element that is to be kept.
Ø Click on the second element that is to be kept.
or
Ø Use the mouse to box in one each open contour point of
the first and second elements to be modified (display in
TruTops CAD: red).
 
S523EN 2015-12-04 Correcting geometries 4‐51
1 First element to be modified
2 Second element to be modified
3 Open contour points (red)
4 Frame
Defining modifications by drawing frames Fig. 26962
The elements will be shortened or extended up to their intersect-
ing point.
4.3 Converting narrow contours into lines
Converting rectangles or oblong holes into
lines
Rectangles or oblong holes that are narrower than the laser kerf
can lead to problems with the laser machining. To remedy this,
the closed contours can be replaced by single lines and cut as
open contours.
1. Load a drawing or create a new one.
2. Select > Modify >Clear >Replace slitting contours .
The "Replace slitting contours" mask is displayed.
3. Select the type of contour that is to be replaced with one sin-
gle line ("Rectangles" and/or "Oblong holes").
4. Enter the maximum contour width (only rectangles and
oblong holes up to this width are then replaced).
 
4‐52 Correcting geometries 2015-12-04 S523EN
1 Maximum contour width
Converting narrow contours into lines Fig. 46138
5. Press OK.
6. Using the mouse, click on box in contours that are to be
replaced. To replace all contours: Select All.
The original contour is colored in red.
7. To finish, click on End.
4.4 Converting lines
Converting lines into bevels
1. Select > Modify >Elements >Bevel.
2. Follow the instructions in the command line.
 
S523EN 2015-12-04 Correcting geometries 4‐53
5. Editing multiple outer contours
The assistant for outer contours can be used for drawings that
include only one part, but nevertheless possess several outer
contours (e.g. for double circles that have a core hole with
thread and/or an extrusion, or for open outer contours). TruTops
CAD displays the found outer contours and the outer contours
can be marked, highlighted or deleted if required.
5.1 Displaying outer contours
If a part has several outer contours, this is reported during sav-
ing.
Causes for several outer contours:
■ The drawing consists of several parts.
■ The drawing contains open outer contours.
■ There is a "contour in the contour".
1. Select > View >Display outer contours .
All outer contours are presented in cyan.
2. If the drawing consists of several parts: generate and save
several '*.GEO'.
3. For open outer contours: select Show open points  (
 ).
Close open contour points.
4. For a contour in the contour: delete the innermost contour.
5.2 Displaying the first outer contour
Condition
■ A drawing (*.GEO or foreign format) with several outer con-
tours has been loaded or created.
Ø Select >Assistants >Outer contours  >First.
The outer contour is displayed in cyan and the contour points
are outlined.
Contour points are displayed in green if the outer contour is
closed and in red if it is open.
 
4‐54 Editing multiple outer contours 2015-12-04 S523EN
Checking for several outer
contours
Removing several outer
contours
5.3 Going to the next outer contour
Ø Select >Assistants >Outer contours  >Next.
The next outer contour is active. The current outer contour
remains unchanged.
5.4 Highlighting the outer contour
1. Select > Assistants >Outer contours  >Highlight.
2. Click on the desired type of selection line or selection color.
The outer contour is displayed with the new line type and in the
new line color and the next contour is active.
5.5 Marking outer contour
Note
If Highlight characteristics  is activated, TruTops CAD shows the
elements or contours in orange. The line color yellow is "covered
over".
Ø Select >Assistants >Outer contours  >Marking.
The element is allocated the "Marking" property and is presented
in yellow. The next contour is active.
5.6 Deleting contour
1. Select > Assistants >Outer contours  >Delete.
The highlighted contour is deleted.
2. Delete the superfluous contours one after the other.
5.7 Selecting outer contour
When there are several contours present (contour in the con-
tour), TruTops CAD always initially recognizes the out of line
inside contour as an outer contour. To select the enveloped
inside contour as an outer contour:
 
S523EN 2015-12-04 Editing multiple outer contours 4‐55
1. Select > Assistants >Outer contours  >Enveloping.
The enveloping contour is defined as an outer contour.
1 Enveloping contour deacti-
vated: The smaller circle is
shown as an outer contour
(contour in contour).
2 Enveloping contour activated:
The larger circle is shown as
an outer contour.
Example for an enveloping contour Fig. 46275
2. Highlight, mark or delete the other contours.
3. Create and save several geometries if the drawing consists
of several parts (see section Saving parts of a sheet in a for-
eign format as *.GEO).
5.8 Zooming outer contour
Ø Select >Assistants >Outer contours  >Zoom.
The outer contour selected is displayed as large as possible.
 
4‐56 Editing multiple outer contours 2015-12-04 S523EN
6. Deleting geometries
6.1 Deleteing single elements or contours
1. Select > Edit >Delete >Element or > Contour.
2. One after the other, click on or box in all elements or con-
tours using the mouse.
6.2 Deleting elements with particular line
properties
In TruTops CAD, the properties of elements to be deleted can be
combined in the "Delete selection" mask. (Example: all red and
blue dashed circles.)
1. Select > Edit >Delete >Selection.
The "Delete selection" mask is displayed.
2. Check the desired box.
Notes
■ If "lines" or "arcs" are selected, "bevels" and "roundings"
are also activated automatically. If only "lines" or only
"arcs" are to be deleted: deselect "bevels" or "roundings".
■ The "others" line type comprises all lines that do not
belong to the four categories ("dashed", "dotted", "point/
dash", "solid"). The "Others" line type cannot be created
in TruTops CAD. It can however occur when loading for-
eign formats (e.g. '.DXF').
3. Select Delete.
6.3 Delete small contours
1. Select > Edit >Delete >Small contours.
The "Delete contours" mask is displayed.
2. Enter the surface area of the contour in [mm 2].
3. Press OK.
All contours having an area that is equal to or smaller than the
entered value are deleted.
 
S523EN 2015-12-04 Deleting geometries 4‐57
6.4 Deleting short elements
1. Select > View >Display short elements .
The "Highlight elements" mask is displayed.
2. Enter length.
3. Press OK.
All elements up to this length are displayed in cyan.
4. Select > Edit >Delete >Short elements.
The "Delete elements" mask is displayed.
5. Enter the length up to which the elements should be deleted.
6. Press OK.
All elements having length that is equal to or less than the
entered value are deleted.
6.5 Deleting attributes
1. To display elements with the "Characteristic" property in
orange: select Highlight characteristics
 .
2. To delete the "Characteristic" property at selected contours:
select >Edit >Delete >Characteristics.
3. Using the mouse, click or box in contours with a "Character-
istic" property that you want to delete. To remove all charac-
teristics: select All or press <Ctrl>+<Enter> ( ↲) or <Ctrl>
+<Return> (↲).
6.6 Delete dimensioning
1. Select > Edit >Delete >Delete dimensioning.
2. Using the mouse, click or box in dimensioning to be deleted.
To remove all dimensioning: select All or press <Ctrl>
+<Enter> (↲) or <Ctrl>+<Return> ( ↲).
6.7 Delete duplicate single holes
"Duplicate single holes" are single holes which, for example,
have two rows of holes in common. "Duplicate single holes" are
equally sized, are positioned exactly over each other and are
created by > Create >Macros. (Duplicate single holes which are
not created by macros are automatically deleted during saving.)
 
4‐58 Deleting geometries 2015-12-04 S523EN
Displaying short elements
Deleting short elements
1. Select > Create >Macros >Display duplicate single holes .
or
Ø Select >View >Display duplicate single holes .
2. Select > Create >Macros >Delete duplicate single holes .
or
Ø Select >Edit >Delete >Delete duplicate single holes .
In case needed, the rows of holes and circles of holes will be
deleted. The duplicate single holes are removed.
Then the remaining holes are brought together into smaller rows
of holes.
Example: for two rows of holes with one common hole, one row
of holes is kept. The other is separated into two small rows of
holes (respectively "left" and "right" of the other rows of holes).
6.8 Deleting construction geometries
1. Select > Edit >Delete >Delete auxiliary geometry .
or
Ø Select >Auxiliary tools  >Delete auxiliary geometry .
2. Using the mouse, click or box in auxiliary geometries that are
to be deleted. To remove all auxiliary geometries: select All
or press <Ctrl>+<Enter> ( ↲) or <Ctrl>+<Return> ( ↲).
Tip
To rebuild the interface after deleting the auxiliary geometries:
press the <F5>- button or select Update drawing
 .
 
S523EN 2015-12-04 Deleting geometries 4‐59
Display duplicate single
holes
Deleting duplicate single
holes
7. Dimensioning geometries (option)
Note
This option will be grayed out if the corresponding password is
not available. Should you be interested in a quotation for this
option, please contact "software@de.trumpf.com".
Dimensionings show sizes, lengths or other dimensions of
objects in a drawing.
The dimensioning in TruTops CAD offers the following functions:
■ Dimensionings are dynamic objects that automatically recal-
culate their dimensions when they are scaled, rotated, moved
or angled.
■ Dimensionings are displayed in yellow by default so that they
can be distinguished from the measured points.
■ A dimensioning text can be added before and after the
dimensioning.
■ Various parameters e.g. font height, tolerances... can be
defined for the dimensioning value.
■ The dimensioning is saved.
■ Dimensioning is adopted when loading foreign formats from
CAD systems. The dimensioning can be processed.
■ For point dimensionings (2 points, short, axis), the special
points of elements such as center, 0 degree position etc.,
and the original points of a corner (virtual corners) can also
be dimensioned.
7.1 Showing and hiding dimensionings
1. Select icon Show dimensioning
  to display the dimensioning
(press the button).
2. Select the pressed icon Show dimensioning  again to hide the
dimensioning.
7.2 Lines
Condition
■ A drawing has been loaded and the option enabled (the nec-
essary password has been entered).
1. Select > Dimensioning.
2. Select the > Elements area of application, for example.
 
4‐60 Dimensioning geometries (option) 2015-12-04 S523EN
− Elements: to dimension an element on the part.
− Contours: to dimension a contour.
− 2 points: to dimension the distance between two points.
− Short: to dimension the distance between two points.
Only the end point is dimensioned.
− Axis: to dimension the distance of a point from the X or
Y axis.
3. Select the alignment of dimensioning.
− Horizontal: The dimensioning can be created only hori-
zontally.
− Vertical: The dimensioning can be created only vertically.
− Arbitrary: Dimensioning can be created (aligned) in any
direction on the dimensioned element or the dimensioned
points. To do this, define the specified angle in the input
line.
− Aligned: The dimensioning can be created by aligning on
the dimensioned element or the dimensioned points (not
for >Contours area of application).
4. If > Elements/Contours is selected, click or box in part(s).
5. If > Points is selected, click on the start and end points.
The distance between two points is dimensioned.
6. If > Short is selected, click on the start and end points.
The distance between two points is also dimensioned.
Dimensioning is however displayed differently and only the
end point is dimensioned.
Note
When several dimensionings are created, then the start point
always remains the same and the end point is redefined
each time. The > Short area of application is suitable for
dimensioning several elements in a compact manner. The
start point must be easy to recognize (e.g. bottom left cor-
ner).
7. For > Axis: click on the line (rectangle) or point on the circle.
In case of rectangles, the distance of a line (element) to the
X or Y axis is dimensioned. In case of circles, the distance
from the center of the circle to the respective axis is dimen-
sioned.
8. Position the dimensioning as desired.
The dimensioning is displayed.
 
S523EN 2015-12-04 Dimensioning geometries (option) 4‐61
7.3 Circles, radiuses, arc lengths
Condition
■ A drawing is loaded.
Note
When dimensioning the diameter, the diameter of a circle, an
arc, or a rounding is dimensioned.
1. Select > Dimensioning, >Circles / radiuses  >Diameter.
2. Mark the element to be dimensioned.
The dimensioning is linked to the mouse.
3. Place the dimensioning in the desired position.
The dimensioning is displayed at the circle.
Note
When dimensioning the radius, the radius of a circle, an arc
or a rounding is dimensioned.
4. Select > Dimensioning, >Circles / radiuses  >Radius.
5. Mark the element to be dimensioned.
The dimensioning is linked to the mouse.
6. Place the dimensioning in the desired position.
The dimensioning is displayed in the circle.
Note
When dimensioning the arc lengths, the length of an arc or a
rounding is dimensioned.
7. Select > Dimensioning >Circles/radiuses >Arc length.
8. Mark the element to be dimensioned.
The dimensioning is linked to the mouse.
9. Place the dimensioning in the desired position.
The dimensioning is displayed at the arc.
7.4 Angle
When dimensioning the angle, the angle between two lines is
dimensioned. Both lines do not have to intersect.
 
4‐62 Dimensioning geometries (option) 2015-12-04 S523EN
Dimensioning diameter
Dimensioning radii
Arc length dimensioning
Condition
■ A drawing is loaded.
1. Select > Dimensioning >Angle >Angle.
2. Mark the first line for the dimensioning.
3. Mark the second line for the dimensioning.
The dimensioning is linked to the mouse.
4. Select the angle to be dimensioned.
5. Place the dimensioning in the desired position.
The angle dimensioning is displayed.
7.5 Moving dimensioning
An existing dimensioning can be repositioned at any time. When
dimensioning angles, the angle to be dimensioned is defined by
the position.
Condition
■ A dimensioned drawing is loaded.
1. Select > Dimension >Modify >Move dimensioning.
2. Click on the existing dimensioning.
The dimensioning is linked to the mouse.
3. Place the dimensioning in the desired position.
7.6 Adapting dimensioning text
The following parameters for modifying the dimensioning text can
be defined in the "Dimensioning text" mask:
■ Calculated dimensioning value:
− Adopt.
− Ignore and enter a new value using the displayed calcu-
lator.
− Ignore and enter a new value in the input line
■ Tolerances: the tolerances to be displayed are defined here.
■ Text: define text before and after the dimensioning value.
■ Tolerance values: define upper and lower tolerance.
■ Select the font direction.
■ Define the font height.
 
S523EN 2015-12-04 Dimensioning geometries (option) 4‐63
Condition
■ A dimensioned drawing is loaded.
1. Select > Dimensioning >Modify >Modify text.
2. Mark the dimensioning text to be modified.
The "Dimensioning text" mask is displayed.
3. Select > Dimensioning >Modify >Move text.
4. Select dimensioning text.
The dimensioning is linked to the mouse.
Note
As long as the dimensioning text is touching the dimension-
ing line, text will appear on the line. Otherwise, a comment
line is drawn between the text and the dimensioning line to
allow the dimensioning text to be allocated to the dimension-
ing.
5. Place the dimensioning text in the desired position.
6. Select > Dimensioning >Modify >Text size.
7. Enter the new text size in the input line.
8. Press ↲.
9. Mark the texts to be modified.
or
Ø Select All.
The text size is modified.
10. Select >Dimension >Modify >Text alignment.
The "Text alignment" mask is displayed.
11. Select the font direction.
− Right: horizontal alignment.
− High: vertical, upwards.
− Low: vertical, downwards.
12. Mark the texts to be modified.
or
Ø Select All.
The text alignment is modified.
 
4‐64 Dimensioning geometries (option) 2015-12-04 S523EN
Modifying a dimensioning
text
Moving the dimensioning
text
Size, changing
Changing text alignment
7.7 Setting the dimensioning format
Condition
■ A dimensioned drawing is loaded.
1. Select > Dimensioning >Modify >Parameters >Format.
The "Dimensioning format" mask is displayed.
2. Enter the number of digits after the decimal point :
− Dimensioning value
− Tolerances
3. Enter the length of the arrow tip.
The formats for all dimensionings are modified.
7.8 Deleting dimensioning
You can delete individual dimensionings or all dimensionings at
once.
Condition
■ A dimensioned drawing is loaded.
1. Select > Dimensioning >Delete dimensioning.
2. Click on the dimensionings that are to be deleted one after
the other.
or
Ø Select All.
The dimensionings are deleted.
7.9 Setting standard text size
1. Select > Dimensioning >Modify >Parameters >Text size.
The "Standard values for dimensionings" mask is displayed.
2. Enter the value for the text height.
3. Press OK.
All texts are displayed with this value.
 
S523EN 2015-12-04 Dimensioning geometries (option) 4‐65
8. Element groups
All elements can be combined to an element group. Element
groups have the "Characteristic" property (see "Characteristics: a
property of elements and contours", pg. 1 ‐49).
In the "fixed" characteristic setting, certain actions are therefore
either applied to the entire unit, (i.e. on all elements) or the
actions are declined.
Advantage: If several actions are to be executed on the ele-
ments of an element group one after the other, the area of appli-
cation can be selected by clicking once (instead of clicking on
and boxing in the single elements several times).
An element group can be resolved by removing the "element
group" characteristic. Other characteristics (e.g. "single hole",
"notch", "marking"...) are retained.
8.1 Forming element groups
1. Select > Create >Element group  >Generate.
2. Using the mouse, click on or box in all elements one after
the other which are to be combined into one element group
using the mouse.
3. Press OK.
If Highlight characteristics is active (
 ), the element group is
displayed in orange.
8.2 Dissolving element groups
1. Select > Create >Element group  >Dissolve.
2. One after the other, click on or box in all elements using the
mouse whose element group is to be dissolved.
 
4‐66 Element groups 2015-12-04 S523EN
9. Marking and hatching
9.1 Setting marking
Ø Either
Ø To set a "marking" attribute: select > Create >Marking.
(see "Characteristics: a property of elements and con-
tours", pg. 1 ‐49).
Ø Select the > Element or > Contour area of application.
Ø Click on all elements or contours which are to be marked
or box them in with the mouse.
or
Ø Manually assign the contours that are to be marked with
the line color "yellow" (to do this, no "marking" attribute is
set).
If Highlight characteristics is active (
 ), the elements or con-
tours are shown "orange". The line color "yellow" is covered.
(The line color "yellow" must not be changed!)
9.2 Deleteing marking
Ø Either
Ø To set a "marking" attribute: select > Create >Marking
>Remove.
Ø Click on all elements or contours which are no longer to
be marked or box them in with the mouse.
or
Ø Contours that have the "yellow" line color but not the
"marking attribute": manually reset them to the normal
line color.
The "marking" attribute is deleted. The elements or contours
are shown in normal line color again.
9.3 Hatching closed contours
Closed contours (for example, texts) can be marked by hatching.
To get a hatched pattern (for example, horizontal and vertical
hatched lines), contours can be hatched several times.
Hatched lines receive their own "marking" attribute (see "Charac-
teristics: a property of elements and contours", pg. 1 ‐49).
 
S523EN 2015-12-04 Marking and hatching 4‐67
1. Select > Create >Marking >Hatch...
The "Definition of hatch" mask is displayed.
2. Select one of the predefined definitions for hatched lines.
or
Ø Enter (inclination) angle of the hatching.
3. Enter the distance between the hatched lines.
4. Select the "Elements" or "Contours" area of application.
Note
If the elements or contours which are to be hatched are
boxed in the with the mouse , the "Elements" or "Contours"
application area is not relevant.
When clicking with the mouse , all elements in the "fixed"
attribute setting and the "Element" application area will be
hatched for which there is a shared attribute. For the "Con-
tour" application area, only the contour which has been
clicked on will be hatched.
5. Press OK.
Notes
■ Only the outer contours will be hatched for nested con-
tours. The inner contours are excluded. To hatch nested
contours: repeat steps 1 to 6 at the inner contour.
■ Be sure for the "free" attribute setting and the "elements"
selection that the entire (closed) contour is boxed in with
the mouse. Contours that are not completely covered will
only be marked and not hatched.
6. Click on all elements or contours which are to be hatched or
box them in with the mouse.
If Highlight characteristics is active (
 ), the hatching is shown in
orange. The "yellow" line color (for markings) is covered over.
9.4 Hatching contours with closed inner
contours
It is possible to exclude the inner contours during hatching.
1. Select > Create >Marking >Hatch...
The "Definition of hatch" mask is displayed.
2. Select one of the predefined definitions for hatched lines.
or
Ø Enter (inclination) angle of the hatching.
 
4‐68 Marking and hatching 2015-12-04 S523EN
3. Enter the distance between the hatched lines.
4. Select the "Elements" or "Contours" area of application.
5. Press OK.
6. Use the mouse to box in the complete contour with the inner
contour.
or
Ø Press <Ctrl> and click on the individual contours one
after the other.
The inner contour will be shown without hatching.
9.5 Changing the hatching
1. Delete old hatching.
2. Create new hatching.
9.6 Deleting the hatching
Note
Hatched lines have their own "marking" attribute (see "Character-
istics: a property of elements and contours", pg. 1 ‐49).
In the "fixed" attribute setting (via > Edit >Fixed characteristics)
the hatching of a contour can be removed by a click.
1. Select > Edit >Delete >Element.
2. Click on the hatching(s) that are to be deleted one after the
other. (The hatched lines are completely removed.)
 
S523EN 2015-12-04 Marking and hatching 4‐69
10. Inserting or modifying text in
geometries
In TruTops CAD, texts can be pasted or edited in geometries.
Note
Neither approach flags nor withdrawal flags are created when
cutting text in '*.FNT' format. The beam directly pierces the con-
tour. Processing cannot be rearranged. This can result in uncon-
trolled scrap (depending on the font).
TruTops CAD supports FNT fonts (TRUMPF custom fonts) and
TTF fonts. The TTF fonts are converted into lines and arcs and
given a special characteristic so that TruTops can treat them as
text. To achieve a greater coordination between both font types,
the following modifications were implemented.
10.1 Entering text and defining parameters
1. Select > Create, >Special elements, >Text... .
The "Text input" mask is displayed.
2. Enter the text in the input line.
Example: Single line of text .
3. Mark the end of a line with \n.
Example: Multiple-line text\nMultiple-line text
\n.
4. Enter the text height, the width/height ratio and the line spac-
ing.
5. Enter "Angle of inclination".
0° corresponds to vertical characters; positive values incline
the text to the right.
6. Enter "angle of rotation".
0° corresponds to horizontal lines; positive values rotate the
font counter-clockwise.
"Entry via 2 points": The angle must be defined by means of
a start point and end point before the text is drawn.
7. Select the "font direction".
In case of "right", the characters are arranged next to each
other, and in case of "Bottom", they are arranged one below
the other.
8. Select the "reference point position".
Determines the position of the cursors in the text.
 
4‐70 Inserting or modifying text in geometries 2015-12-04 S523EN
Showing set text parameters
mask
Entering text in a single line
Entering several lines of text
Defining text parameters
Notes
■ Two true type fonts are available in TruTops CAD, which
have been developed especially for machining using
lasers: TC_LaserScript.TTF and TC_LaserSand.TTF.
■ Both true-type fonts are stored in the '…\TRUMPF.NET
\Data' directory during the installation. Furthermore links
to the true type fonts are stored in the font directory of
the Windows version used.
■ The font group (e.g. true type fonts) can be changed only
as long as the text is being created. You can change to a
font within the same group even if the text has already
been created.
9. Select Select font.
The "Select font" mask is displayed.
10. Select file type '*.FNT' or '*.TTF'.
11. Select the desired font.
12. Press OK.
The new font is shown in the "Set text parameters" mask.
Note
The text is assigned the > Characteristic property and auto-
matically displayed in orange.
13. Select "Mark text".
14. Select "From below", if the text "from below" should be
marked.
15. Either
Ø Select OK once all text parameters have been defined.
The text and the reference point are shown if a value
has been entered under "Angle of rotation".
or
Ø Select OK once all text parameters have been defined
and "Entry via 2 points" has been selected under "Angle
of rotation".
Ø Click on the start and end point.
The angle is now defined. The text and the reference
point are shown.
or
Ø Rotate the text using wheel mouse, position it and click. 
The text is drawn at the selected position.
Note
If the stored standard texts are selected, they are added in
the text row and the appropriate text is created after closing
the mask. Here, the standard texts must be previously
selected in the file information (> File >Properties).
 
S523EN 2015-12-04 Inserting or modifying text in geometries 4‐71
Selecting fonts (*.FNT) or
true type font file (*.TTF)
Marking text
Standard texts
16. Select >Create, >Special elements, >Text... .
17. Open the selection field behind the text entry line with ▼.
The "Text selection" mask is displayed.
18. Select text.
− Note: Drawing designation from the file information.
− User: Name from the file information.
− Part number: A text "###" is set using this function, which
is replaced with an unequivocal part number in the nest,
laser or punch. Only one such text can be created for
each part.
− Last text: The last selected text is set. A text can also be
searched for from a list of last texts.
19. Press OK.
The text is linked to the cursor.
20. Place the text at the desired position.
10.2 Modifying text parameters
Condition
■ The drawing contains texts.
1. Select > Modify, >Elements, >Text.
2. Click on the text.
3. Modify text parameters.
4. Select OK.
10.3 Mirroring FNT texts
FNT texts can be mirrored horizontally, vertically, centrally or
arbitrarily. Using > Mirror, >Horizontal as an example, the proce-
dure is described here.
1. Select > Modify, >Mirror, >Horizontal.
2. Click on the point on the horizontal mirror line, through which
the text is to be mirrored.
3. Click on or frame text.
The text is mirrored.
 
4‐72 Inserting or modifying text in geometries 2015-12-04 S523EN
10.4 Changing FNT text to TTF text (and
vice versa)
1. Select > Modify, >Elements, >Text.
2. Click on the text.
3. Select Select font.
The "Select font" mask is opened.
4. Select the desired font.
5. Press OK.
6. Press OK.
The text is modified.
10.5 Loading DXF, DWG and MI files with
TTF texts
1. Select > File, >Open....
The PDM browser opens.
2. Select the DXF/DWG file.
3. Press OK.
The "DXF/DWG loading options" mask is opened.
4. Select "Transfer texts".
5. Select the font selection arrow.
The "Select font" mask is opened.
6. Under "File type" select TTF files.
All TTF fonts are displayed.
7. Select the desired fonts.
8. Press OK.
9. Press OK.
The DXF/DWG file is loaded with the selected TTF font.
10.6 Creating texts with curvature
1. Select > Create, >Special elements, >Text....
The "Set text parameters" mask is opened.
2. Enter text.
3. Select the "Radius (clockwise)" check box.
 
S523EN 2015-12-04 Inserting or modifying text in geometries 4‐73
4. To modify the rotational direction of the text, select the drop
down arrow.
The "Define type of round text" mask is opened.
5. Select the rotational direction.
6. Press OK.
7. Enter the radius.
1 Center 2 Left (center) 3 Right (center)
Reference point position Fig. 57788
8. Select the reference point position.
9. Press OK.
The text is displayed on a curve.
10.7 Modifying TTF texts in Variants
1. Select > Variants, >Start.
The variant module is opened.
2. If variants have already been generated, select > Variants,
>Manage variants.
or
Ø If no variants have been generated as yet, select > Var-
iants, >Generate variants... .
Note
The following describes the procedural steps for a newly
generated variant.
3. Enter a designation for the variant.
4. Open the "Variant type" selection using the arrow.
5. Select Modify text.
6. Enter the new text in quotation marks, e. g "TruTops".
 
4‐74 Inserting or modifying text in geometries 2015-12-04 S523EN
or
Ø Enter a variable. These must be written in quotation
marks. It is possible to link variables to form long chains
out of several short ones.
7. Press OK.
8. Click on the TTF text to be modified.
The new text is adopted.
10.8 Creating your own text font
The bold.fnt, iso.fnt and isoprop.fnt fonts belong to the standard
scope of TruTops.
To create your own fonts, a reference file and a text font file
must be created.
The names of all of your font files are entered into the reference
file. The text font file itself contains the coordinates of all charac-
ters.
Example:
Condition
■ A program must be available for editing txt files such as
Notepad, Wordpad or Editor.
Character Name of reference file (pre-
scribed)
Name of font file (arbitrary) txt editor program (arbitrary)
L font.ref selfdef_font.fnt Notepad
Tab. 4-1
 
S523EN 2015-12-04 Inserting or modifying text in geometries 4‐75
A Cell height
B Character length
C Cell width
d Character height
Example sketch: Dimensions and coordinates of a character Fig. 29052
1. Open Notepad.
An empty page is displayed.
2. Enter 1000 in the first line.
The numbers up to 1000 are reserved for the standard fonts
of TruTops CAD.
3. Enter selfdef_font.fnt in the second line.
4. Select > File >Save as.
5. Under "Save in", change the 'Trumpf.net\Data' directory
(located on the Tops installation drive).
6. For the "File type", enter font.ref.
This file name cannot be changed. All additional fonts of
your own are entered in this file. Each font is given a con-
secutive number 1001, 1002... A file name must appear in
the row after each number.
7. Select Save.
The reference file is stored in the 'Trumpf.net\Data' directory.
8. In Notepad, select > File >New.
9. Make entries line by line as in the following example.
 
4‐76 Inserting or modifying text in geometries 2015-12-04 S523EN
Creating a reference file
Creating a font file
Example: Entries in Notepad (line
by line)
Meaning File format description
#~HEADER Beginning of first block Beginning of file header
selfdef_font.fnt Name of font file
40 Cell width
80 Cell height
70 Distance from zero point to the end
of character height
10 Start line of the character without
descender
1 Number of subsequent characters
0.5 Ratio of cell width to cell height
##~~ End of block End of file header
#~2 Beginning of character description Beginning of character
L Character to be displayed
1 Number of groups
#~2.1 Beginning of group
7 Number of subsequent points
M 10 10 Move to coordinate 10, 10
D10 60 Draw a line from the coordinate
10,10 to the coordinate 10,60
D15 60 etc.
D15 15 etc.
D30 15 etc.
D30 10 etc.
D10 10 etc.
C Close the contour
I~ End of group description
##~~ End of character description End of character
###~~~EOF End of file
Font file consisting of one character Tab. 4-2
10. Select >File >Save as.
11. Under "Save in", change the 'Trumpf.net\Data' directory.
12. Select "*.TXT" as 'File type'.
13. Enter eigene_schrift.fnt"File name".
14. Select >Save.
The font file with the letter L is created and can be used
after restarting TruTops CAD.
Tip
Creating a complete character set is a time-consuming pro-
cedure. Therefore, simply copy and rename a TruTops CAD
text font file. Then overwrite the entries in the file with your
own coordinates and data.
 
S523EN 2015-12-04 Inserting or modifying text in geometries 4‐77
11. Embossed texts
11.1 Creating embossed text
Embossed texts such as ID numbers can be created in TruTops
and machined on machines which support 10-station or 12-sta-
tion Multitools.
Embossed texts are created with a separate mask, are assigned
the "characteristic" property and are saved as templates (*.VLG).
The function must be switched on in the data.
Two tools are available for embossed texts:
■ Digital fonts.
■ Embossed text.
Condition
■ The fonts have been activated in the Data Management.
Note
TruTops has the numbers 0 to 9 and the alphabets A and E as
characters (only for 12-station multitool). They are saved as
tools. For example: 'PR_A.wzg'.
1. Select > Extras >Change data  >User >TruTops functionsDigi-
tal fonts  or Embossed text.
2. Select Exit.
3. Select > File >Execute...
The "Execute user-defined TruTops function" mask is dis-
played.
4. Select Digital fonts  or Embossed text.
The "Digital fonts input" mask is displayed.
5. Enter the distance between the characters, the segment
length and the digital text.
6. Press OK.
7. Enter a point or angle in the input line.
or
Ø Rotating the text using wheel mouse. 
8. Position the embossed text and left click.
The embossed text is drawn.
 
4‐78 Embossed texts 2015-12-04 S523EN
11.2 Using special characters
Example: A slash as a special character.
When entering the embossed text, a place holder must be used
instead of a slash.
The letter A can be used as a place holder, because in addition
to the numbers 0 to 9, the letters A and E are also available
(only for 12-station MultiTool). Example: 123A456 and not
123/456. In MultiTool the embossing punch "A" must be replaced
by the embossing punch "/".
If the embossed text display in TruTops matches the embossed
text, a slash must be drawn and saved as a tool.
1. Draw a slash.
The slash should correspond to the height of a digit.
2. Select > Auxiliary tools  >Displace zero point .
3. Click on the center of the slash.
4. Select > File >Save as.
The TruTops file browser is displayed.
5. Select '*.WZG' as the file type.
The TruTops file browser automatically goes to the directory
'…\TRUMPF.NET\Data\PunchTools'.
6. Save the drawing with the name PR_s.wzg.
7. Press OK.
"Save tool" is displayed.
8. Select "Punching tool".
9. Press OK.
10. Select Yes to overwrite the file.
The slash is saved under the file name 'PR_s.wzg'. S is the
place holder for the embossing text input.
11. Select >File >Executeembossed text.
12. Enter the distance between characters.
13. Enter the embossing text with place holder s and select OK.
14. Enter a point or angle in the input line.
or
Ø Rotate the text with the wheel mouse.
15. Position the embossed text and left click.
The embossed text is drawn and the s is displayed as a slash.
 
S523EN 2015-12-04 Embossed texts 4‐79
12. Comparing geometries with one
another (geometry comparator)
The elements of two drawings can be compared with one
another in TruTops CAD. The differences can also be displayed.
The drawings can be in the TruTops formats *.GEO and *.VLG
or in the foreign formats *.DXF, *.MI, *.IGS or *.GRA.
Notes
■ This function is not available in TruTops Tube.
■ Actions cannot be undone in the geometry comparator (no
Undo).
■ Reference drawing and comparison drawing are automatically
prepared prior to the inspection.
12.1 Opening and closing geometry
comparator 
1. Select > Assistants >Start comparison.
The geometry comparator is opened and the function
browser is adapted.
2. Select > Assistants >Compare >Exit comparison.
The current drawing is displayed again.
12.2 Comparing a reference drawing and a
comparison drawing with one another
Note
If a drawing is created or loaded in the "normal" mode and the
geometry comparator is then opened, TruTops CAD automatically
selects the current drawing as reference drawing.
1. Either
Ø Select >File >Open reference.
Ø Select the file format and change the directory if required.
Ø Mark the desired file and select OK.
 
4‐80 Comparing geometries with one another (geometry
comparator)
2015-12-04 S523EN
Opening the geometry
comparator
Closing geometry
comparator
Loading reference drawing
or
Ø Open the list of last loaded files in the mask head with
▼.
The path and the name of the reference drawing is displayed
in the mask head.
2. Select > File >Open comparison.
3. Select the file format and change the directory if required.
4. Mark the desired file and select OK.
The comparison drawing is linked to the mouse.
Notes
■ The reference drawing and the comparison drawing must
be congruent, on top of each other. The position of the
comparison drawing can be corrected using Move com-
parison part and Rotate comparison part (moving and
rotating are self-holding.) The reference drawing cannot
be moved.
■ Comparison drawings can be loaded as often as desired.
Each comparison drawing replaces the previous one.
When a new reference drawing is loaded, TruTops CAD
removes the comparison drawing.
5. Enter the target point or angle of the comparison drawing or
position the comparison drawing with the mouse.
6. Select > Assistants >Compare >Reference, comparison color
or >color of shared elements .
7. Select color.
− Reference color: highlights deviating elements in the ref-
erence drawing.
− Comparison color: highlights deviating elements in the
comparison drawing.
− Color of shared elements: Displays all shared elements
of the drawings in the selected color.
8. Select > Assistants >Compare >Calculate >Parameters.
The "Compare drawings" mask is displayed.
9. Select "Consider color" and/or "Consider line type".
10. Press OK.
11. Under "Execute", select Start to start the geometry compara-
tor.
or
Ø Select >Assistants >Compare >Calculate >Start.
The elements of both the drawings are compared. If the compar-
ison drawing is moved using > Move or > Rotate, the comparison
is automatically updated.
 
S523EN 2015-12-04 Comparing geometries with one another (geometry
comparator)
4‐81
Loading comparison drawing
Setting comparison colors
Extending comparison to
line color and line type
12.3 Merging a reference drawing with a
comparison drawing
Ø Select >Assistants >Compare >Merge.
The two parts are merged into one.
12.4 Deleting a reference drawing or a
comparison drawing
Ø Select >Assistants >Compare >Delete reference part  or
>comparison part.
 
4‐82 Comparing geometries with one another (geometry
comparator)
2015-12-04 S523EN
13. Prepare geometries for editing
When geometries are drawn, the machining and sequence order
can already be determined with the preparation.
For loading and editing of the geometry in TruTops Laser, the
preparation is taken into account.
13.1 Loading and preparing geometries
1. Select > File >Prepare.
The file browser opens.
2. If need be, change over to the directory in which the draw-
ings are to be managed.
3. Select the desired file.
or
Ø Enter the file names.
4. Press OK.
The drawing with the preparation is automatically displayed.
Explanation of the colors and symbols for the preparation:
Color Symbol/line type Explanation
Green Star Start point of the preparation on the contour
Green Line type: solid Direction for the processing
Yellow Line type: solid Positioning paths between the contours
Blue Line type: solid Positioning path for outer contour or for the
end point
Red Star Start point of the machining
Explanation of the colors and symbols for the preparation Tab. 4-3
13.2 Modifying the processing sequence
of prepared geometries
The processing sequence within the parts can be modified via
>Positioning sequence  or > Rearrange:
With >Rearrange, single contours can be rearranged and posi-
tions for insertions can be preset. With > Rearrange, the existing
(possibly optimized) processing sequence is retained. Only the
selected contour is set at another place in the processing.
>Positioning sequence  is used to globally rearrange whole
groups or all contours.
 
S523EN 2015-12-04 Prepare geometries for editing 4‐83
In both cases, linear positioning paths are created.
Notes
■ If a new suggestion for the preparation is calculated after
the modification of the processing sequence, all modifica-
tions will be lost.
■ Always process outer contours last.
1. Load and prepare geometry.
2. Select > Assistants >Prepare >Modify position sequence .
3. Click on the contour from which the positioning sequence
should be modified.
4. Click on further contours or box them in with the mouse in
the sequence in which they should be machined.
5. In order to automatically arrange the rest of the positioning
sequence: select > Assistants >Prepare >Positioning
sequence path optimized .
6. Select End.
Notes
■ If a new suggestion for the preparation is calculated after
the modification of the processing sequence, all modifica-
tions will be lost.
■ Always process outer contours last.
7. Load and prepare geometry.
8. Select > Assistants >Prepare >Rearranging at the beginning .
9. Click on the contour.
Set the selected object at the beginning of the machining.
The remaining processing sequence remains unchanged.
Notes
■ If a new suggestion for the preparation is calculated after
the modification of the processing sequence, all modifica-
tions will be lost.
■ Always process outer contours last.
10. Load and prepare geometry.
11. Select >Assistants >Prepare >Rearranging to the end .
12. Click on the contour.
The selected object is set at the end of the machining. The
remaining processing sequence remains unchanged.
Notes
■ This function can be used to machine a particular contour
before or after another one. The rest of the processing
will not be recalculated afterwards.
■ If a new suggestion for the preparation is calculated after
the modification of the processing sequence, all modifica-
tions will be lost.
 
4‐84 Prepare geometries for editing 2015-12-04 S523EN
Freely modifying the
processing sequence
Setting a particular contour
at the start of the
processing
Setting a particular contour
at the end of the processing
Machining particular
contours before or after
others
■ Always process outer contours last.
13. Load and prepare geometry.
14. Select >Assistants >Prepare >Rearranging before  or > Rear-
ranging after.
15. Click on the contour before/after which the other contour is
to be arranged.
16. Click on the contour after/before which the other contour is
to be arranged.
The current, possibly optimized processing sequence remains
and only the selected contour is set at the desired position in
the processing sequence.
13.3 Modifying the start point for the
machining
This function can use to do the following:
■ Manually shift the start point of the machining preparation on
the contour.
■ Invert the direction of machining.
■ Recalculate the start point.
Note
If a new suggestion for the preparation is calculated after the
modification of the processing sequence, all modifications will be
lost.
1. Load and prepare geometry.
2. Select> Assistants >Prepare >Displace start point .
3. Click on the desired start point on the contour or box it in
using the mouse.
4. Select End.
The existing processing sequence remains and only the
selected start point is set at the desired position.
5. Select > Invert start point .
6. Click on the contour whose machining is to be inverted.
7. Select > Calculate start point .
All start points will be recalculated.
13.4 Selecting preferred direction
For the preparation of the geometry, the preferred direction can
be determined (Execution) in X or Y direction.
 
S523EN 2015-12-04 Prepare geometries for editing 4‐85
Shifting the start point as
desired
Inverting the start point
Recalculating all new start
points
Note
If a new suggestion for the preparation is calculated after the
modification of the processing sequence, all modifications will
be lost.
1. Load and prepare geometry.
2. Select > Assistants >Prepare >Calculation >Parameter.
The "Prepare parameters" mask is displayed.
3. Move the controller in the X direction: the contours will be
machined by row.
or
Ø Move the controller in the Y direction: the contours will
be machined by column.
13.5 Determining the contour start
This function can use to do the following:
■ Approach to a corner = tangential approach.
■ Approach to an element = vertical approach.
Note
If a new suggestion for the preparation is calculated after the
modification of the processing sequence, all modifications will
be lost.
1. Load and prepare geometry.
2. Select > Assistants >Prepare >Calculation >Parameter.
The "Prepare parameters" mask is displayed.
3. Select"Contour start""Corner" or "Element".
4. Select > Assistants >Prepare >Calculation >Start.
The contour start is shifted to the selected position.
13.6 Prefer contours
It is advisable to machine those contours first that are in danger
of tilting.
Note
If a new suggestion for the preparation is calculated after the
modification of the processing sequence, all modifications will
be lost.
1. Load and prepare geometry.
 
4‐86 Prepare geometries for editing 2015-12-04 S523EN
2. Select > Assistants >Prepare >Calculation >Parameter.
The "Prepare parameters" mask is displayed.
3. To determine the maximum contents of surfaces for contours
to be processed first:
Ø Select Determine via picking .
Ø Click on the contour.
Ø Select >Start.
or
Ø At "Area until", enter the maximum surface that the con-
tours to be machined first can go up to.
Ø Press OK.
13.7 Recalculating the preparation
If manual modifications are made on the preparation and these
are reset or settings are to be modified (for example, preferred
direction, contour start...), then a new suggestion for the prepara-
tion can be calculated.
1. Load and prepare geometry.
2. Select > Assistants >Prepare >Calculation >Start.
The preparation of all contours will be recalculated.
13.8 Saving prepared geometries
1. Load and prepare geometry.
2. Either
Ø Select >File >Save.
or
Ø Select >File >Save as...-
The file browser opens. This displays the '*.geo' file for-
mat; the file format can not be modified.
Ø If need be, change the file name.
Ø Press OK.
The geometry will be saved as '*.geo' with preparation.
For loading and editing of the single part in TruTops Laser, the
preparation is taken into account.
 
S523EN 2015-12-04 Prepare geometries for editing 4‐87
14. Processing films
14.1 Film separation
With the film separation function, individual elements or contours
can be defined as film separating. They are then processed with
a special tool for separating films in TruTops Punch.
1. Select > Create, >Film separation, >Element or > Contour.
2. Click on individual element or contour.
The element is displayed in red and has the characteristic
"film separating".
3. Select > Remove, if the characteristic has to be removed
again.
14.2 Film peeling assistant
In order to make the peeling off of films easier, a special "peel-
ing contour" in the shape of a row of arches which form sharp
tips between each other can be made with a film slitting tool. In
doing so the film detaches from the sheet at the end of the tip.
The peeling contour is automatically integrated in the contour
and receives the characteristic "film separating". The contour is
then processed with the film slitting tool in TruTops Punch.
The set standard parameters are suitable for a variety of film
types. They can be adapted for special cases (> Create, >Film
separation, >Parameter...):
■ Height: peeling the film off can be made easier with a larger
tip height, which makes it possible to peel it off with protec-
tive gloves.
■ Angle: sharper angles lead to the film tips being withdrawn
more strongly. Tips which are too narrow however may lead
to premature tearing!
■ Lower radius: prevents the film from being torn in the direc-
tion of peeling.
■ Upper radius: can prevent scratching on very sensitive
material surfaces. In such a case, values between 0.01 and
max. 0.10 mm should be selected. The larger the radius, the
less effective the peeling assistant is.
■ Quantity: several tips increase process reliability.
Notes
■ The peeling contour should not be placed too far from the
margins of the remaining contours. The contour can be
 
4‐88 Processing films 2015-12-04 S523EN
turned using the mouse wheel when it is hanging on the
mouse pointer.
■ Parameter modifications remain in force until they are reset
via the Default button.
1. Load part.
2. Select > Create, >Film separation, >Peeling assistant.
The peeling contour is now hanging on the mouse pointer.
Fig. 62046
3. Place the peeling contour on the desired spot and click on
the left mouse button.
4. Press End.
 
S523EN 2015-12-04 Processing films 4‐89
 
4‐90 Processing films 2015-12-04 S523EN
Chapter 5
Variants
1 Variants 5‐3
1.1 Generating geometries in different variants
(optional)
5‐3
Starting/ending the variant module 5‐4
Generating variants 5‐4
Undoing variants 5‐6
Executing variants 5‐6
Selecting an overview of the variants 5‐7
Allocating a variant to an element or a
bending
5‐7
Adopting element selection of an existing
variant
5‐7
Example 5‐8
1.2 Working with variables and reference ele-
ments
5‐9
Creating and editing variables 5‐9
Importing variables 5‐11
Exporting variables 5‐11
Delete variables 5‐12
 
S523EN 2015-12-04 Variants 5‐1
Set reference element 5‐12
Remove reference element 5‐13
Show reference element 5‐13
1.3 Manage variants 5‐13
Positioning variants 5‐13
Creating new variants 5‐14
Copying variants 5‐14
Modifying variants 5‐14
Deleting variants 5‐14
Renumbering variants 5‐14
Executing variants several times 5‐15
Saving geometry with variant as *.GMV 5‐15
Exporting variant as *.GEO 5‐16
Exporting variants to Excel 5‐16
Importing variants from Excel 5‐17
 
5‐2 Variants 2015-12-04 S523EN
1. Variants
1.1 Generating geometries in different
variants (optional)
Generated geometries can be flexibly modified with the help of
variants in TruTops CAD. The modifications are controlled by
means of pre-defined variables and expressions.
The following key words are integrated in the variant module.
They cannot be defined as variables.
abs(x) Provides the absolute value of a number
acos(x) Inverse cosine of x
acosh(x) Hyperbolic inverse cosine of x
and Logical operation
asin(x) Arc sine of x
asinh(x) Hyperbolic arc sine x
atan(x) Arc tangent of x
atan2(y,x) atan(y/x)
cos(x) Cosine of x
cosh(x) Hyperbolic cosine of x
degrees(x) Conversion of arc dimensions into degrees
e The mathematical constant e == 2.7182...
exp(x) ex
fabs(x) Absolute value of the floating point number x
false Incorrect
False Incorrect
floor(x) The value of x rounded down as floating point
number
fmod(x,y) The value of x module y as floating point num-
ber
frexp(x) Provides Mantissa (numbers before the comma
of an logarithm) and exponent of x as pair (m,
e). Here, m is a floating point number and e is
a whole number, so that x = m*2e.
hypot(x,y) Euclidean distance _x² + y²
int(x) Converts a floating point number into a whole
number
lexp(x,i) x*2i
log(x) Natural logarithm of x (base e)
log10(x) Logarithm of x base 10
max(x) max(1,2,3) = 3 provides the largest element
min(x) min(1,2,3) = 1 provides the smallest element
not Logical operation
or Logical operation
Pi The mathematical constant pi = 3.1415
pow(x,y) x hoch y
 
S523EN 2015-12-04 Variants 5‐3
radians(x) Conversion of degrees into arc dimensions
round(x) Rounding a floating point number
sin(x) Sine of x
sinh(x) Hyperbolic sine of x
sqrt(x) Square root of x
tan(x) Tangent of x
tanh(x) Hyperbolic tangent of x
true true
True true
+ Addition
- Subtraction
* Multiplication
/ Division
Key words Tab. 5-1
Starting/ending the variant module
Note
ive, the relevant icon bar can be opened (under > View).
1. Select > Variants, >Start.
The variant module is displayed.
2. Select > Variants >Exit variants.
The variant module is closed.
Generating variants
Variants are individual modifications dependent on variables and
expressions. Variants can be single parts or entire assemblies.
1. Create or load a drawing.
2. Select > Variants >Generate variant.
The "Variant data" mask is opened.
3. Enter a "designation" for the variant.
If no designation is entered, the designation of the variant
type is automatically adopted.
4. Either
Ø Enter "Condition". The variant will only be executed when
the condition is met.
 
5‐4 Variants 2015-12-04 S523EN
Starting the variant module
Ending the variant module
or
Ø Select Variables.
Ø Mark the desired variable.
Ø Select OK (see section "Working with variables").
The selected variable is adopted.
Generating conditions: true true
True true
false Incorrect
False Incorrect
Comparison: < smaller than
<= less than or
equal to
> greater then
>= greater than or
equal to
== (exactly) equal
!= Not the same
Logical operators: and and
or or
Conditions Tab. 5-2
5. Open the selection field with ▼.
6. Select "Variant type".
− Move: moving elements and bendings in X and Y direc-
tion
− Rotate: rotating elements and bendings around an angle.
− Mirror: mirroring elements and bendings horizontally or
vertically on a center or two points
− Move copy: creating and moving the desired number of
copies of the elements and bendings.
− Rotate copy: creating and rotating the desired number of
copies of the elements and bendings.
− Mirror copy: creating and mirroring the desired number of
copies of the elements and bendings.
− Stretch: stretching elements and bendings horizontally,
vertically or in both directions
− Delete: deleting selected elements or bendings
− Delete selection: selecting and deleting elements and
bendings according to the color, line type and element
type
− Modify rounding: entering a new radius for roundings
− Modify circle: entering a new diameter for circles
− Modify text: Enter the new text content in quotation
marks, e.g. "TruTops".
− Modify bending angle: entering a new bending angle
 
S523EN 2015-12-04 Variants 5‐5
− Set variable: makes it possible to set a variable through
a variant. The variant requires the name and the expres-
sion for the variable (similar to setting in variable man-
agement).
− Set property: sets a property of the drawing, e.g. material
ID. This is useful when values are read in from a variable
file. The text must be in quotation marks since it will oth-
erwise be treated as a text variable.
− Cancel variants: Enables canceling of variants. Any text
can be defined, which is output during cancellation. This
variant can be used for checking.
− Set template: Adding a *.vlg file at the specified position.
− Close contour: Closes the selected contour elements (by
specifying a gap to be closed maximally).
7. Either
Ø Further parameters can be entered depending on the
selected variant type: Left click in the input field and
enter the desired value or the mathematical formula.
Example: randx - 20 (variable name - old value) or randy
- loch.cy (border Y - center Y of reference hole). The old
value can be entered either as value or reference here.
or
Ø Select Variables.
Ø Mark the desired variable.
Ø Select OK (see section "Working with variables").
The selected variable is adopted.
8. Press OK.
9. One after the other, click on or box in all elements or bend-
ings whose variants are to be allocated.
Selected elements are displayed in magenta.
10. Press OK.
Undoing variants
Ø Select >Variants >Undo step  or > Undo all.
The last executed variants or all the variants so far are undone.
With >Undo all, the program returns to its original state.
Executing variants
Ø Select >Variants >Execute step  or > Execute all.
The last undone or all undone variants are executed again.
 
5‐6 Variants 2015-12-04 S523EN
Selecting an overview of the variants
1. Open the selection field with ▼ in the toolbar.
All variants of the drawing are displayed.
2. Mark the variant.
The variant is displayed in the selection and all the variants
before it are executed.
or
Ø Mark Final condition.
All variants are executed.
Allocating a variant to an element or a
bending
Condition
■ One or more variants have been created and one variant is
active.
1. Select > Variants >Select elements.
2. One after the other, click on or box in the elements in the
drawing.
Selected elements are displayed in magenta.
3. Press OK.
Adopting element selection of an existing
variant
Condition
■ One or more variants have been created.
Note
TruTops makes a note of the adoption, i.e. if all elements of the
previous variant are adopted and the selection of this variant is
modified later, the selection of the current variant also changes.
1. To execute a series of actions on the same elements: select
>Variants >Adopting elements.
2. If the previous variant contains copied elements, the "Trans-
fer elements from predecessor" mask is displayed.
 
S523EN 2015-12-04 Variants 5‐7
3. Select "Element selection", "Originals".
Only original elements of the previous variant are adopted.
or
Ø Select "Element selection", "Copies".
Only copied elements of the previous variant are
adopted.
Example
Fig. 51516
1. As "Name", enter teilx.
2. For "Expression", enter 500.
3. Select Set.
4. Enter the further variables.
Variable name Variable expression
teily 200
klx 30
kly 30
Tab. 5-3
5. As "designation", enter long.
6. As "Condition", enter true.
7. As "Variant type", select Stretch.
8. Select "Horizontal".
9. Select variable.
10. Mark the desired variable teilx.
 
5‐8 Variants 2015-12-04 S523EN
Create variables (manage
variables)
Generating variants
11. Press OK.
Teilx is applied
12. After teilx, enter -300.
13. Box in elements that are to be stretched in the X direction.
The elements that are boxed in are displayed in magenta.
14. Press OK.
The geometry is stretched in the X direction.
15. Follow the same steps for the Y direction.
16. As "Designation", enter klinkx1.
17. As "Condition", enter true.
18. As "Variant type", select Stretch.
19. Select "Horizontal".
20. Select variable.
21. Mark the desired variable klx.
22. Press OK.
Klx is applied
23. After klx, enter -30.
24. Box in the notch element.
The element that is boxed in is displayed in magenta.
25. Press OK.
The notch is stretched in the X direction.
26. As "Designation", enter klinkx2.
27. As "Condition", enter true.
28. As "Variant type", select Stretch.
29. Select "Horizontal".
30. Enter - (klx-30).
31. Box in the notch element.
The element that is boxed in is displayed in magenta.
32. Press OK.
The notch is stretched in the X direction.
1.2 Working with variables and reference
elements
Creating and editing variables
Note
Variables that have no value can not be executed in variants.
1. Select > Variables >Manage variables.
 
S523EN 2015-12-04 Variants 5‐9
Creating variables
The "Variables" mask appears.
Fig. 41125en
2. Enter the designation for the variable at "Name".
3. Enter "Expression".
The expression can consist of simple digits and include arith-
metic operations or mathematical functions. Other variables
can also be used in the expression, but these have to be in
the list above.
Example:
Name: fakt2
Expression: fakt1*3 (fakt1=5)
Value: 15
Tab. 5-4
Name: fakt3
Expression: fakt4
Value: - (no value)
Example for variant without value Tab. 5-5
4. To use a reference element in an expression: select Refer-
ence (see "Working with reference elements").
5. The "Define reference value" mask is displayed.
6. Open the selection field with ▼.
7. Select the name of the reference value from the list.
8. Select the "desired value".
Values that are not permitted for the selected reference ele-
ment are grayed out.
 
5‐10 Variants 2015-12-04 S523EN
9. Press OK.
The reference is attached to the expression.
10. Select Set.
The inputs are applied in the above list.
11. Mark the variable in the selection.
Only the expression of one variable can be modified.
12. Modify the expression for the variable.
13. Select Set.
The modification will be applied; the position of the variable
in the list will be kept.
14. Mark variables.
15. Use the arrow keys to shift the variables upwards or down-
wards ((see "Fig. 41125en", pg. 5 ‐10)).
Importing variables
If external variables are to be imported (e.g., from SAP), the
structure of these variables must correspond to that of TruTops
CAD variables.
Conditions
■ The files are ASCII files.
■ The entry per variable is: variable = expression (e.g., x=a+b).
1. Select "List of variables" Import if an available list with varia-
bles is to be imported.
The file browser opens.
2. If need be, change over to the directory in which the varia-
bles are managed.
3. Mark the list with variables.
4. Press OK.
The new variables are applied and are placed at the start of the
selection.
Exporting variables
1. Select "List of variables" Export if variables are to be
exported.
The file browser opens.
 
S523EN 2015-12-04 Variants 5‐11
Modifying variable
Modifying the order of the
variables
2. If need be, change over to the directory in which the varia-
bles are managed.
3. Select the desired file.
or
Ø Enter the file names.
4. Press OK.
Delete variables
1. Mark the variables to be deleted.
2. Select Delete.
The variable will be deleted.
Set reference element
A name is assigned to an element or a bending with a reference
element. This reference can then be used for variants for condi-
tions and parameters or for expressions of variables.
Reference elements can be used to use values of an element
(e.g., radius, length) or a bending in an expression. To do this,
you only have to enter the name of the reference element fol-
lowed by a point, followed an identifier.
■ sx: X coordinate of the starting point.
■ sy: Y coordinate of the starting point.
■ ex: X coordinate of the end point.
■ ey: Y coordinate of the end point.
■ cx: X coordinate of the center.
■ cy: Y coordinate of the center.
■ r: radius.
■ d: diameter.
■ l: length.
Example: to receive the length of the reference element with the
name "Line", enter the expression Line.I.
Condition
■ A drawing is loaded.
1. Select > Variants >Set reference element .
The "Define reference element" mask is displayed.
2. Enter name for reference element.
3. Press OK.
 
5‐12 Variants 2015-12-04 S523EN
4. Click on the reference element in the drawing.
The reference element receives the "attribute" property and is
shown in orange if Highlight characteristics  has been selected.
Remove reference element
1. Select > Variants >Remove reference element  if the reference
element is to be removed again.
2. Click on the reference element.
The "attribute" property will be deleted at the element.
Show reference element
Condition
■ A drawing with set reference elements is loaded.
1. Select > Variants >Show reference element .
2. Click on the reference elements one after the other.
or
Ø Select All to display all reference elements.
The names of the reference elements are displayed.
1.3 Manage variants
Positioning variants
1. Select > Variants, >Manage variants.
The "Variants" mask is displayed.
2. Mark the desired variant in the list.
The ID of the current variant is displayed under the selection
field.
3. The position of the variants in the list can be modified using
the arrows.
The position of the variant corresponds to the sequence in which
the variant is performed.
 
S523EN 2015-12-04 Variants 5‐13
Creating new variants
Ø Select Generate.
The "Variant data" mask is displayed. The new variant is set at
the highest position. Elements can be allocated for this later (see
section "Allocating variants to an element".
Copying variants
1. Mark any variant.
2. Select Copy.
The copied variant has the same parameters or conditions and
the same elements selection as the original variant.
Modifying variants
1. Mark the variant to be modified.
The "Variant data" mask is displayed.
2. Modify any parameter.
3. Press OK.
Deleting variants
1. Mark the variant to be deleted.
2. Select Delete.
3. Press OK.
The last selected variant is adopted.
Renumbering variants
1. Select > Variants, >Start.
The variant control is opened.
2. Select > Variants, >Manage variants.
The "Variants" mask showing the available variants is
opened.
 
5‐14 Variants 2015-12-04 S523EN
3. Select New IDs  to renumber the variant IDs consecutively.
The IDs are numbered consecutively from the top down.
Executing variants several times
1. Select Loop.
The "Variant data" mask is displayed.
2. Enter the required parameter.
Example: Loop variable counter runs from 1 to 25.
3. Press OK.
The loop is introduced in the "Variants" mask in place of the var-
iant that was last marked. The previously marked variant is
placed in the loop.
All variants belonging to the loop are moved in closer together.
Further variants can be allocated to the loop or can be removed
from it using the arrow. The loop is dissolved through Dissolve.
Loops can also be placed in loops. Loops can thus be nested in
any desired manner.
Saving geometry with variant as *.GMV
A GMV file contains the geometry and the variants. It is inde-
pendent of a Geo file that has been used as the basis. No
geometry preparation is made when saving the file. GMV files
cannot be nested or further processed.
Condition
■ A variant has been created or modified.
1. Select > File >Save as.
The file browser opens.
2. Select '*.GMV' as the file type.
3. Enter the file name (without file extension).
4. Press OK.
The drawing is saved as a geometry with variant in the '*.GMV'
format. There are no other saving options, i.e. no other formats.
 
S523EN 2015-12-04 Variants 5‐15
Exporting variant as *.GEO
Condition
■ A variant (*.GMV) has been loaded.
Note
Intermediate statuses can also be saved. To export the end sta-
tus, it is important that all variants be executed up to the end
status.
1. Select > File >Export Geo...
The TruTops CAD file browser is displayed.
2. Go to the directory in which the '*.GEO' file is to be exported.
3. Change the file name if required.
4. Press OK.
The file is saved in the '*.GEO' format.
Exporting variants to Excel
The list of variables can be exported from a GMV file into Excel,
modified there and re-imported into TruTops CAD as a new
drawing variant.
Conditions
■ A '*.GMV' has been loaded.
■ The Excel program is installed.
1. Select > File >Execute...
The "Execute user-defined TruTops functions" mask is dis-
played.
2. Select GMV → XLS .
The file browser opens.
3. Save the file under the current '*.GMV' name.
or
Ø Enter the new name under "File name".
4. Press OK.
The file is saved in '*.XLS' format.
5. Select > File >File-Browser.
or
Ø Select >Start >Programs >TRUMPF.NET >PDM Browser.
 
5‐16 Variants 2015-12-04 S523EN
Saving a file in XLS format
Opening an XLS file
6. Go to the directory containing the '*.XLS' file.
7. Double-click on the '*.XLS' file.
The XLS file opens. The designations of the variables are
adopted directly from the GMV file.
Fig. 44141de
8. To create further variants, copy line 2.
9. Paste the copied line repeatedly into the following lines until
you have the desired number of variants.
1 Designation of the variables
2 mastergmv: storage location
of the output file (*.GMV)
3 outputgeo: storage location of
the new geometries (*.GEO,
by default the same directory
which contains the GMV file
as well).
Fig. 44139EN
10. Go to the copied line to be modified.
11. Enter new value.
12. Change the "file name" and/or path of the storage location
for each new variant in the "outputgeo" column (3), e. g. add
an ascending number to the file name.
13. Save the file.
14. Close Excel.
Importing variants from Excel
1. Select > File >Execute...
 
S523EN 2015-12-04 Variants 5‐17
Creating further variants
Creating a *.GEO from *.XLS
The "Execute user-defined TruTops functions" mask is dis-
played.
2. Select XLS → GEO .
The file browser opens.
3. Double-click on the desired file ('*.XLS').
From the '*.XLS' file, a new '*.GEO' file is created for each
variant and a log with all variants is displayed.
Variant protocol Fig. 44140
4. Double-click the desired drawing in the "outputgeo" column in
order to show the generated drawings.
TruTops CAD opens the Geo Viewer with the selected GEO.
5. Close Geo Viewer with OK.
6. Select > File >Open to open the drawing in TruTops CAD.
7. Go to the directory containing the '*.GEO' file.
8. Mark the drawing and select OK
 
5‐18 Variants 2015-12-04 S523EN
Opening a variant with Geo
Viewer
Chapter 6
Bending
1 Bending lines 6‐3
1.1 Generating bending lines 6‐3
1.2 Assigning bending information 6‐4
1.3 Modifying bending lines 6‐4
1.4 Inverting bending lines 6‐4
1.5 Marking bending lines 6‐5
1.6 Removing the bending line marking 6‐5
1.7 Modify unfolding 6‐5
1.8 Generating bending notches 6‐6
2 Bending tools 6‐7
2.1 Transferring bending tools 6‐7
2.2 Restricting the selection of bending tools 6‐7
2.3 Drawing bending tool 6‐7
Modifying the bending tool 6‐8
Drawing an upper tool 6‐8
Drawing a lower tool 6‐9
Drawing holder 6‐11
 
S523EN 2015-12-04 Bending 6‐1
Drawing Z tool 6‐11
Drawing an adapter 6‐12
Drawing front view of a horn tool 6‐12
3 Bending profiles 6‐13
3.1 Unfolding a bending profile 6‐13
3.2 Creating a bending profile 6‐13
3.3 Creating a profile as auxiliary geometry 6‐14
3.4 Generating bumping (round bends) 6‐14
3.5 Showing material 6‐15
4 Creating profiles in the profile editor 6‐16
4.1 Working in the profile editor 6‐16
Opening the profile editor 6‐16
4.2 Opening and saving profiles 6‐17
Opening a profile 6‐17
Saving a profile 6‐17
4.3 Creating a profile 6‐17
Sketch 6‐18
Profile table - entering angle and segment
length
6‐18
Profile table - entering angle and delta X
or delta Y
6‐19
Profile table - entering delta X and delta Y 6‐20
4.4 Modifying profiles 6‐21
4.5 Deleting profiles 6‐22
4.6 Deleting an element 6‐22
4.7 Displaying the dimensioning 6‐22
4.8 Profile table 6‐23
Normal bending 6‐24
Round bending 6‐25
Folding 6‐26
 
6‐2 Bending 2015-12-04 S523EN
1. Bending lines
1.1 Generating bending lines
Notes
■ Bending lines are automatically adapted to the contour.
■ If the Pre-/final bending  bending technique has been
selected, then the pre-angle applies for the pre-bend. The
opening angle corresponds to the final angle.
■ The bending radius is important for the display. If the notches
are not large enough, then a small bending radius has to be
defined since otherwise there could be problems when creat-
ing the bending part (insofar as this edge is not struck).
■ Geometries may not include drawing components except for
unfolding and for bending lines. If external formats such as
IGS or DXF are imported, drawing frames, views, fonts, etc.,
have to be removed from the drawing.
■ In addition to material and thickness, the selection when
choosing bending tools can be additionally restricted by a
TruTops Bend tool list.
■ Rule of thumb for bending radius : The notch and the
sheet thickness should be larger than the bending radius.
1. Select > Bend, >Bending, >Create.
The "Define bending line" mask is displayed.
2. Enter the corresponding values.
− "Bending radius": The bending radius is limited to the tool
radius.
− "Bend factor": Is not converted for acute angles.
Tip
If TruTops CAD is connected to a TruTops Bend database,
the Auto button can be used to automatically determine the
bending radius and bend factor for the bending line.
3. Select upper and lower tool.
Ø Click on the arrow button.
Ø Select the desired tool from the list.
or
Ø Press Catalogue.
The tool catalog is opened.
Ø Select the desired tool.
4. Select "Bending type", "Bending technique", and "Bending
method".
 
S523EN 2015-12-04 Bending lines 6‐3
− Folding (bending type): enter 180° for opening angle and
pre-angle.
5. Press OK.
6. Click on, for example, the line drawn in cyan.
The line is defined as bending line and shown by the program in
green.
1.2 Assigning bending information
Bending information is not adopted. It must be allocated. Excep-
tion: files in '*.MI' format from SheetAdvisor.
Note
In TruTops CAD, files can also be loaded in the formats '*.DXF',
'*.IGS', '*.MI', or '*.GRA'. The bend factors used when creating
the model must be entered here and later converted in TruTops
Bend. The upper and lower tools must likewise be entered here.
1. Select > File >Properties.
2. Enter part ID, material ID, material thickness etc.
The latter two must be entered.
3. Press OK.
4. Select > File >Save.
or
Ø Select >File >Save as  if a name is to given to the pro-
gram.
1.3 Modifying bending lines
1. Select > Bending,>Bend >Modify.
2. Click on the bending line to be modified.
3. Enter the modifications in the "Define bending lines" mask.
4. Press OK.
The modifications are accepted.
1.4 Inverting bending lines
1. Load bending part.
2. Select > Bend, >Bending, >Invert.
 
6‐4 Bending lines 2015-12-04 S523EN
3. Click the bending line to be inverted.
The bending line is inverted.
1.5 Marking bending lines
This function can be used to mark the ends or the entire bend-
ing lines. This is necessary to be able to correct bending lines
that are unfavorably located in the part.
1. Select > Bend >Bending >Mark.
The "Mark bending lines" mask is displayed.
2. Select the length of the marking or the entire bending line.
3. Press OK.
4. Click on the bending line.
or
Ø Select All if all the bending lines are to be marked.
The selected bending lines are displayed in orange.
1.6 Removing the bending line marking
This function is used to reset the marking of bending lines.
1. Select > Bend >Bending >Remove marking.
2. Click on the bending line whose marking is to be removed.
The bending line marking is removed and the line is shown in
green.
1.7 Modify unfolding
For each bending line a new bend deduction can be entered.
The drawing will be automatically adjusted.
1. Select Modify unfolding.
The screen called "Modify unfolding" will be displayed.
2. Mark the required bending line.
3. Enter a new bend deduction under "New".
 
S523EN 2015-12-04 Bending lines 6‐5
Entering a new bend
deduction
4. Select Set.
The new bend deduction will be shown in the list of bending
lines.
5. Press OK.
The unfolding (developed view) will be recalculated and the
drawing will be modified.
6. In the "Modify unfolding" screen, select "Combine bendings".
All bends with the same bending angle and lower tool will be
combined.
7. Select "Set automatic bending notches".
If this checkbox is set, the developed view will be changed
and, at the same time, a bending notch will be set.
1.8 Generating bending notches
Bends on sharp corners and bends that do not end exactly at a
contour can be notched with this function.
1. Select Bending notches.
2. Click on the bending line.
Depending on whether a notch is necessary or not (decided by
TruTops), corners or contours where the bending line ends are
notched.
 
6‐6 Bending lines 2015-12-04 S523EN
Join bendings
Set automatic bending
notches
2. Bending tools
2.1 Transferring bending tools
Tool data can be transferred from one bending to other bend-
ings.
1. Select > Bend >Bending >Adopt tools.
2. Click on the bending line from which tools are to be transfer-
red (reference bending line).
3. Click on the bending lines which are to obtain the machining
of the reference bending line.
or
Ø Press All.
The data is modified for all bending lines.
2.2 Restricting the selection of bending
tools
The facility for filtering by material can be switched off.
1. Select > Bend, >Bending, >Create....
2. To select a tool, select the drop down arrow.
The "Upper tools/lower tools" mask is opened.
3. Select the "Restrict selection" check box.
The "Filter selection" mask is opened.
4. Deselect the "Material" check box, if the selection is only to
be sorted by list.
5. Press OK.
6. Select a tool.
The tool is adopted.
2.3 Drawing bending tool
Note
TruTops Bend needs a drawing of the tool to display special
tools saved in the database in TruTops Bend properly and make
collision calculations. A drawing of the side view is usually suffi-
cient.
 
S523EN 2015-12-04 Bending tools 6‐7
Modifying the bending tool
Condition
■ The drawing of a tool drawn with the assistant is open.
1. Select > Bend >Bending tool  >Modify.
The "Bending tool assistant" mask is displayed.
2. Delete the corners or lines that are to be modified.
3. Redraw the corners or lines.
4. Press OK.
The modified tool is displayed.
5. Save tool.
Drawing an upper tool
1. Select > Bend >Bending tool  >Create.
The "Bending tool assistant" mask is displayed.
2. Enter the height of the tool.
3. Select "Upper tool" under "Type of tool".
A preview of the selected type of tool is displayed in the pre-
view window.
4. Select Continue.
Note
Here, it is defined whether a side view or a front view of the
tool is to be drawn.
5. Select "Side view".
6. Select Continue.
7. Select "Normal" as tool type.
8. Select Continue.
9. Select "Head position" tool adapter.
10. Select Continue.
11. Enter "Opening angle" and "Radius".
12. Select Continue.
Note
The arrow keys can be used to enter angles in steps of 45°.
13. Enter the "length" of the line.
14. Enter "Angle".
15. Select "Absolute" angle or "Relative" to the marked point.
 
6‐8 Bending tools 2015-12-04 S523EN
Defining height and type of
tool
Selecting a view
Selecting tool type
Selecting a tool adapter
Entering tool tip parameters
Drawing the right side of the
tool
16. Select Preview.
The drawn line is shown in the window.
17. Use Continue to go to the end of the drawn line.
The line is drawn in black and the end is marked with a red
X.
or
Ø Use Back to delete the drawn line.
18. Select Auto.
The right side of the tool is automatically drawn to the speci-
fied height.
19. Select Mirror.
The tool is drawn completely.
If the sides of the tool are different, the same procedure as
for the right side must be followed for the left.
20. Mark a corner or line with Last or Next.
21. Select "Corners" and enter "Rounding" or "Bevel".
or
Ø Select "Lines" and enter "Length" or "Angle".
22. Select Modify.
23. Press OK.
The upper tool is displayed.
24. Save the tool as '*.WZG'.
Drawing a lower tool
1. Select > Bend >Bending tool  >Create.
The "Bending tool assistant" mask is displayed.
2. Enter the height of the tool.
3. Select the "lower tool".
A preview of the selected type of tool is displayed in the pre-
view window.
4. Select Continue.
Note
Here, it is defined whether a side view or a front view of the
tool is to be drawn.
5. Select "Side view".
6. Select Continue.
7. Select "Normal" as tool type.
8. Select Continue.
 
S523EN 2015-12-04 Bending tools 6‐9
Finishing drawing the upper
tool
Modifying a tool
Defining height and type of
tool
Selecting a view
Selecting tool type
9. Enter the "tool width", "opening angle", "die width", "groove
ground radius" and "feed radius".
10. Activate "Die width without feed radius" if the feed radius is
to be ignored for the die width.
1 Die width without feed
radius
2 Die width with feed radius
Fig. 41731
11. Select Continue.
Note
The arrow keys can be used to enter angles in steps of 45°.
12. Enter the "length" of the line.
13. Enter "Angle".
14. Select "Absolute" angle or "Relative" to the marked point.
15. Select Preview.
The drawn line is shown in the window.
16. Use Continue to go to the end of the drawn line.
The line is drawn in black and the end is marked with a red
X.
or
Ø Use Back to delete the drawn line.
17. Select Auto.
The right side of the tool is automatically drawn to the speci-
fied height.
18. Draw the left side as described above.
19. Mark a corner or line with Last or Next.
20. Select "Corners" and enter "Rounding" or "Bevel".
or
Ø Select "Lines" and enter "Length" or "Angle".
21. Select Modify.
22. Press OK.
The lower tool is displayed.
 
6‐10 Bending tools 2015-12-04 S523EN
Entering die lower tool
parameters
Drawing the right side of the
tool
Drawing the left side of the
lower tool
Modifying a tool
23. Save the tool as '*.WZG'.
Drawing holder
1. Enter "Height" and select "Upper tool" or "Lower tool".
2. Select Continue.
3. Select "Side view".
4. Select Continue.
5. Select "holder".
A preview of the selected type of tool is displayed in the pre-
view window.
6. Select Continue.
7. With upper tools, select the "type of tool adapter".
8. Select Continue.
9. Draw the right side.
10. Draw the left side.
11. Modify the corners or lines.
12. Press OK.
The holder is displayed.
13. Save the tool as '*.WZG'.
Drawing Z tool
1. Enter "Height" and select "Upper tool" or "Lower tool".
2. Select Continue.
3. Select "Side view".
4. Select Continue.
5. Select "Z tool".
A preview of the selected type of tool is displayed in the pre-
view window.
6. Select Continue.
7. With upper tools, select the "type of tool adapter".
8. Select Continue.
9. Enter the "angle" and the "flange length" of the Z tool.
10. Select Continue.
11. Draw the right side.
12. Draw the left side.
13. Modify the corners or lines.
14. Press OK.
The Z tool is displayed.
 
S523EN 2015-12-04 Bending tools 6‐11
15. Save the tool as '*.WZG'.
Drawing an adapter
1. Enter "Height" and select "Upper tool" or "Lower tool".
2. Select Continue.
3. Select "Side view".
4. Select Continue.
5. Select "Adapter".
A preview of the selected type of tool is displayed in the pre-
view window.
6. Select Continue.
7. Press OK.
The adapter is displayed in TruTops CAD.
8. Save the tool as '*.WZG'.
Drawing front view of a horn tool
Note
A front view of upper or lower tools is required only if they vary
from the standard front view. This applies, for example, to horn
tools.
1. Enter "Height" and select "Upper tool" or "Lower tool".
2. Select Continue.
3. Select "Front view".
The front view is displayed in the preview window.
4. Select Continue.
5. Enter the parameters of the tool.
6. Select Continue.
7. Draw the right side.
8. Draw the left side.
9. Modify the corners or lines.
10. Press OK.
The horn tool is displayed.
11. Save the tool as '*.WZG'.
 
6‐12 Bending tools 2015-12-04 S523EN
3. Bending profiles
3.1 Unfolding a bending profile
Bending parts with a rectangular unfolding and parallel bendings
can also be drawn simply in the form of the desired profile after
bending, with and without bending radii.
The profile can then be converted in the unfolding drawing with
the >Unfold function.
Profile drawing Fig. 24586
1. Select > Bending, >Profile >Unfold.
2. Enter the "material name", "material thickness" and "profile
depth" (width of the unfolding part).
3. Enter the "Upper tool group" and "Lower tool group".
The tool groups are required in order to determine appropri-
ate tools and the respective bend factors.
4. Press OK.
5. To define the placement of profile materials:
− Click on a line element of the profile.
− Click next to the element in the direction in which the
material can be found.
The profile is replaced by the respective unfolding.
3.2 Creating a bending profile
Bending profiles can be created to check and modify an unfold-
ing drawing. If the bending part contains inside contours, they
are deleted.
The outer contour is still rectangular during reunfolding.
1. Select > Bend, >Profile >Fold.
 
S523EN 2015-12-04 Bending profiles 6‐13
2. Enter the "material name" and material thickness.
3. Select whether the profile is to be for the "top side" or "bot-
tom side" of the bending part.
4. If the profile is to contain bending radiuses: select "With radi-
uses".
5. Press OK.
6. Click on a suitable bending line.
The bending direction and cross-section are defined for the
desired profile.
The profile is created at a right angle to the selected bending
line. All bendings which are parallel to the selected bending line
are taken into account.
3.3 Creating a profile as auxiliary
geometry
The created profile can be displayed as auxiliary geometry in the
current drawing.
Note
Bending lines are separated automatically. They do not need to
be separated manually. The only exception is if the outer contour
is not closed.
1. Define bending line.
2. Select > Bend, >Profile >Fold.
The "Create bending profile" mask is displayed.
3. Select "Create profile as construction geom.".
4. Press OK.
5. Follow the instructions in the command line.
The profile is added as auxiliary geometry.
3.4 Generating bumping (round bends)
Round bends can be created at the at the corner points in the
>Bending menu. Either the corner points are clicked directly or
the two following segments are clicked.
Notes
■ Bumping bendings can be created only in a profile.
 
6‐14 Bending profiles 2015-12-04 S523EN
■ In order to modify round bendings, they must first be deleted
and then recreated.
1. Open a profile.
2. Select > Bend >Profile >Create bumping.
3. Enter the number of segments.
4. Enter the radius.
5. Select OK or press ↲.
6. Click on the end points.
The round bending is created.
Round bending with auxiliary geometry Fig. 31039
3.5 Showing material
Note
The material thickness is indicated by the second profile. The
points of this profile cannot be caught or modified. The second
profile is automatically adapted each time the first profile is
changed.
1. Select > Bend >Profile >Show material.
2. Use the cursor to click on the side of the profile, which is to
be thickened.
The profile is thickened.
 
S523EN 2015-12-04 Bending profiles 6‐15
4. Creating profiles in the profile editor
4.1 Working in the profile editor
Profiles can be generated easily and quickly in the profile editor.
Saved profiles can be opened and modified without difficulty. If
the material thickness is changed, for example, the profile is
adapted automatically.
Profile editor screen surface Fig. 55275en
Opening the profile editor
Ø Open profile editor
Ø Select >Bending, >Start profile editor .
The "Select material" mask is opened.
Ø Select "unprocessed material ID" and "material thick-
ness".
Ø Press OK.
The profile editor is opened. The "Profile editor" screen
appears simultaneously, where the material is displayed
on screen. Profile segments can be entered via this
screen.
or
Ø Select the "profile editor" icon.
The profile editor is opened and the profile currently
being processed appears on the drawing sheet.
 
6‐16 Creating profiles in the profile editor 2015-12-04 S523EN
4.2 Opening and saving profiles
Opening a profile
1. Select > File, >Open.
"Open file" is opened.
2. Select the corresponding GEO file.
3. Select OK.
The profile unfolding appears.
4. Open profile editor.
The profile appears on the drawing sheet.
Saving a profile
After the profile is drawn, it cannot be saved until the unfolding
is generated.
1. Select > Bending, >Profile editor,>Change to unfolding .
The development is created.
2. Select > File , > Save as.
"Save file" is opened.
Note
The profile will not be automatically saved if the unfolding is
saved as a *.geo file.
3. Select *.GEO as "File type".
4. Enter the file name.
5. Select OK.
4.3 Creating a profile
Profiles can be created in two ways:
 
S523EN 2015-12-04 Creating profiles in the profile editor 6‐17
Icon Function
Sketch
Profile table (two options):
 ■ Input of angle and segment length.
 ■ Input of the horizontal and vertical changes
in distance between two points.
Tab. 6-1
Sketch
A new profile can be drawn or further segments attached to an
existing profile.
1. Select > Bending, >Profile editor, >Sketch.
The first mouse click (left mouse button) defines the origin.
The cursor is positioned at the desired point for further addi-
tional segments.
When there is already an existing profile, the cursor is auto-
matically placed at the previous segment and the new seg-
ment can be drawn. The relevant data is stored in the profile
table.
2. Position the cursor at the desired point and press the left
mouse button.
The segment is drawn and the length of the segment is dis-
played.
3. Select End.
The profile is drawn.
Profile table - entering angle and segment
length
Each segment of the profile is defined by its length and position
(angle).
1. Select Profile table.
2. Enter the first angle in relation to the coordinate system
under "Angle" and confirm with <Enter>.
 
6‐18 Creating profiles in the profile editor 2015-12-04 S523EN
Programming the first
segment
Fig. 46120
3. Enter the "Segment length" and confirm with <Enter>.
The segment is drawn.
4. Enter the other angles in relation to the previous segment
and confirm them with <Enter>.
Note
Dimensioning is always performed from outside radius to out-
side radius.
5. Enter the "Segment length" of the other segments and con-
firm with <Enter>.
Dimensioning from outside radius to outside radius Fig. 46121
Profile table - entering angle and delta X or
delta Y
1. Select Profile table.
2. Enter the first angle in relation to the coordinate system
under "Angle" and confirm with <Enter>.
 
S523EN 2015-12-04 Creating profiles in the profile editor 6‐19
Programming further
segments
Programming the first
segment
Fig. 46120
3. Enter the distance in X or Y direction under "dx" or "dy" and
confirm it with <Enter>.
The segment is drawn.
4. Enter the other angles in relation to the previous segment
and confirm them with <Enter>.
Note
The dimensioning always remains on one sheet side. The
dimensioning changes from outside to inside dimensioning if
the bending direction is changed.
5. Enter the distance in X or Y direction under "dx" or "dy" and
confirm it with <Enter>.
Dimensioning on one sheet side Fig. 45206
Profile table - entering delta X and delta Y
In this case the angle and the segment length are calculated on
the basis of the triangle between the distance in X direction and
the distance in Y direction.
Dx and dy always refer to the coordinate system displayed in the
profile editor.
1. Select Profile table.
2. Enter the distance in X direction under "dx" and confirm it
with <Enter>.
 
6‐20 Creating profiles in the profile editor 2015-12-04 S523EN
Programming further
segments
Note
The dimensioning always remains on one sheet side. The
dimensioning changes from outside to inside dimensioning if
the bending direction is changed.
3. Enter the distance in Y direction under "dy" and confirm it
with <Enter>.
Dimensioning on one sheet side Fig. 45206
4.4 Modifying profiles
For edge mirroring the first segment is divided at the center and
the mirrored profile attached there. The origin is moved to the
end of the new part.
Edge mirroring Fig. 55389
The profile is mirrored at its point of origin (at an angle of 180°).
The origin is moved to the end of the added part and the "old"
origin, like all segments, is renamed (In the below example the
"old" origin is now named "C"). The angle at C can be changed
by means of the profile table.
 
S523EN 2015-12-04 Creating profiles in the profile editor 6‐21
Edge mirroring
Point mirroring
Point mirroring Fig. 55390
The origin is shifted to the end of the profile and the order of the
segments is reversed. This is useful if segments are to be added
at the origin as well.
Note
A new segment will always be attached to the last segment.
The selected segment is rotated against the origin.
4.5 Deleting profiles
1. Select > Bending, >Profile editor, >Deleting profile bending .
2. Press All.
4.6 Deleting an element
1. Select > Bending, >Profile editor, >Deleting profile bending .
2. Select element.
All segments from the end of the profile up to the marked seg-
ment are deleted (the marked segment is not deleted). If a bend
is marked, that bend is deleted too.
4.7 Displaying the dimensioning
The outside or inside dimension for every marked segment is
displayed, depending on which dimensioning side was selected
in the profile table.
 
6‐22 Creating profiles in the profile editor 2015-12-04 S523EN
Invert
Turning
4.8 Profile table
A profile table is created automatically when the profile editor is
opened. To return from the settings to the profile table, select the
button Change to unfolding .
Whenever a profile is drawn, the corresponding data (angle, seg-
ment length, dx, dy) is automatically entered in the profile table.
These values can be edited at any time and the changes are
automatically applied to the drawn profile (absolute coordinate
system). The individual values can be selected with the cursor
keys.
When a profile is drawn in profile editor using the profile table,
the current effective length of the part is displayed in the mask
header of the profile table after each new element is added.
Mask header of the profile table Fig. 55317
Field Description
Profile depth The depth of the profile corresponds to the
length of the bending line.
Dimensioning side Choice between inner and outer dimensioning.
Point The origin and the bendings of the profile are
automatically named with consecutive letters
and are assigned to the respective angle in the
table (infinitely, AA is assigned after Z etc.).
Angle The angle can be changed in the table. The
value and the profile are adapted.
 ■ Select the input field.
 ■ Enter the angle.
 ■ Select <Enter>.
Segment length The segment length indicates the length of a
segment, measured from outer edge to outer
edge or inner to inner edge. The length of the
individual segments can be changed.
Dx/Dy The horizontal and vertical changes in distance
between two points are indicated by Dx/Dy.
These two values can be used to directly enter
and draw an angle.
Grayed out fields The grayed out values from Dx and Dy can be
changed.
 ■ Select the respective gray field.
 ■ With the context menu open, select the lines
whose table values are to be changed
(check marks indicate the values to be
changed). If the first line is selected, the
angle and segment length values are applied
to the profile. If the fourth line is selected,
the values for dx and dy are applied. Irrele-
vant values are grayed out.
 
S523EN 2015-12-04 Creating profiles in the profile editor 6‐23
Field Description
This button is used to open a new screen in
which the bending parameters are stored. They
can be edited here. The symbol on the button
changes depending on the type of bending.
Data relevant to the particular segment will be
displayed, such as type of bending, tool, angle
etc.
If changes are made, they are reflected in the
profile.
These buttons are used to switch forwards and
backwards between the individual bending oper-
ations.
Tab. 6-2
Normal bending
The upper or lower tool is selected via the buttons or the selec-
tion table. The tools are applied for all bendings with Apply to
all.
Method Description
Tangent The program applies two tangents to the segments if
the bending is calculated with the "Tangent" dimen-
sioning method. The radius is created at their point of
intersection.
Radius If the bend is calculated according to the "Radius
"dimensioning method, a tangent to the radius is cre-
ated.
Tab. 6-3
Notes
■ Depending on the setting, TruTops CAD uses the Trumpf
bend allowances saved in the database for bend value
(radius dimensioning method) or theoretical intersecting point
(tangent dimensioning method) when creating an unfolding.
■ The bend allowances for the radius dimensioning method are
always selected for angles <30°.
■ The bending radius depends on the tool and the material
thickness.
You can change the angle here.
Here you can change the lengths of the bordering segments (on
the selected angle).
You can enter the bending radius here. The default setting is 1.0
mm.
 
6‐24 Creating profiles in the profile editor 2015-12-04 S523EN
Tool
Dimensioning method
Angle
Side length
Bending radius
Round bending
If you select the "Round bending" bending type, two additional
selection fields appear.
Here you can enter the number of segments with which the
round bending is to be generated.
Notes
■ If you change the number of segments for the bending oper-
ation, the required length of the segments is calculated auto-
matically.
■ TruTops Bend always selects a segment bending with which-
ever tool is selected for the bending. A round tool is not
selected.
This field displays the length of the individual segments.
Note
If you change the length of the segments, the number of seg-
ments is automatically adapted to generate the desired round
bending.
The bend radius is particularly important for the round bending
and must not be confused with the angle.
Note
The material thickness is always added onto the entered bending
radius.
 
S523EN 2015-12-04 Creating profiles in the profile editor 6‐25
Number of segments
Segment length
Bending radius
Round bending with 5 segments (90° angle and 30° bend
radius + 2 mm sheet thickness)
Fig. 41599
Folding
If you select the "Folding" bending type, the same options as for
a normal bend will appear. In addition, here you can specify the
folding direction.
Note
If angle 0° is entered in the profile table, the folding bend type
will be selected automatically.
By entering the folding direction, "Up" or "Down", you can specify
the direction of the folding.
Notes
■ For folding, the bend radius is added twice to the double
material thickness (height of the folding = 2x bending radius
+ 2x material thickness).
■ A prebending at 30° is generated automatically for the folding
when developing the unfolding.
 
6‐26 Creating profiles in the profile editor 2015-12-04 S523EN
Folding direction
Top folding (0° angle, 0.05 mm bend radius, 2 mm sheet
thickness)
Fig. 41600
 
S523EN 2015-12-04 Creating profiles in the profile editor 6‐27
 
6‐28 Creating profiles in the profile editor 2015-12-04 S523EN
Index
Modifying geometries
Radiuses of roundings or circles ........4 ‐46
A
Adapting dimensioning text .....................4 ‐63
Add other details to list field of the files 1 ‐32
Applications in TruTops .............................1 ‐9
Closing and reopening individually .......1 ‐9
Closing permanently ............................1 ‐10
Opening several times ........................ 1‐10
Renaming ............................................ 1‐10
Switching language ............................. 1‐11
Arcs ..........................................................4 ‐13
Assistant for layout
Parts and saving as GEO, extracting 3 ‐27
Parts, extracting and saving as sheet 3 ‐28
Attributes
Deleting ................................................4‐58
Auxiliary circle, drawing .......................... 1‐75
Center and diameter ........................... 1‐76
Center and radius ............................... 1‐75
Diameter .............................................. 1‐75
Tangential to an element .................... 1‐78
Tangential to an element and two points
.............................................................. 1‐77
Tangential to three elements .............. 1‐78
Tangential to two elements .................1 ‐77
Three points ........................................ 1‐75
Auxiliary circles, drawing
Auxiliary circles, concentric .................1 ‐76
Auxiliary geometry
Deleting ................................................1‐79
Auxiliary line
Element, dividing .................................1 ‐74
Auxiliary line, drawing
2 points ................................................1 ‐71
Auxiliary line at right angles to an element
.............................................................. 1‐72
Auxiliary line parallel to the existing one
.............................................................. 1‐71
Horizontal or vertical ........................... 1‐71
Point and angle of inclination .............1 ‐73
Point and angle to the base line ........1 ‐73
Tangent at 2 arc elements ..................1 ‐74
Tangent at the arc element and point 1 ‐72
B
Backup & restore ...................................... 2‐3
Bending
Creating a profile as auxiliary geometry
.............................................................. 6‐14
Bending lines .............................................6 ‐3
Assigning bending information ..............6 ‐4
Creating a bending profile .................. 6‐13
Generating .............................................6 ‐3
Invert ......................................................6 ‐4
Marking ..................................................6 ‐5
Modifying ............................................... 6‐4
Restricting bending tool selection .........6 ‐7
Transferring bending tools .................... 6‐7
Unfolding a bending profile .................6 ‐13
Bending profiles .......................................6 ‐13
Bending tool
Adapter, drawing ................................. 6‐12
Drawing a lower tool .............................6 ‐9
Drawing an upper tool .......................... 6‐8
Drawing Z tool .....................................6 ‐11
Holder, drawing ....................................6 ‐11
Horn tool, drawing a front view ..........6 ‐12
Modify .................................................... 6‐8
Bending tools .............................................6 ‐7
Bevels ...................................................... 4‐20
Blank ........................................................2 ‐10
Bumping (round bend), generating .........6 ‐14
C
Calculator .................................................1 ‐65
Deactivating permanently ....................1 ‐65
Enter coordinates of points .................1 ‐66
Enter numerical values in input fields 1 ‐66
Characteristics ......................................... 1‐49
Characteristic fixed, switching on or off ....
1‐49
Characteristics, highlighting ................ 1‐50
Characteristics, removing ....................1 ‐50
Notches - advanced options ...............1 ‐51
TruTops behavior .................................1‐49
Check file dependencies (PDM) .............1 ‐45
Color scheme, modifying ........................ 1‐52
Command line and input line ................. 1 ‐16
Confirmation masks
 
S523EN 2015-12-04 Index 7‐1
Hidden masks, reactivating .................1 ‐68
Construction geometries
Deleting ................................................4‐59
Converting rectangles or oblong holes into
lines ......................................................... 4‐52
Coordinate system
Zero point, displacing ..........................1 ‐80
Copy – Paste, using ............................... 1‐64
Corner notches ........................................4 ‐16
Corners
Restoring ............................................. 4‐21
Correcting geometries .............................4 ‐47
D
Data backup .............................................. 2‐3
Data management .....................................2 ‐7
Open ......................................................2 ‐7
Database
Import data ............................................ 2‐4
Modify .................................................... 2‐4
Send by email ....................................... 2‐4
Dependencies between files (PDM)
Check dependencies ...........................1 ‐45
Delete, export dependent files, display
properties .............................................1 ‐46
Dimensioning
Angle ....................................................4‐62
Deleting ................................................4‐65
Format, setting .................................... 4‐65
Lines .................................................... 4‐60
Moving ................................................. 4‐63
Radiuses, arc lengths ......................... 4‐62
Showing and hiding ............................ 4‐60
Standard text size ............................... 4‐65
Directories
Rename ............................................... 1‐29
Display and hide button texts in the function
browser .................................................... 1‐17
Display and hide outline points .............. 1 ‐56
Display and hide quick navigation bar ...1 ‐17
Display detail view .................................. 1‐54
Display drawing completely .................... 1‐54
Display of drawings .................................1 ‐54
Display and hide outline points .......... 1 ‐56
Display detail view .............................. 1‐54
Display drawing completely ................ 1‐54
Displaying sheet completely ............... 1‐54
Get last view ....................................... 1‐56
Memorize and recall view ...................1 ‐56
Move screen section ...........................1 ‐55
Restructure drawing ............................ 1‐54
Zoom drawing ......................................1 ‐55
Displaying the Read me file ..................... 1 ‐8
Drawing
Circles ..................................................4 ‐10
Points .....................................................4 ‐7
Drawing a line
via 2 points ............................................4 ‐7
Drawing a multicurve contour .................4 ‐15
Drawing arcs
Via 3 points ......................................... 4‐13
Via center, start and end point ...........4 ‐13
Via diameter ........................................ 4‐14
Converting arcs into roundings ...........4 ‐16
Drawing a concentric arc ....................4 ‐14
Drawing a multicurve contour .............4 ‐15
Via center, radius, start and final angle ....
4‐15
Drawing auxiliary lines ............................ 1‐71
Drawing bevels
Via corner point ...................................4 ‐21
With the distance to the vertex .......... 4 ‐20
Drawing data, entering ..............................3 ‐4
Drawing display
Displaying sheet completely ............... 1‐54
Drawing geometries
Arcs ......................................................4‐13
Bevels ..................................................4 ‐20
Equidistant to the contour ...................4 ‐22
Lines ...................................................... 4‐7
Notches ................................................4‐16
Points .....................................................4 ‐7
Polygons ..............................................4 ‐12
Rectangle .............................................4‐13
Redrawing construction geometry ...... 4‐22
Rounding corners ................................4 ‐21
Drawing lines
As tangent at an arc element and point
................................................................ 4‐9
Horizontal or vertical lines .................... 4‐8
Parallel line to the available line .......... 4 ‐8
Perpendicular line to another element . 4 ‐9
Via tangent at 2 arc elements ............4 ‐10
With point, angle of inclination and length
................................................................ 4‐9
Drawing notches
Corner notches with different distances ....
4‐17
Corner notches with same distances .4 ‐18
Creating the bend relief later ..............4 ‐20
Rectangular notches ........................... 4‐18
Triangular notches ...............................4 ‐19
 
7‐2 Index 2015-12-04 S523EN
E
Element groups ....................................... 4‐66
Dissolving ............................................ 4‐66
Forming ................................................4‐66
Element notches ......................................4 ‐17
Elements
Combine .............................................. 4‐48
Separate .............................................. 4‐47
Shortening or extending ......................4 ‐49
Embossed text
Creating ............................................... 4‐78
Rotating using wheel mouse. ............. 4‐78
Enter coordinates of points .....................1 ‐66
Enter numerical values in input fields ....1 ‐66
Entries in the command line, repeating . 1 ‐64
Equidistant to the contour .......................4 ‐22
Exporting (PDM)
Using prompt/script ............................. 1‐44
Via the TruTops file browser ...............1 ‐43
External programs ...................................2 ‐26
Delete .................................................. 2‐31
Enter .................................................... 2‐26
Execute ................................................2 ‐28
Modify .................................................. 2‐31
F
File properties
Material, selecting ............................... 1‐39
Viewing ................................................ 1‐39
Files
Delete and restore .............................. 1‐30
Open with the Geo Viewer ................. 1 ‐33
Search ................................................. 1‐31
Sending through e-mail .......................1 ‐33
Zip ........................................................1 ‐33
closing ..................................................1 ‐11
Importing/exporting via Windows Explorer
(PDM) .................................................. 1‐41
Rename ............................................... 1‐29
Send from PDM to "My Documents" in the
file system ........................................... 1‐34
Files (PDM), importing
Using file browser ............................... 1‐41
Files, automatically checking updated status
when loading and saving in TruTops (PDM)
.................................................................. 1‐48
Files, opening
2D drawings in format DXF, DWG, IGS or
MI .........................................................3 ‐14
Foreign formats from CAD systems ...3 ‐14
TruTops files .......................................... 3‐9
Workfile ..................................................3 ‐9
Files, saving
or bending tools, saving as WZG ........ 3 ‐8
Drawing data, entering ..........................3 ‐4
Drawings, saving as DXF ..................... 3‐6
Geometry templates, saving as VLG for
macros ...................................................3 ‐7
Saving drawing as GEO ....................... 3‐4
TruTops CAD files .................................3 ‐3
Folders
Importing/exporting via Windows Explorer
(PDM) .................................................. 1‐41
Foreign formats from CAD systems, opening
.................................................................. 3‐14
Assistant for layout ............................. 3‐27
Defining DXF/DWG loading options ... 3‐15
Defining IGS loading options ..............3 ‐19
Defining MI loading options ................ 3‐21
Parts, extracting and saving as GEO 3 ‐27
Parts, extracting and saving as sheet 3 ‐28
Function browser .....................................1 ‐15
Display and hide ................................. 1‐16
Display and hide button texts in the func-
tion browser .........................................1 ‐17
Display and hide quick navigation bar ....
1‐17
Modify the size of the symbols .......... 1 ‐19
G
Generating single holes, circles of holes and
rows of holes ...........................................4 ‐24
Geo Viewer
Open files with it ................................. 1‐33
Geometries
Comparing with one another .............. 4‐80
Deleting ................................................4‐57
Dimensioning .......................................4 ‐60
Drawing ..................................................4‐7
Loading and preparing ........................4 ‐83
Prepare editing ....................................4 ‐83
Geometry comparator ............................. 4‐80
Comparison colors, setting ................. 4‐81
Loading comparison drawing ..............4 ‐81
Loading reference drawing ................. 4‐80
Opening and closing ........................... 4‐80
Geometry templates, saving as VLG for
macros ....................................................... 3‐7
Get last view ........................................... 1‐56
Group .......................................................2 ‐10
 
S523EN 2015-12-04 Index 7‐3
H
Hatching ...................................................4 ‐67
Changing the hatching ........................4 ‐69
Closed contours .................................. 4‐67
Contours with closed inner contours ..4 ‐68
Deleting the hatching .......................... 4‐69
Hidden message and confirmation masks,
activating ..................................................1 ‐68
I
Image files, opening and vectorizing ........3 ‐9
Import data into the database .................. 2 ‐4
Importing files (PDM)
Via Windows Explorer .........................1 ‐41
Importing several folders (PDM) .............1 ‐42
Importing, files(PDM)
Using the prompt/script .......................1 ‐44
Internet
TruTops, obtaining tips and tricks ........ 1 ‐8
K
Key functions of TruTops, using .............1 ‐63
Keyboard buffer of command line, using
(entries, repeating) .................................. 1‐64
Keyboard operation .................................1 ‐62
Copy – Paste, using ........................... 1‐64
Key functions of TruTops, using .........1 ‐63
Keyboard buffer Command line, using
(entries, repeating) .............................. 1‐64
Numerical values and coordinates, enter-
ing ........................................................1 ‐62
Texts, entering in input fields ..............1 ‐62
Windows keyboard commands and short-
cuts, using ........................................... 1‐62
L
Language, switching ................................1 ‐11
Loading
2D drawings in format DXF, DWG, IGS or
MI .........................................................3 ‐14
Foreign formats from CAD systems ...3 ‐14
Loading options
DXF, DWG ...........................................3 ‐15
IGS .......................................................3‐19
MI .........................................................3 ‐21
M
Machine
Copy ...................................................... 2‐8
Data ....................................................... 2‐8
Delete .................................................... 2‐9
Machine data .............................................2 ‐8
Machine rules
Assignment of values to colors and line
types .................................................... 2‐18
Change the value of a variable ..........2 ‐14
Copy variable ...................................... 2‐15
Delete variable .................................... 2‐17
Display details for a variable ..............2 ‐16
Macros ..................................................... 4‐24
Main menus and submenus ................... 1‐14
Marking .................................................... 4‐67
Deleting ................................................4‐67
Setting ..................................................4‐67
Masks and messages, moving ............... 1‐53
Material .................................................... 2‐10
Material data ............................................2 ‐10
Delete .................................................. 2‐13
Modify .................................................. 2‐12
Measuring
Angle ....................................................1‐80
Coordinates of a point ........................ 1‐79
Coordinates, radius and diameter of a cir-
cle ........................................................ 1‐79
Distance between 2 points ................. 1‐79
Horizontal or vertical distance between 2
points ................................................... 1‐79
Length ..................................................1 ‐80
Memorize and recall view .......................1 ‐56
Message masks
Hidden masks, reactivating .................1 ‐68
Mirror
Around a symmetry point ................... 4 ‐42
Mirroring geometries
Around a symmetry point ................... 4 ‐42
Modifing geometries
Mirror ................................................... 4‐42
Modify geometries
Stretch ................................................. 4‐44
Modifying geometries .............................. 4‐37
Rotating ............................................... 4‐38
Scale ....................................................4 ‐40
Shifting .................................................4 ‐37
Modifying line attributes
Color and line type ............................. 4 ‐45
Modifying line type .................................. 4‐45
 
7‐4 Index 2015-12-04 S523EN
Mouse operation ......................................1 ‐61
Automatically placing the mouse pointer in
masks .................................................. 1‐61
Move screen section ...............................1 ‐55
Multi-function buttons .............................. 1‐15
N
NC-post-processing program
Delete .................................................. 2‐31
Modify .................................................. 2‐31
NC-post-processing programs
Execute ................................................2 ‐28
NC post-processing program
Enter .................................................... 2‐26
NC post-processing programs ................ 2‐26
Notches ....................................................4 ‐16
Advanced options through the "Character-
istic" property .......................................1 ‐51
Numerical values and coordinates, entering
.................................................................. 1‐62
O
Open files, closing ...................................1 ‐11
Opening and saving files .......................... 3‐1
Opening and saving profiles ...................6 ‐17
Operating TruTops with the mouse ........ 1‐61
Outer contours, editing ............................4 ‐54
P
Parts, extracting
Saving as GEO ................................... 3‐27
Saving as sheet .................................. 3‐28
PDM (Product Data Management) ......... 1‐21
Advantages ..........................................1 ‐21
Check dependencies between files ....1 ‐45
Delete, export dependent files, display
properties .............................................1 ‐46
Files, automatically checking updated sta-
tus when loading and saving in TruTops
TruTops ................................................1‐48
Importing/exporting files and folders .. 1 ‐41
TruTops file browser ............................1 ‐27
TruTops with PDM, TruTops without PDM,
in comparison ......................................1 ‐22
PDM functions
Calling up via prompt/scripts (pdmCLI.exe)
.............................................................. 1‐23
pdmCLI.exe
Carrying out PDM functions ............... 1 ‐23
Place holders (for search) ...................... 1‐67
Place holders (wildcards), searching with the
help of ......................................................1 ‐67
Print ......................................................... 1‐69
GEO files as *.HPGL files .................. 1 ‐69
Printing
Screen content .................................... 1‐69
Profile as auxiliary geometry, creating ... 6 ‐14
Profile editor ............................................ 6‐16
Opening ............................................... 6‐16
Profile table ....................................6 ‐19, 6‐23
Profiles
Creating ......................................6‐16, 6‐17
Delete .................................................. 6‐22
Folding .................................................6 ‐26
Material, showing ................................ 6‐15
Modifying ............................................. 6‐21
Round bending ....................................6 ‐25
Saving ..................................................6 ‐17
Programs
User-defined programs ........................2 ‐32
Prompt
Carrying out PDM functions ............... 1 ‐23
Punching or bending tools, saving as WZG
.................................................................... 3‐8
R
Raw material ........................................... 2‐10
Recycle bin (PDM) ..................................1 ‐30
Empty ...................................................1‐30
Rename ............................................... 1‐31
Restructure display of drawings ............. 1‐54
Rotate
Rotate around 2 points ....................... 4‐39
Rotate geometries
Rotate around 2 points ....................... 4‐39
Round bend (bumping), generating ........6 ‐14
Rounding corners ....................................4 ‐21
Roundings
Converting arcs into roundings ...........4 ‐16
Rules ........................................................2 ‐14
Assignment of values to colors and line
types .................................................... 2‐18
Change the value of a variable ..........2 ‐14
Copy variable ...................................... 2‐15
Create variable ....................................2 ‐15
Delete variable .................................... 2‐17
Description of system rule variables .. 2 ‐18
Display details for a variable ..............2 ‐16
Running scripts (pdmCLI.exe) ................ 1‐23
 
S523EN 2015-12-04 Index 7‐5
S
Saving files
Workfile ..................................................3 ‐3
Scale of geometries
Via 2 points ......................................... 4‐41
Screen display .........................................1 ‐52
Color scheme, modifying .................... 1‐52
Masks and messages, moving ........... 1‐53
Window size, adapting ........................1 ‐52
Sheet, displaying completely .................. 1‐54
Shifting
Via 2 points ......................................... 4‐38
Shifting geometries
Via 2 points ......................................... 4‐38
Single folders (PDM), importing
Using file browser ............................... 1‐41
Software manual, displaying .....................1 ‐8
Software version, showing ........................1 ‐8
Status bar and message line ................. 1 ‐16
System rules ............................................2 ‐14
Assignment of values to colors and line
types .................................................... 2‐18
Change the value of a variable ..........2 ‐14
Copy variable ...................................... 2‐15
Delete variable .................................... 2‐17
Description of variables ...................... 2‐18
Display details for a variable ..............2 ‐16
T
Text
Creating a font file .............................. 4‐76
Creating reference file ........................ 4‐76
Entering ............................................... 4‐70
Inserting or modifying in geometries ..4 ‐70
Position of the reference point ........... 4 ‐70
Standard texts ..................................... 4‐71
Text parameters
Defining ................................................4‐70
Texts
Creating your own text font ................4 ‐75
Marking ................................................4 ‐71
Modifying parameters ..........................4 ‐72
Rotating using wheel mouse .............. 4‐71
Texts, entering in input fields ..................1 ‐62
To call up the online help .........................1 ‐8
Toolbars ................................................... 1‐16
Modify existing, create own ................ 1‐18
Move or downsize ...............................1 ‐18
Delete .................................................. 1‐19
Display and hide ................................. 1‐17
Modify the size of the symbols .......... 1 ‐19
Rename ............................................... 1‐19
Reset to the original status ................ 1 ‐19
TRUMPF functions ....................................2 ‐6
TruTops database ......................................2 ‐3
TruTops file browser ................................1 ‐27
Add other details to list field of the files
.............................................................. 1‐32
Create new folders ..............................1 ‐29
Delete and restore files ...................... 1 ‐30
Delete folders ...................................... 1‐29
Open ....................................................1 ‐28
Open files with Geo Viewer ................1 ‐33
Recycle bin (PDM) ..............................1 ‐30
Rename files or folders ...................... 1 ‐29
Search for files ....................................1 ‐31
Send files from PDM to "My Documents"
in the file system .................................1 ‐34
Send files through e-mail ....................1 ‐33
Zip files ................................................1 ‐33
TruTops CAD files, opening ......................3 ‐9
TruTops, exiting ......................................... 1‐7
TruTops, operating using keyboard ........ 1‐62
TruTops, operating with the mouse
Mouse pointer, automatically placing in
masks in TruTops ................................1 ‐61
TruTops, starting ........................................1 ‐7
TruTops, tips and tricks from the Internet 1 ‐8
U
User-defined programs ............................2 ‐32
Change ................................................ 2‐32
Enter .................................................... 2‐32
Run ...................................................... 2‐32
User-defined settings .............................. 1‐12
Copy and transfer ............................... 1‐12
User interface
Modify the size of the symbols (toolbars,
function browsers) ...............................1 ‐19
Command line and input line ............. 1 ‐16
Delete toolbar ......................................1 ‐19
Display and hide button texts in the func-
tion browser .........................................1 ‐17
Display and hide function browser .....1 ‐16
Display and hide quick navigation bar ....
1‐17
Display and hide toolbars ................... 1‐17
Function browser .................................1 ‐15
Main menus and submenus ............... 1‐14
Menus, function browsers and toolbars ....
1‐14
 
7‐6 Index 2015-12-04 S523EN
Modify existing toolbars, create own tool-
bars ......................................................1 ‐18
Move or downsize toolbars .................1 ‐18
Multi-function buttons .......................... 1‐15
Rename toolbar ...................................1 ‐19
Reset toolbars to original status .........1 ‐19
Status bar and message line ............. 1 ‐16
Toolbars ............................................... 1‐16
V
Variables
Creating and editing ..............................5 ‐9
Delete .................................................. 5‐12
Exporting ..............................................5 ‐11
Importing .............................................. 5‐11
Remove reference element ................ 5‐13
Set reference element ........................ 5‐12
Show reference element .....................5 ‐13
Variants ......................................................5 ‐3
Allocating ............................................... 5‐7
Copying ................................................5‐14
Creating and editing variables ..............5 ‐9
Creating new variants ......................... 5‐14
Delete variables ...................................5 ‐12
Deleting ................................................5‐14
Element selection, adopting ..................5 ‐7
Example .................................................5 ‐8
Executing ...............................................5 ‐6
Executing several times ......................5 ‐15
Exporting as *.GEO ............................ 5‐16
Exporting to Excel ...............................5 ‐16
Exporting variables ..............................5 ‐11
Generating .............................................5 ‐4
Importing from Excel ...........................5 ‐17
Importing variables .............................. 5‐11
Key words ..............................................5 ‐3
Manage ................................................5 ‐13
Modifying ............................................. 5‐14
Positioning ........................................... 5‐13
Renumbering ....................................... 5‐14
Saving as *.GMV ................................ 5‐15
Selecting overview ................................ 5‐7
Starting/ending .......................................5‐4
Undoing ................................................. 5‐6
Version, showing ....................................... 1‐8
W
Wildcards (for search) .............................1 ‐67
Window size, adapting ............................1 ‐52
Windows keyboard commands and short-
cuts, using ............................................... 1‐62
Workfile
Saving ....................................................3 ‐3
Opening ................................................. 3‐9
Z
Zero point of the coordinate system, dispac-
ing ............................................................ 1‐80
Zoom drawing ..........................................1 ‐55
 
S523EN 2015-12-04 Index 7‐7
 
7‐8 Index 2015-12-04 S523EN
 
Software manual
TruTops
Simple drawing and programming

 
 
Software manual 
 
 TruTops 
Simple drawing and programming 
 Edition: 10/2006 
 
 
 
Ordering information Please state title of document, desired language and date of 
edition. 
 
TRUMPF Werkzeugmaschinen GmbH + Co. KG 
Technische Dokumentation 
Johann-Maus-Straße 2 
D-71254 Ditzingen, Germany 
Phone: +49 (0) 71 56/3 03-0 
Fax: +49 (0) 71 56/3 03-540 
Internet: http://www.trumpf.com 
E-mail: docu.tw@de.trumpf.com 
 
 
This document was compiled by the Technical documentation department of 
TRUMPF Werkzeugmaschinen GmbH + Co. KG. 
 
All rights, especially the right to repr oduce, distribute or translate this docu-
mentation, are reserved to TRUMPF Werkzeugmaschinen GmbH + Co. KG, 
even in the case of patent and industrial  rights applications. No part of this 
documentation may be reproduced, proce ssed, duplicated or distributed by 
means of electronic systems in any form whatsoever without the prior written 
consent of TRUMPF Werkzeugmaschinen GmbH + Co. KG. Subject to techni-
cal alterations. Errors excepted. 
 
© TRUMPF Werkzeugmaschinen GmbH + Co. KG 
 
TRUMPF Werkzeugmaschinen GmbH + Co. KG assumes no liability for any 
mistakes in this documentation. No liabi lity is accepted for direct or indirect 
damage or injury resulting from the delivery or use of this documentation to the 
extent permitted by law. 
 
 
  
 
S580EN.DOC Before you continue reading... 5 
 
Before you continue reading... 
The aim of this software manual is to introduce, after a short 
overview, the scope of functions of the "Simple drawing" and 
"Simple programming" modules using two examples. 
 
This software manual complements the software manuals in the 
TruTops product family. 
 
 
 
6 Table of contents S580EN.DOC 
 
 Table of contents 
1. Basics .................................................................................9 
1.1 Opening simple modules ...................................................10 
1.2 Subdivision of the user interface .......................................11 
Zooming in the graphics window ..................................12 
1.3 Operating simple modules using the keyboard .................12 
1.4 Configuration .....................................................................13 
Optimizing keyboard operation.....................................13 
1.5 Entering values using the formula calculator.....................13 
1.6 Setting and operating the 3D-Viewer.................................14 
1.7 Meaning of colors and symbols .........................................15 
1.8 What is important for bending parts...................................17 
Base plus flanges .........................................................17 
Bend factors and relief grooves....................................18 
Data for bending ...........................................................19 
Creating individual bend factors and relief 
grooves.........................................................................19 
2. Simple drawing ................................................................20 
2.1 Example: drawing a flat workpiece ....................................20 
Creating new drawing...................................................20 
Drawing rectangular notch............................................21 
Drawing square bevels .................................................22 
Drawing roundings........................................................23 
Drawing a circle ............................................................24 
Drawing oblong hole.....................................................25 
Drawing rectangular bevels ..........................................26 
Closing and saving drawings........................................27 
2.2 Example: drawing a bending part ......................................28 
Creating new drawing...................................................28 
Drawing flanges............................................................29 
Drawing notches at elements .......................................35 
Drawing rectangular bevels ..........................................37 
Displacing coordinates system.....................................39 
Drawing a circle of holes ..............................................40 
Managing bend factors and relief grooves ...................41 
Drawing relief grooves - saving bending part...............42 
3. Simple programming.......................................................44 
3.1 Example: programming L plate..........................................44 
Creating new sheet.......................................................44 
Load part.......................................................................44 
Laying out the sheet .....................................................45 
Defining slitting strategy ...............................................46 
Processing parts automatically.....................................47 
 
 
S580EN.DOC Table of contents 7 
 
Optimizing the processing sequence ...........................49 
Simulating processing ..................................................50 
3.2 Example: programming bending part ................................51 
Creating new sheet.......................................................51 
Loading part..................................................................51 
Laying out the sheet .....................................................52 
Defining slitting strategy ...............................................52 
Processing parts automatically.....................................53 
Trimming sheets ...........................................................54 
Optimizing the processing sequence ...........................54 
Simulating processing ..................................................55 
4. Generating an NC Program.............................................56 
4.1 Defining settings ................................................................56 
4.2 Defining parameters ..........................................................58 
4.3 Defining options for subroutine technique .........................60 
4.4 Defining vaporizing with the laser......................................60 
4.5 Defining options for outputting the setup plan ...................61 
4.6 Sending the NC program to the machine ..........................61 
5. Glossary............................................................................63 
 
 
 
8 Table of contents S580EN.DOC 
 
 
 
S580EN.DOC Basics 9 
 
1. Basics 
The vast majority of all workpieces are single parts. The "Simple 
drawing" and "Simple programming" modules in the TruTops 
production system offer exactly the scope of functions that are 
needed for single workpieces. 
 
From drawing the workpiece to the reliable NC program - the user-
guided, graphical user interfac e guides you safely and quickly 
through the program. The design of the operating environment 
enables operation per touch or completely via the keyboard. 
 
Simple drawing   
 
Elements 
 
Corners 
 
Inner contours 
 
 
Flanges 
 
 
Simple programming   
 
Layout, changing 
numbers of parts 
 
Editing 
 
Repositioning 
 
Optimizing 
  NC program, 
generating 
 
 
 
Table 1 
 
 
10 Basics S580EN.DOC 
 
Note 
The simple modules are integrated in TruTops basic, for program-
ming directly at the machine, and integrated in the TruTops full 
version. In addition, TruTops basic is also available as a PC ver-
sion. 
 
TruTops basic does not have any nesting modules. 
 
 
 
 
1.1 Opening simple modules 
There are two variants for opening and closing the "Simple drawing 
and programming" modules: 
• Opening via TruTops basic directly at the machine. 
• Opening via TruTops full version at the PC workstation. 
 
Note 
In TruTops basic and in the TruTops full version, an extensive 
software documentation is available above the question mark in 
the form of online help.  
 
 
1. Open TruTops basic at the machine. 
The initial screen is displayed. 
2. Press on Drawing or Technology. 
"Simple drawing" or "Simple programming" is immediately 
opened. 
 
 
1. Open the TruTops full versi on at the PC workstation. 
The initial screen is displayed. 
2. Press on Drawing or Technology. 
The "Drawing" or "Technology" module is opened. 
3. Select File> Simple drawing or >Simple programming. 
"Simple drawing" or "Simple programming" is opened. 
 
 
 
 
 
Opening TruTops basic 
Opening TruTops full version 
 
 
S580EN.DOC Basics 11 
 
1.2 Subdivision of the user interface 
 
 
1 Guidance  
2 Graphics window  
3 Information or entry  
4 Main actions  
5 Prompt  
6 Coordinates 
7 Navigation (continue, undo...) 
Subdivision of the user interface 
 
 
 
 
Fig. 47752EN 
 
 
12 Basics S580EN.DOC 
 
Zooming in the graphics window 
The mouse pointer becomes a crosshair cursor when it is above 
the graphics window. A random, framed in cut out can be enlarged 
by using the left mouse button. The overall view is displayed again 
via the right mouse button. 
 
 
1. Left click on the desired area. 
2. Pull up a frame using the mouse. 
3. Click once again with the left mouse button. 
The framed cut out is displayed in enlarged form. 
4. Right click using the right mouse button. 
The overall view is displayed. 
 
 
 
 
1.3 Operating simple modules using the 
keyboard 
The "Simple drawing and programming" modules can be operated 
using the mouse, per touch screen, and via the keyboard.  
 
There is a subheading in square brackets beneath every touch 
button. The subheading matches the designation of a key in the 
number block on the keyboard. 
 
 
Single  
hole 
Row of 
holes/  
Hole grid 
Circle of 
holes 
Select hole 
geometry 
Coordi-
nates 
system 
Other 
flange  
Delete/ 
Restore 
Undo Inner 
contours 
finished 
[4] [5] [6] [Picture up] [Pos 1] [Picture 
down] 
[2] [Esc] [End] 
 
 
 
 
 
Table 2 
 
 
S580EN.DOC Basics 13 
 
1.4 Configuration 
Optimizing keyboard operation 
To enable you to operate the "Simple drawing and programming" 
modules optimally using the keyboard, TruTops key functions must 
be set. 
 
 
¾ Select Data module  >User >Configuration, "Set TruTops key 
functions". 
 
 
 
 
1.5 Entering values using the formula 
calculator 
Using the formula calculator, you can: 
• Carry out basic calculator o perations (point before dash). 
• Transfer results into the entry fields. 
 
 
1. Either 
¾ Double click on the entry field using the mouse. 
or 
¾ Press the <+> key in the entry field. 
2. Enter for example (10+20)*5-(40/2)+10. 
 
Note 
A special feature of the formula calculator is that the formula 
stays displayed in the entry field and can be modified. 
 
3. Press Calculate. 
The result 140 is displayed. 
4. Press Accept. 
The result will be adopted in the entry field. 
 
 
 
 
Opening formula calculator 
Executing basic calculator 
operations 
 
 
14 Basics S580EN.DOC 
 
1.6 Setting and operating the 3D-Viewer 
The 3D-Viewer shows three-dimensional models of the drawn geo-
metries. 
 
 
¾ If the 3D model of the geometry is not displayed: select View 
>Filled in the menu line for the 3D-Viewer. 
 
 
1. To rotate the 3D model: keep the left mouse button pressed 
down. 
A double arrow is displayed. 
2. Move the mouse with the left mouse button pressed down. 
The 3D model moves in the corresponding direction. 
3. To enlarge or make the 3D model smaller: keep the right 
mouse button pressed down. 
A double arrow is displayed. 
4. Move the mouse upwards with the right mouse button pressed 
down. 
The 3D model is made smaller. 
5. Move the mouse downwards with the right mouse button 
pressed down. 
The 3D model is enlarged. 
 
Setting the 3D-Viewer 
Rotating 3D model, 
changing size 
 
 
S580EN.DOC Basics 15 
 
1.7 Meaning of colors and symbols 
In the standard settings, colors and symbols in the Technology 
module and in the "Simple drawing and programming" modules 
have the following meaning: 
 
Color  Symbol, line type Meaning 
Geometries 
Cyan Asterisk Point for dot point marking 
Yellow Line type: solid Marking and/or engraving (adjustable) 
Yellow Line type: dotted Vaporizing (adjustable) 
Red All line types G eometry that is not to be processed 
Red Frame Only "Simple drawing and programming": 
• The subsequent action is related to the object framed in red 
Red Line Only "Simple drawing and programming": 
• Automatic suggestion that can be confirmed or rejected 
White or 
black 
Line type: solid • Sheet, geometry 
• Circumscribing rectangle with symbolic parts display 
White or 
black 
Line type: solid Geometry that is to be processed normally (approach and cut) 
White or 
black 
Line type: dashed Geometry that is to be cut without being approached 
Operations 
Blue Line type: solid • Traversing paths between processed parts 
• Machining operations in non-active clamping range 
Blue Line type: dashed Travel limits of the machine; non-active station 
Blue Arrow Repositioning of non-active clamping 
Blue Square Ejection via chute 
Cyan Cross Tool center for punching 
Cyan Line type: solid Punching operation 
Cyan Square Ejection via chute 
Yellow Line type: solid • Non-machined geometries/contours 
• Current processing in the simulation 
Yellow Coordinates X,Y Zero point of the machine 
Yellow Circle Collision point  for processing definition 
Yellow Cross • Positions on the transverse rail for tools and clamps 
• Tool center when processing with presser foot 
Yellow Rectangle, solid line type When standard tool is active: 
Clamping dead range for the standard tool 
 
When MultiTool is active: 
Maximum clamping dead range for the MultiTool type affected 
 
 
16 Basics S580EN.DOC 
 
Color  Symbol, line type Meaning 
Yellow Rectangle, dashed line type When standard tool is active: 
Maximum clamping dead range for MultiTools. 
 
When MultiTool is active: 
Clamping dead range for standard tools 
Yellow Trapezoid Clamping surface for clamps 
Yellow Circle in dashes Repositioning device 
Yellow Triangle (arrow) In connection with positioning motion: 
• Direction of the positioning motion 
• Start point of the next processing 
Yellow Square Ejection via chute 
Green Line type: solid • Laser processing 
• All other machining operations of a compulsory sequence 
Green Line type: dashed • Approach flag for laser processing 
• First processing in a compulsory sequence 
• Traversing paths between the parts of a processing sequence 
Green Square Ejection via punching flap 
Green Cross Tool center when processing with delayed single stroke 
Magenta Line type: solid Selected objects 
Magenta Line type: dashed Working range of the machine 
Magenta Square Ejection via laser flap 
Red Line type: solid Geometry and processing of the first part in the positioning sequence with 
interactive optimization 
Red Line type: dashed Travel limits of  the machine, active station 
Red Asterisk Punching h ead position during loading 
Red Square • Ejection with chute during punching 
• Initial processing with interactive optimization 
Red Square with diagonal Ejection with push-out subroutine 
Red Triangle Manual removal after machine stop 
Red Circle/Rectangle Stop pin without/with sensor 
Red Arrow Repositioning of active clamping 
Red Frame Only "Simple drawing and programming": 
• The subsequent action is related to the object framed in red 
Red Line Only "Simple drawing and programming": 
• Automatic suggestion that can be confirmed or rejected 
Colors and symbols 
 
 
 
 
 
 
S580EN.DOC Basics 17 
 
1.8 What is important for bending parts 
Base plus flanges  
A bending part comprises of a base and a random amount of 
flanges. The base is the surface in the drawing from where the 
most important or most bends start out. 
If the base is determined in the construction drawing of a bending 
part, then several flanges are added to this. 
 
 
 
A Base B Flanges 
Configuration of bending parts 
 
 
 
 
Fig. 46376 
 
 
18 Basics S580EN.DOC 
 
Bend factors and relief grooves 
During bending, the material is stretched or flattened. The change 
in the workpiece length during  the bending process is compen-
sated with the use of so-called bend factors. 
 
In "Simple drawing" the drawing is  made with the original dimen-
sions from the two dimensional construction drawing. 
 
To enable the finished bent workpiece to correspond with the re-
quired dimensions, the dimensions of the flat blank are automati-
cally shortened or extended by the bend factors. 
 
 
A relief groove is a "small notch". It reduces deformation of the 
edge or corner during bending. 
 
 
Example of a corner relief groove 
 
 
 
 
What do bend factors 
produce? 
Why are relief grooves 
necessary? 
Fig. 46548 
 
 
S580EN.DOC Basics 19 
 
Data for bending 
In accordance with the material ID and with the sheet thickness, 
the "Simple drawing" module selects the upper and lower tool 
combination from a database, and displays the bend factor 
associated with it. 
 
 
1st way: 
• An individual database has been created. Creating the bending 
data requires expert knowledge. The data from the individual 
database are always queried first. 
 
2nd way: 
• There is a connection to TruTops Bend. "Simple drawing" 
reads off the data from this database. 
 
3rd way: 
• "Simple drawing" calculates the bend factors in accordance 
with DIN if the individual databa se is empty or a connection to 
TruTops Bend does not exist. 
 
 
 
 
Creating individual bend factors and relief 
grooves  
1. Press Manage. 
2. Press Manage bend factors or Manage relief grooves. 
3. Press New. 
4. Enter data for bend factors or relief grooves. 
5. Press Enter. 
The new data are entered into the selection field and into the indivi-
dual database. 
 
 
The database 
Where do the data for 
bending come from? 
 
   
 
 
20 Simple drawing S580EN.DOC 
 
2. Simple drawing 
2.1 Example: drawing a flat workpiece 
 
Flat workpiece: "L-plate" 
 
 
 
 
Creating new drawing 
1. Press New drawing. 
2. Enter or select material: 
–  "Designation": St37-20. 
–  "Thickness" 2 mm. 
3. Press Continue. 
4. Enter "Base measurements": 
–  "Horizontally": 120 mm. 
–  "Vertically": 120 mm. 
5. Press Continue. 
 
 
 
 
Fig. 46531 
  
 
 
S580EN.DOC Simple drawing 21 
 
Drawing rectangular notch 
1. Press Corners. 
2. Press Rectangular notch. 
3. Enter notch values: 
–  "Horizontally": 70 mm. 
–  "Vertically": 60 mm. 
–  "Relief groove": 0 mm. 
4. Press Continue. 
A suggestion is displayed in red. 
5. If the notch is not positio ned at the correct place: press No 
repeatedly. 
6. If the correct position has been reached: press Yes. 
The notch is drawn. 
 
 
7. Press Finished. 
 
 
 
 
  
Fig. 46471 
 
 
22 Simple drawing S580EN.DOC 
 
Drawing square bevels 
1. Press Square Bevel. 
2. Enter bevel values: 
–  "Distance": 10 mm. 
3. Press Continue. 
A suggestion is displayed in red. 
4. If the bevel is not positio ned at the correct place: press No 
repeatedly. 
5. If the correct position has been reached: press Yes. 
The bevel is drawn. 
 
 
6. Press Finished. 
 
 
 
 
 
  
Fig. 46472 
 
 
S580EN.DOC Simple drawing 23 
 
Drawing roundings 
1. Press Rounding. 
2. Enter rounding data: 
–  "Radius": 10 mm. 
3. Press Continue. 
A suggestion is displayed in red. 
4. If the first rounding is not posit ioned at the correct place: press 
No repeatedly. 
5. If the correct position has been reached: press Yes. 
6. To position the second rounding at the correct place: press No 
repeatedly. 
7. If the correct position has been reached: press Yes. 
The roundings are drawn. 
 
 
8. Press Finished. 
 
 
 
 
 
  
Fig. 46473 
 
 
24 Simple drawing S580EN.DOC 
 
Drawing a circle 
1. Press Inner contours. 
2. Either 
¾ If an inner contour has not yet been drawn: 
–  Press Single hole, Circle. 
or 
¾ If an inner contour has already been drawn: 
–  Press Single hole, Select hole geometry, Circle. 
3. Enter circle data: 
–  "Diameter": 10 mm. 
4. Press Continue. 
5. Enter the single hole position: 
–  "to the right": 10 mm. 
–  "to the top": 110 mm. 
6. Press Finished. 
7. Press Single hole, Select hole geometry, Circle. 
8. Enter Circle data: 
–  "Diameter": 10 mm. 
9. Press Continue. 
10. Enter the single hole position: 
–  "to the right": 10 mm. 
–  "to the top": 10 mm. 
The single holes are drawn. 
 
 
11. Press Finished. 
 
 
 
  
Fig. 46474 
 
 
S580EN.DOC Simple drawing 25 
 
Drawing oblong hole 
1. Press Elements. 
2. Press Oblong hole. 
3. Enter oblong hole data: 
–  "Depth": 20 mm. 
–  "Width": 10 mm. 
4. Press Continue. 
A suggestion is displayed in red. 
5. If the edge on which the oblong hole is to be positioned is not 
correct: press Next or Previous repeatedly. 
6. If the correct position has been reached: press Continue. 
7. Press Change reference. 
8. Press Right edge end. 
9. Enter position of notch center: 
–  "Distance": 15 mm. 
10. Press Continue. 
The oblong hole is drawn. 
 
 
11. Press Element finished. 
 
 
 
 
 
  
Changing reference to edge 
Fig. 46475 
 
 
26 Simple drawing S580EN.DOC 
 
Drawing rectangular bevels 
1. Press Corners. 
2. Press Rectangle Bevel. 
3. Enter bevel values: 
–  "Horizontally": 5 mm. 
–  "Vertically": 10 mm. 
4. Press Continue. 
A suggestion is displayed in red. 
5. If the first bevel is not posi tioned at the correct place: press No 
repeatedly. 
6. If the correct position has been reached: press Yes. 
7. If the second bevel is not positioned at the correct place: press 
No repeatedly. 
8. If the correct position has been reached: press Yes. 
The bevels are drawn. 
 
 
9. Press Finished. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Fig. 46476 
 
 
S580EN.DOC Simple drawing 27 
 
Closing and saving drawings 
1. Press Corners finished. 
2. Press All finished. 
3. Save part: press Yes. 
"File information" is opened. 
4. Enter file information. 
5. Select OK. 
"Save file" is opened. 
6. Enter L-plate next to "File name". 
7. Select OK. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
28 Simple drawing S580EN.DOC 
 
2.2 Example: drawing a bending part 
435
210 39.99 72.51
20
7510
495 35 40 40
Bending part: "Box" 
 
 
 
 
Creating new drawing 
1. Press New drawing. 
2. Enter or select material: 
–  "Designation": St37-20. 
–  "Thickness": 2 mm. 
3. Press Continue. 
 
Note 
The base is the surface in the drawing from where the most 
important or most bends start out. 
 
4. Enter "Base measurements": 
–  "Horizontally": 495 mm. 
–  "Vertically": 435 mm. 
5. Press Continue. 
 
 
 
 
Fig. 46547 
  
 
 
S580EN.DOC Simple drawing 29 
 
Drawing flanges 
1. Press Flanges. 
2. Press Generate. 
The lower edge is marked in red. 
3. If the correct edge upon which the flange is to be drawn is not 
selected: 
–  Press Previous or Next. 
4. Press Continue. 
5. Enter flange values: 
–  "Height": 75 mm. 
6. Enter the distances: 
–  "from the left": 0 mm. 
–  "from the right": 0 mm. 
7. Press Continue. 
8. Specify flange direction: 
–  Press To the top. 
The flange is drawn. The bending line is displayed in green. 
9. To display the 3D model of the bending part: press 3D-Viewer. 
 
 
10. Press Generate. 
11. To select the upper edge: 
–  Press Previous or Next. 
12. Press Continue. 
  
Drawing lower flange 
Fig. 46477 
 
 
30 Simple drawing S580EN.DOC 
 
13. Enter flange values: 
–  "Height": 75 mm. 
14. Enter the distances: 
–  "from the left": 0 mm. 
–  "from the right": 0 mm. 
15. Press Continue. 
16. Specify flange direction: 
–  Press To the top. 
The flange is drawn. The bending line is displayed in green. 
17. Press Generate. 
18. To select the left edge: 
–  Press Previous or Next. 
19. Press Continue. 
20. Enter flange values: 
–  "Height": 75 mm. 
21. Enter the distances: 
–  "from the left": 0 mm. 
–  "from the right": 0 mm. 
22. Press Continue. 
23. Specify flange direction: 
–  Press To the top. 
The flange is drawn. The bending line is displayed in green. 
Drawing upper flange 
Drawing left flange 
 
 
S580EN.DOC Simple drawing 31 
 
24. To define flange overlapping: press Left. 
 
Notes 
• The touch buttons for the overlapping are not pressed in. 
• The overlapping of the flanges is represented with shaded bar 
displays. The overlapping can be controlled via the positioning 
of the bars to one another.  
 
 
Overlapping of flanges 
 
25. Press Continue. 
The "*" symbol is displayed at the next corner. 
26. To define flange overlapping: press Left.  
27. Press Continue. 
28. Press Generate. 
Defining flange overlapping 
Fig. 46532 
 
 
32 Simple drawing S580EN.DOC 
 
29. To select the right edge: 
–  Press Previous or Next. 
30. Press Continue. 
31. Enter flange values: 
–  "Height": 35 mm. 
32. Enter the distances: 
–  "from the left": 0 mm. 
–  "from the right": 0 mm. 
33. Press Continue. 
34. Specify flange direction: 
–  Press To the top. 
The flange is drawn. The bending line is displayed in green. 
35. To define flange overlapping: press Bottom.  
36. Press Continue. 
The "*" symbol is displayed at the next corner. 
37. To define flange overlapping: press Top.  
38. Press Continue. 
39. To display the 3D model of the bending part: press 3D-Viewer. 
 
 
Drawing first right flange 
Fig. 46478 
 
 
S580EN.DOC Simple drawing 33 
 
40. Press Generate. 
41. To select the right edge: 
–  Press Previous or Next. 
42. Press Continue. 
43. Enter flange values: 
–  "Height": 40 mm. 
44. Enter the distances: 
–  "from the left": 0 mm. 
–  "from the right": 0 mm. 
45. Press Continue. 
46. Specify flange direction: 
–  Press to the bottom. 
The flange is drawn. 
47. To define flange overlapping: press None.  
48. Press Continue. 
49. Press Generate. 
50. To select the right edge: 
–  Press Previous or Next. 
51. Press Continue. 
52. Enter flange values: 
–  "Height": 40 mm. 
53. Enter the distances: 
–  "from the left": 0 mm. 
–  "from the right": 0 mm. 
54. Press Continue. 
55. Specify flange direction: 
–  Press To the top. 
The flange is drawn. 
Drawing second right flange 
Drawing third right flange 
 
 
34 Simple drawing S580EN.DOC 
 
56. To display the 3D model of the bending part: press 3D-Viewer. 
 
 
57. Press Flanges finished. 
 
 
Fig. 46479 
 
 
S580EN.DOC Simple drawing 35 
 
Drawing notches at elements  
1. Press Elements. 
2. If the correct lower flange is not selected: 
–  Press Other flange. 
–  Navigate to the lower flange using the navigation touch 
button. 
–  Press Continue. 
3. Press Rectangle. 
4. Enter rectangular values: 
–  "Depth": 40 mm. 
–  "Width": 210 mm. 
 
Note 
The entered values are self-susta ining. They don't have to be 
reentered for more notches. 
 
5. Press Continue, Continue. 
6. Press Change reference. 
–  Press Central. 
–  Press Continue. 
The "*" symbol marks the notch center at the element. 
7. Press Continue. 
The notch is drawn. 
8. To select the upper flange: 
–  Press Other flange. 
–  Navigate to the upper flange using the navigation touch 
button. 
–  Press Continue. 
9. Press Rectangle. 
10. Press Continue, Continue, Continue. 
The notch is drawn. 
11. To select the left flange: 
–  Press Other flange. 
–  Navigate to the left flange using the navigation touch 
button. 
–  Press Continue. 
12. Press Rectangle. 
13. Press Continue, Continue, Continue. 
The notch is drawn. 
 
  
Drawing rectangular notch 
at lower flange 
Changing reference 
for the notch 
Drawing rectangular notch 
at upper flange 
Drawing rectangular notch 
at left flange 
 
 
36 Simple drawing S580EN.DOC 
 
14. Press Element finished. 
15. To display the 3D model of the bending part: press 3D-Viewer. 
 
 
 
 
Fig. 46480 
 
 
S580EN.DOC Simple drawing 37 
 
Drawing rectangular bevels 
1. To select the left flange: 
–  Press Other flange. 
–  Navigate to the left flange using the navigation touch 
button. 
2. Press Corners. 
3. Press Square Bevel. 
4. Enter bevel values: 
–  "Distance": 39.99 mm. 
5. Press Continue. 
A red cross marks the corner for the next action. 
6. If the first bevel is not posi tioned at the correct place: press No 
repeatedly. 
 
 
Corners to be processed (red cross) 
 
Note 
Make sure that the red cross is positioned at the correct 
corner. 
 
7. If the correct position has been reached: press Yes. 
8. If the second bevel is not positioned at the correct place: press 
No repeatedly. 
9. If the correct position has been reached: press Yes. 
The bevels are drawn. 
10. Press Finished. 
  
Drawing bevels for the upper, 
lower, and left flange 
Fig. 46533 
 
 
38 Simple drawing S580EN.DOC 
 
11. Repeat steps for the upper and lower flange. 
12. To select the right flange: 
–  Press Other flange. 
–  Navigate to the right flange using the navigation touch 
button. 
13. Press Corners. 
14. Press Square Bevel. 
15. Enter bevel values: 
–  "Distance": 10 mm. 
16. Press Continue. 
17. If the first bevel is not posi tioned at the correct place: press No 
repeatedly. 
18. If the correct position has been reached: press Yes. 
19. If the second bevel is not positioned at the correct place: press 
No repeatedly. 
20. If the correct position has been reached: press Yes. 
The bevels are drawn. 
21. Press Finished. 
22. To display the 3D model of the bending part: 
–  Press Corners finished. 
–  Press 3D-Viewer. 
 
 
23. Press Inner contours finished. 
 
 
Drawing bevels for the right 
flange 
Fig. 46534 
 
 
S580EN.DOC Simple drawing 39 
 
Displacing coordinates system 
1. Press Inner contours. 
2. Press Other flange. 
3. Press Base. 
4. Press Continue. 
5. Press Coordinates system. 
6. Press Bottom left. 
 
 
 
 
   
Fig. 46535 
 
 
40 Simple drawing S580EN.DOC 
 
Drawing a circle of holes 
1. Press Inner contours. 
2. Either 
¾ If an inner contour has not yet been drawn: 
–  Press Circle of holes, Circle. 
or 
¾ If an inner contour has already been drawn: 
–  Press Circle of holes, Select hole geometry, Circle. 
4. Enter circle data: 
–  "Diameter": 20 mm. 
5. Press Continue. 
6. Enter center of hole circle: 
–  "to the right": 247 mm. 
–  "to the top": 217.5 mm. 
7. Press Continue. 
The center is marked with a red cross. 
8. Press the lower symbol under "Point/Angle definition". 
9. Enter hole circle dimensions: 
–  "Start angle": 0°. 
–  "End angle": 360°. 
–  "Radius": 100 mm. 
–  "Number": 8. 
10. Press Circle of holes finished. 
The circle of holes is drawn. 
11. Press Inner contours finished. 
  
 
 
S580EN.DOC Simple drawing 41 
 
12. To display the 3D model of the bending part: 
–  Press 3D-Viewer. 
 
 
13. Press All finished. 
 
 
 
 
Managing bend factors and relief grooves 
(see Section 1.8, p. 19) 
Fig. 46536 
 
 
42 Simple drawing S580EN.DOC 
 
Drawing relief grooves - saving bending part 
1. Press the lower symbol under "Corner relief groove", and 
upper symbol under "Edge relief groove". 
2. Enter corner relief groove: 
–  "Diameter": 4 mm. 
3. Enter edge relief groove: 
–  "Length": 5 mm. 
–  "Width": 2 mm. 
4. Press Continue. 
 
Note 
For the selected material ID and thickness, the entered values 
for the corner and edge relief grooves can be entered into the 
database. 
5. Transfer values to database? Press Yes. 
 
Note 
The relief grooves are saved after saving the drawing. 
6. Save part: press Yes. 
"File information" is opened. 
7. Enter file information. 
8. Select OK. 
"Save file" is opened. 
9. Enter Box next to "File name". 
10. Select OK. 
 
  
 
 
S580EN.DOC Simple drawing 43 
 
The file is saved. The relief grooves are displayed. The bending 
part has been shrunk in accordance with the bend factor. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Fig. 46537 
 
 
44 Simple programming S580EN.DOC 
 
3. Simple programming 
3.1 Example: programming L plate 
Creating new sheet 
1. Press New sheet. 
2. Enter machine and sheet data: 
–  "Machine": TruPunch 1000. 
–  "Material ID": ST37-20. 
–  "XxYxZ": 2000x1000x2 mm. 
3. Enter margins: 
–  "Left": 20 mm. 
–  "Right": 20 mm. 
–  "Top": 20 mm. 
4. To set the lower margin: press on the lower icon under "Block 
clamping range". 
–  Enter 100 mm. 
5. Press Continue. 
The empty sheet is displayed. 
 
 
 
 
Load part 
1. Press Load part. 
2. Select file 'L-Platte.geo'. 
3. Select OK. 
The part is displayed under "Part information". 
4. Enter part information: 
–  "Number of pieces": 30. 
–  "Angle": 0°. 
5. Enter web width for parts: 
–  "X": 15 mm. 
–  "Y": 15 mm. 
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
   
 
 
S580EN.DOC Simple programming 45 
 
Laying out the sheet 
1. To change the start corner: press Start corner. 
2. Press Top left. 
3. Press Continue. 
The sheet layout is displayed: 
 
 
4. Press Format block. 
5. Press + X repeatedly. 
The modified sheet layout is displayed: 
 
 
6. Press Continue. 
 
  
Fig. 46538 
Changing block layout 
Fig. 46539 
 
 
46 Simple programming S580EN.DOC 
 
7. Press Change numbers of parts. 
–  Press +X repeatedly. 
–  Press +Y repeatedly. 
The modified sheet layout is displayed: 
 
 
8. Press Continue, Continue. 
The final sheet layout is displayed. 
9. Press Continue to technology. 
"Separating strategy" is opened. 
 
 
 
 
Defining slitting strategy 
¾ Press Grid. 
"Automatic processing" is displayed. 
 
 
 
 
 
Adding parts 
Fig. 46540 
  
 
 
S580EN.DOC Simple programming 47 
 
Processing parts automatically 
1. To create your own tooling list: press Tooling lists. 
"Tooling list management" is opened. 
2. Select New. 
"Create new tooling list" is opened. 
3. Enter name: e.g. User1. 
4. In the tooling list: select Circular 10 mm. 
5. Select Undo. 
6. Define the tooling lists for automatic processing: 
–  Select "Single hole": User1. 
–  Select "Notch": Trumpf. 
–  Select "Contour": Trumpf. 
7. Press Edit. 
Automatic processing begins. The tools used are displayed in 
the information area on the right-hand side. Processings are 
marked in red. 
 
Note 
Tooling lists can still be changed at the present time for pro-
cessings shown in red. Undo cancels the complete processing. 
All processings are shown in cyan after the next step. The 
named actions are then no longer an option. 
 
 
 
  
Fig. 46543 
 
 
48 Simple programming S580EN.DOC 
 
8. To check whether the processing is complete: make a frame 
around a part using the left mouse button. 
The part is shown in enlarged form. 
9. If the oblong hole is not processed: press Process one part. 
–  Press Elements, At element. 
The element not processed is framed in red (in this example: 
straight element at oblong hole). 
–  Press Tool. 
–  In the selection list: select Rectangle 10x5 mm. 
–  Select OK. 
–  Press "Confirm processing for this element": press Yes. 
The next element not processed is framed in red (in this 
example: circular element at oblong hole). 
–  Press Tool. 
–  In the selection list: select Circular 10 mm. 
–  Select OK. 
–  Press "Confirm processing for this element": press Yes. 
The next element not processed is framed in red (in this 
example: straight element at oblong hole). 
–  Proceed as described above for this element. 
–  Press "Confirm processing for this element": press Yes. 
–  Press Finished, Elements finished. 
The added processing is transferred to all equal elements. All 
processings are shown in cyan. 
10. If the rounding has been proc essed with "Square 10": press 
Number of tools. 
–  To display the processing of the rounding: press Previous 
or Next repeatedly. 
In the Tools already used in part list, the tool for the rounding is 
marked with a star. 
–  Press Delete. 
Processing with this tool is removed. 
–  Press Add. 
"Tools" opens. 
–  In the selection list: select Square 5 mm. 
–  Select OK. 
–  Press Recalculate. 
–  Press Finished. 
The processing is recalculated. The processing of the rounding 
is executed using "Square 5". 
Processing oblong hole 
manually 
Changing number of tools, 
processing rounding 
 
 
S580EN.DOC Simple programming 49 
 
11. Press Part finished. 
The entire sheet is displayed. 
12. Press Continue. 
"Trimming" is displayed. 
13. Press Continue. 
14. Confirm the message for repositioning with Yes. 
"Optimization" is displayed. 
 
 
 
 
Optimizing the processing sequence 
1. Press Slitting sequence. 
–  Press Meander top left. 
–  Press Continue. 
2. Enter "Optimization parameters": 
–  "Grouping of rows": 2. 
"Tool sequence" opens. 
3. Press Previous tool. 
In the list of tools already used, the "*" symbol wanders down-
wards by one position. The tool is marked. 
4. Press Tool to the bottom. 
The marked tool is sorted in the list by one position down-
wards. 
5. Press Continue. 
The "Simulation of tool change" message list is displayed. 
6. Select OK. 
"Simulation" is displayed. 
 
 
 
 
Concluding processing 
 
  
 
 
50 Simple programming S580EN.DOC 
 
Simulating processing 
1. Either 
¾ Press Next processing. 
The simulation is displayed step-for-step. 
or 
¾ Keep key <6> on the keyboard pressed down. 
The longer the key is pressed down, the quicker the simulation 
proceeds. 
2. To the start the simulation from the beginning: press Simula-
tion to start. 
3. Press Continue. 
"Generate NC Program" is displayed (see Section 4, p. 56). 
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
S580EN.DOC Simple programming 51 
 
3.2 Example: programming bending part 
Creating new sheet 
1. Press New sheet. 
2. Enter machine and sheet data: 
–  "Machine": TruPunch 1000. 
–  Material ID: ST37-20. 
–  "XxYxZ": 2000x1000x2 mm. 
3. Enter margins: 
–  "Left": 20 mm. 
–  "Right": 20 mm. 
–  "Top": 20 mm. 
4. To set the lower margin: press on the lower icon under "Block 
clamping range". 
–  Enter 100 mm. 
5. Press Continue. 
The empty sheet is displayed. 
 
 
 
 
Loading part 
1. Press Load part. 
2. Select the 'Kiste.geo' file. 
3. Select OK. 
The part is displayed under Part information. 
4. Enter part information: 
–  "Number of pieces": 2. 
–  "Angle": 0°. 
5. Enter web width for parts: 
–  "X": 15 mm. 
–  "Y": 15 mm. 
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
  
 
 
52 Simple programming S580EN.DOC 
 
Laying out the sheet 
1. To change the start corner: press Start corner. 
2. Press Top left. 
3. Press Continue. 
The sheet layout is displayed: 
 
 
4. Press Continue, Continue. 
The final sheet layout is displayed. 
5. Press Continue to technology. 
"Separating strategy" is opened. 
 
 
 
 
Defining slitting strategy 
¾ Press Grid. 
"Automatic processing" is displayed. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Fig. 46545 
 
   
 
 
S580EN.DOC Simple programming 53 
 
Processing parts automatically 
1. To create your own tooling list: press Tooling lists. 
"Tooling list management" is opened. 
2. Select New. 
"Create new tooling list" is opened. 
3. Enter name: e.g. User1. 
4. In the tooling list: select Circular 20 mm. 
5. Select Undo. 
6. Define the tooling lists for automatic processing: 
–  Single hole: select User1. 
–  Notch: select Trumpf. 
–  Contour: select Trumpf. 
7. Press Edit. 
Automatic processing begins. The tools already used are 
displayed. The processed parts are shown in red. 
 
Note 
Tooling lists can still be changed at the present time for pro-
cessings shown in red. Undo cancels the complete processing. 
All processings are shown in cyan after the next step. The 
named actions are then no longer an option. 
 
 
 
8. Press Continue. 
"Trimming" is displayed. 
 
 
 
  
Fig. 46546 
 
 
54 Simple programming S580EN.DOC 
 
Trimming sheets 
1. Press Trimming, Strategy, U stripes. 
2. Press Tool. 
3. In the selection list: select Rectangle 70x5 mm. 
4. Select OK. 
5. Press Continue. 
The start part (magenta color) at which the trimming cut begins 
is suggested. 
6. Press Continue. 
The start part is confirmed. 
7. To define the end part at the bottom right on the sheet: press 
Previous repeatedly. 
The end part (magenta color) at which the trimming cut ends is 
suggested. 
8. Press Continue. 
9. Confirm the messages for the trimming edge with Yes and OK. 
The trimming edge is displayed. 
10. Press Continue. 
11. Confirm the message for repositioning with Yes. 
"Optimization" is displayed. 
 
 
 
 
Optimizing the processing sequence 
1. Press Slitting sequence. 
–  Press Meander top left. 
–  Press Continue. 
2. Enter "Optimization parameters": 
–  "Grouping of rows": 1. 
"Tool sequence" opens. 
3. Press Previous tool. 
In the list of tools already used, the "*" symbol wanders down-
wards by one position. The tool is marked. 
 
   
 
   
 
 
S580EN.DOC Simple programming 55 
 
4. Press Tool to the bottom. 
The marked tool is sorted in the list by one position down-
wards. 
5. Press Continue. 
The "Simulation of tool change" message list is displayed. 
6. Select OK. 
"Simulation" is displayed. 
 
 
 
 
Simulating processing 
1. Either 
¾ Press Next processing. 
The simulation is displayed step-for-step. 
or 
¾ Keep key <6> on the keyboard pressed down. 
The longer the key is pressed down, the quicker the simulation 
proceeds. 
2. To the start the simulation from the beginning: press Simula-
tion to start. 
3. Press Continue. 
"Generate NC Program" is displayed (see Section 4, p. 56). 
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
56 Generating an NC Program S580EN.DOC 
 
4. Generating an NC Program 
4.1 Defining settings 
¾ Select "Settings". 
 
 
Connection between name of "NC file" and "Program name" 
TruTops uses the digits from t he name of the NC file. If the name 
of the NC file contains no digits, then TruTops will use the date and 
the time in sequence to generate a name that is as unequivocal as 
possible. 
 
The program name and the name of the NC file can be modified at 
any time (see following pages). 
For machines with Bosch control systems, only numerical program 
names (digits) can be used. 
 
 
For machines with Siemens control systems and alphanumeric 
program names, TruTops offers the name of the NC file as the 
default program name. 
 
Note 
With alphanumeric program names no distinction is made between 
lower case and upper case letters. 
 
 
Modifying the name of the NC file 
TruTops uses the following NC file names: 
• The file name of the first loaded part when generating multi-
copy areas. 
• The sheet name of the respective sheet when machining a 
nesting job. 
 
1. Delete the names to be found under "NC file". 
2. Enter New name. 
 
 
Modifying NC program path  
TruTops offers in the default settings the NC program path 
'/TRUMPF.NET/Workfiles/user1/'. 
 
1. Open "NC program path" with " >". 
The file browser opens. 
2. Select New directory. 
3. Select OK. 
TruTops shows the new path under "NC program path." 
 
Machines with Bosch 
control systems 
Machines with Siemens 
control systems 
 
 
S580EN.DOC Generating an NC Program 57 
 
Defining path for saving setup plan 
TruTops offers in the default settings the path for setup plan 
'/TRUMPF.NET/Workfiles/user1/'. 
 
1. Put a check mark at "Path for setup plan". 
2. Open "Path for set-up plan" with >. 
The file browser opens. 
3. Select New directory. 
4. Select OK. 
TruTops shows the new path under "Path for setup plan". 
 
 
Modifying program name 
1. Delete old program name. 
2. Enter new program name. 
Note 
For machines with Bosch control systems, only numerical 
program names (digits) can be used. 
 
 
NC title, customer, programmer, remark ... 
TruTops writes this information in the setup plan. The remarks for 
the setup plan are self-holding unt il they are overwritten by new 
text. 
¾ Enter the desired information. 
 
 
Defining additional settings 
1. Go to one of the tabs "Parameters", "Subroutine techn.", 
"Laser" or "Setup plan" (see following descriptions). 
2. Select OK. 
TruTops generates the NC program. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
58 Generating an NC Program S580EN.DOC 
 
4.2 Defining parameters 
¾ Select "Parameters". 
 
Parameter Effect 
Number of program runs Indicates how often the NC program at the machine is to be executed. The 
information is outputted in the setup plan. 
 
If a production plan has been created with TruTops or NcLink, then the NC 
program will be executed accordingly often, one time after another, as 
specified in the NC program. 
Monitoring clamp positions The machine executes t he clamp checking program with position monitoring. 
Monitor space between clamps The machine executes the clamp checking program with space monitoring. 
Prepare loading at end of program Usef ul when the NC program is to be executed several times in succession. 
 
The loading of the next identical sheet starts immediately at the end of the 
NC program even while the sheet is still being processed. 
Reload first tool at end of program Useful when the NC pr ogram is to be executed several times in succession. 
 
The first tool in the NC program will be automatically newly mounted at the 
end of the NC program. 
Use M24 Using high number of strokes. 
Block numbering To reduce the file size  of the NC program: deselect option. 
Transferring technology data The laser technology dat a and the basic tooling data are transferred to the 
machine. Depending on the machine setting, the data is then adopted only if 
it is not yet present at the machine. 
Transferring push-out subroutine The standard push-out subroutine Q9998 is outputted. 
Transferring sheet layout subroutine The sheet layout subr outine "P9994" is applied to the control system of the 
machine with this option. It must be applied after each initial installation or 
after each update. The sheet layout subroutine is the user interface for the 
layout with single parts. 
Overwriting NC files without warning The message "Do you wish to overwrite" will not be displayed. 
NC post-processing program  The post-processing progr am is started immediately after the generation of 
the NC program (see Section below). 
Starting transfer immediately The mask for data trans fer is automatically opened after the generation of the 
NC program. The NC program can be copied or moved into the transfer 
folder. 
 
 
 
Table 3 
 
 
S580EN.DOC Generating an NC Program 59 
 
Entries for post-processing programs or complete post-processing 
programs are supplied with TruTops. Post-processing programs 
are started directly after the NC program is generated. 
 
TruTops Punch contains as default settings the following NC post-
processing programs: 
 
 Name of the NC post-processing 
program 
Open NC program using an editor. • LST_EDITOR 
Print the NC program with the 
default printer. 
• STD_PRINTER 
• STD_PRINTER_MO  
(MO = modal, i.e. TruTops waits while 
the NC program is being printed) 
 INTERNETEDITOR 
Collect data for printing labels. PREPARE_LABEL 
NC post-processing programs 
 
 
Example: the NC text is to be opened and printed with the 
"Notepad" editor after the NC program is generated. 
 
 
1. Select "NC post-processing program". 
2. Open the input box with >. 
"Program selection" opens. 
3. Make a check mark at NC post-processing program (here: 
STD_PRINTER). 
TruTops imports the STD_PRINTER in the input box. 
 
 
You can create your own NC post-processing programs and add 
them to the selection list (see TruTops software manual, Data 
module). 
TruTops then offers these post-processing programs here. 
 
 
 
 
Using NC post-processing 
programs  
Table 4 
Using one's own post-
processing programs  
 
 
60 Generating an NC Program S580EN.DOC 
 
4.3 Defining options for subroutine 
technique 
Subroutine technique means: certain processing sequences which 
are repeatedly executed on a single sheet are written in a separate 
program (subroutine). This subroutine can be called up repeatedly 
within the main program. 
 
 
1. Select "Subroutine techn.". 
2. Either 
¾ Select "Part-oriented". 
The NC program is generated in a part-oriented manner. This 
means that the system is searched within a multi-copy area for 
identical processing sequences,  which are written in the sub-
routine according to the defined rules. 
¾ Enter "Minimum number of machining operations for a sub-
routine". 
¾ Enter "Minimum number of activations for a subroutine". 
or 
¾ Select "Compulsory sequence". 
The machining operations in compulsory sequences are 
written into subroutines. 
 
 
 
 
4.4 Defining vaporizing with the laser 
Prerequisite 
• The "Vaporizing" option is activated (Rule). 
 
 
1. Select "Laser". 
 
Note 
The options under "Vaporizing" control the automatic vapori-
zing of all laser contours. No  manually programmed vaporizing 
is affected by this, neither "Sheetwise" nor "Partwise". 
 
2. Select "Vaporizing" "No" or "Sheetwise" or "Partwise". 
 
 
 
 
 
 
S580EN.DOC Generating an NC Program 61 
 
4.5 Defining options for outputting the 
setup plan 
¾ Select "Setup plan". 
(refer to TruTops software manual) 
 
 
 
 
4.6 Sending the NC program to the 
machine 
1. Select the "Parameters" tab. 
–  Select "Start transfer immediately". 
–  Select OK. 
TruTops displays the "NC file transfer" mask. 
 
Note 
'C:\DH\ToPsmanu.dir' is the default directory for NC programs 
on the machine. 
 
"NC file transfer" 
 
2. Open "Source file name" with >. 
The TruTops file browser is displayed. 
3. Search the file if necessary. 
4. Mark the NC program ('.lst') you are searching for. 
5. Select OK. 
TruTops displays the "NC file transfer" mask again. The file 
name and the path of the NC program are entered under 
"Source file". 
 
 
Fig. 27067EN 
Selecting the NC program 
 
 
 
 
62 Generating an NC Program S580EN.DOC 
 
When transferring, TruTops always  offers the directory that is 
entered for the machine (see TruTops software manual, Data 
module). 
 
 
Note 
'C:\DH\ToPsmanu.dir' is the default  directory for NC programs on 
the machine. 
 
 
1. To define the target directory permanently: select Data module, 
Machines >Data, Basic machine , Data 7 , "Name of transfer 
path". 
2. To modify the destination directory on a short-term basis (until 
next time the machine is changed): open "Target directory" 
via >. 
TruTops displays the "Select directory" mask. 
3. Select directory. 
4. Select OK. 
The "NC file transfer" mask will be displayed again. The new 
target directory is entered. It remains in effect until the next 
time the machine is exchanged. 
 
 
1. To send a copy of the NC pr ogram to the machine: select 
"Copy". 
or 
¾ To send the original of the NC program to the machine: 
select "Pan". 
2. To transfer additional NC programs after transferring the first 
NC program, deactivate "Close dialog after transfer". 
3. Select Transfer. 
The data is transferred to the machine. 
 
 
 
 
Changing the target directory 
on the machine 
Starting transfer 
 
 
S580EN.DOC Glossary 63 
 
5. Glossary 
Term Icon Action/Explanation 
Bend factors - During bending, the material is stretched or flattened. The change in the work-
piece length during the bending process is compensated with the use of so-
called bend factors. 
 
To enable the finished bent workpiece to correspond with the required dimen-
sions, the dimensions of the flat blank are automatically shortened or extended 
by the bend factors. 
Manage bend factor  
 
Opens the database for bend factors. 
Other flange 
 
Opens a navigation window for single selection of the flange to be changed:  
 
 
Relief grooves - A relief groove is a "small notch ". It reduces deformation of the edge or corner 
during bending. 
Manage relief grooves  
 
Opens the database for relief grooves. 
Base - A bending part comprises of a base and a random amount of flanges. The base 
is the surface in the drawing from where the most important or most bends start 
out. 
 
If the base is determined in the construction drawing of a bending part, then 
several flanges are added to this. 
TruTops start menu 
 
Goes to TruTops start mask. 
Manage 
 
Opens the database for bend factors or relief grooves. 
Continue in TruTops 
 
Goes to TruTops basic or into the TruTops full version.  
 
 
 
Table 5 
 
 
64 Glossary S580EN.DOC